TOYODenki VF66B Operating Manual

TOYO INTELLIGENT INVERTER

Operating Manual

Table of Contents

Preface ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4

Be Sure To Read This Before Use ………………………………………………………………………………… 5

Safety Notice ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5

Chapter 1 Checking and Inspecting Package …………………………………………………………………… 9

1.1 Checking Package and Inspection on Purchase ………………………………………………………… 9

Chapter 2 Product Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………… 11

2.1 Features ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 11

2.2 Configuration ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter ………………………………………………………………… 15

3.1 Surrounding Environment and How to Install It ………………………………………………………… 15

3.1.1 Installation Environment …………………………………………………………………………… 15

3.1.2 How to Install Inverter ……………………………………………………………………………… 15

3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover ……………………………………………………………………… 18

3.2.1 How to Open Front Cover ………………………………………………………………………… 18

3.2.2 How to Close Front Cover ………………………………………………………………………… 22

3.3 How to Connect Inverter …………………………………………………………………………………… 25

3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals ……………………………………………………………… 25

3.3.2 How to Connect Speed Sensor and PG Input Board …………………………………………… 26

3.4 Terminal Specifications …………………………………………………………………………………… 28

3.5 Notes for Wiring and Electrical Wire Size ………………………………………………………………… 33

3.5.1 Notes for Wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………… 33

3.5.2 Electrical Corrosion Measures …………………………………………………………………… 34

3.5.3 Input / Output Devices and Electrical Wire Size of Main Circuit Wires ………………………… 35

3.5.4 Electrical Wire Size of Control Board and PG Input Board ……………………………………… 40

3.6 Inverter Selection and List of Applied Motors …………………………………………………………… 41

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter …………………………………………………………… 43

4.1 Basic Operating Procedures from Console ……………………………………………………………… 43

4.1.1 Explanation of Display and Operation Keys on Console ………………………………………… 43

4.1.2 What Are Displayed at Power-on ………………………………………………………………… 49

4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings ……………………………………………………………………… 51

4.1.4 Changing Parameter Simple Mode and Full Mode ……………………………………………… 56

4.1.5 Changing Inverter Control Methods ……………………………………………………………… 61

4.1.6 Checking Operating State ………………………………………………………………………… 64

4.1.7 List of Monitor Items ………………………………………………………………………………… 66

4.2 Operation Flow of Inverter ………………………………………………………………………………… 70

4.3 Autotuning of Parameters (Automatic Setting) …………………………………………………………… 73

4.3.1 What Is Autotuning of Parameters?

……………………………………………………………… 73

4.3.2 Requirements for Performing Autotuning ………………………………………………………… 74

4.3.3 How to Perform Autotuning ………………………………………………………………………… 77

4.4 Operations on Console …………………………………………………………………………………… 84

4.4.1 Rotating Motor with Specified Frequency/Speed ………………………………………………… 84

4.4.2 Changing Acceleration or Deceleration Time …………………………………………………… 86

－ 1 －

4.4.3 Changing Rotation Direction ……………………………………………………………………… 88

4.4.4 How to Perform JOG Operation …………………………………………………………………… 89

4.4.5 Changing JOG Frequency/Speed ………………………………………………………………… 90

4.4.6 Changing JOG Acceleration or Deceleration Time ……………………………………………… 92

4.5 Start and Stop through External Contact in V/f Control ………………………………………………… 94

4.6 Changing Speed through Voltage Setting Device/Variable Resistor in V/f Control ………………… 97

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters …………………………………………………………………………… 99

5.1 List of Parameters That Can Be Changed in Simple Mode …………………………………………… 99

5.1.1 V/f Control …………………………………………………………………………………………… 99

5.1.2 Induction Motor Vector Control …………………………………………………………………… 105

5.1.3 ED Motor Vector Control ………………………………………………………………………… 112

5.2 List of Parameters in Full Mode ………………………………………………………………………… 120

5.3 Detailed Explanation of Parameters …………………………………………………………………… 129

5.3.1 Basic Setting Area ………………………………………………………………………………… 129

5.3.2 Area A (Setting Area for Maximum Frequency/Maximum Speed, Rated Motor, and Other

Parameters) ………………………………………………………………………………………… 132

5.3.3 Area b (Setting Area for Operation Mode and Operation Sequence) ………………………… 145

5.3.4 Area c (setting area for parameters related to multifunction input) …………………………… 158

5.3.5 Area d (setting area for acceleration or deceleration time, frequency/speed jump functions, and MRH functions) ……………………………………………………………………………… 167

5.3.6 Area E (setting area for frequency characteristics, torque limit, torque command characteristics, and speed control) ………………………………………………………………………………… 173

5.3.7 Area F (setting area for built-in dynamic brake (DB) operation, protection functions, and traceback) ………………………………………………………………………………………… 180

5.3.8 Area G (setting area for analog input and output) ……………………………………………… 190

5.3.9 Area H (setting area for multifunction output) …………………………………………………… 196

5.3.10 Area i (setting area for internal PLC, droop control, and mechanical loss compensation) … 203

5.3.11 Area J (setting area for digital communication options) ……………………………………… 211

5.3.12 Area L (setting area for input and output gain) ………………………………………………… 214

5.3.13 Area n (monitor adjustment area) ……………………………………………………………… 215

5.3.14 Area o (special adjustment area) ……………………………………………………………… 216

5.3.15 Area P (setting area for internal PLC and P register) ………………………………………… 217

5.3.16 Area S (setting area for mode selection and analog input/output adjustment) …………… 217

5.4 Operation Using S Area Parameters …………………………………………………………………… 222

5.4.1 How to Clear Protections ………………………………………………………………………… 222

5.4.2 Data Transfer from/to External Console Option ………………………………………………… 223

5.4.3 Direct-current Voltage Detection Gain Adjustment …………………………………………… 234

5.4.4 Analog Input (1) Gain and Offset Adjustment …………………………………………………… 237

5.4.5 Analog Input (1) Gain Adjustment (for 4 to 20 mA input characteristics) …………………… 242

5.4.6 Analog Output (1) Gain and Offset Adjustment ………………………………………………… 246

5.4.7 Analog Input (2) through (5) Gain and Offset Adjustment ……………………………………… 251

5.4.8 Analog Output (2) through (5) Gain and Offset Adjustment …………………………………… 256

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………………………………………… 262

6.1 Protection Messages and Actions ……………………………………………………………………… 262

－ 2 －

6.1.1 Displays and Behaviors in Protection Display Mode …………………………………………… 262

6.1.2 List of Protection Messages ……………………………………………………………………… 263

6.1.3 How to Handle Protection Messages …………………………………………………………… 269

6.1.4 Meaning of Setting Error (SE--) Display ………………………………………………………… 286

6.1.5 Meaning of Error Displays during Autotuning …………………………………………………… 291

6.2 How to Check Data in Protection Display Mode ……………………………………………………… 293

6.2.1 How to Display Protection Operation Data ……………………………………………………… 293

6.2.2 List of Data of Protection Operation and Protection History Display ………………………… 294

6.3 How to Reset Protection Display Mode ………………………………………………………………… 295

6.4 How to Check Protection History ………………………………………………………………………… 296

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection ………………………………………………………………………… 298

7.1 Periodic Inspection ………………………………………………………………………………………… 298

7.2 When [ALM] LED on Console Turns On ………………………………………………………………… 299

7.3 How to Replace Cooling Fan …………………………………………………………………………… 300

7.3.1 How to Remove Cooling Fan ……………………………………………………………………… 300

7.3.2 How to Install Cooling Fan ………………………………………………………………………… 303

7.4 Inspecting and Replacing Main Circuit Capacitor ……………………………………………………… 304

7.5 How to Perform Insulation Resistance Test …………………………………………………………… 304

7.6 How to Discard Parts ……………………………………………………………………………………… 305

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board …………………………………………………………………………… 306

8.1 Tasks Required for Replacing Control Board …………………………………………………………… 306

8.2 How to Replace Control Board …………………………………………………………………………… 306

8.3 How to Initialize Inverter Main Unit ……………………………………………………………………… 309

8.4 How to Adjust Analog Input Gain ………………………………………………………………………… 313

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications ……………………………………………………………………………… 318

9.1 Common Specifications …………………………………………………………………………………… 318

9.2 List of Capacity …………………………………………………………………………………………… 322

Chapter 10 Outline Drawing of Inverter ………………………………………………………………………… 326

10.1 Standard Type …………………………………………………………………………………………… 326

10.2 Non-standard Type (Heat Generation Part Protruded Outside) …………………………………… 328

Chapter 11 Supporting Overseas Standards …………………………………………………………………… 330

Chapter 12 Attentions for Contacting Us ……………………………………………………………………… 331

Chapter 13 Industrial Product Warranty ………………………………………………………………………… 332

13.1 No-charge warranty period ……………………………………………………………………………… 332

13.2 Warranty scope ………………………………………………………………………………………… 332

13.2.1 Problem diagnosis ……………………………………………………………………………… 332

13.2.2 Repair ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 332

13.3 Disclaimer ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 332

13.4 Repair period after product discontinuation …………………………………………………………… 332

13.5 Delivery conditions ……………………………………………………………………………………… 333

INDEX ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 335

－ 3 －

Preface

Preface

Thank you very much for choosing our inverter.

This manual describes how to handle a main unit of the inverter.

It provides instructions for using the inverter, such as how to install, wire, and operate it correctly as well as handling methods of its protection operation.

Before operating it, be sure to carefully read this manual.

Also, keep this manual in an appropriate place so that operators can always take and read it.

In addition to the standard functions, the inverter provides many features. You can build an optimal system for different applications by using its various functions. In such a case, preferentially use the values described in the dedicated "Instruction Manual" and "Test Report" for the function.

When delivering any of your products with our inverter built in, consider that this manual can be distributed to end users. Also, when changing our factory default initialized data (hereinafter referred to as Initialized data) for setting parameters of the inverter, make sure that end users can be informed about the changed contents of the Initialized data.

Product Overview

The inverter can drive an induction motor and a Interior Permanent Magnetic Synchronous Motor (ED motor), and it can support various applications, using V/f control, vector control without sensor, and vector control with sensor.

You can set two types of operation control methods and motors.

Long-life parts are used for components which require replacement (such as a main circuit capacitor and a cooling fan), which can reduce maintenance cost.

－ 4 －

Be Sure To Read This Before Use

Be Sure To Read This Before Use

Safety Notice

To use the inverter correctly, be sure to completely read this manual and all other attached documents before installation, operation, maintenance, and inspection.

You need to have a good knowledge of equipment, safety information, and all notices before using the inverter.

In this manual, safety notices are ranked as "Danger," "Warning," and "Caution."

When improper use may cause a dangerous situation, death or serious injury may result, and its danger seems to be very urgent.

When improper use may cause a dangerous situation, death or serious injury may result, and its danger seems to be very urgent.

When improper use may cause a dangerous situation, and death or serious injury may result.

When improper use may cause a dangerous situation, and death or serious injury may result.

When improper use may cause a dangerous situation, medium-level or minor injury may result, and only physical damage may result. However, it may cause serious results depending on the situation. Cautions described in this manual are all important. Be sure to observe them.

When improper use may cause a dangerous situation, medium-level or minor injury may result, and only physical damage may result. However, it may cause serious results depending on the situation. Cautions described in this manual are all important. Be sure to observe them.

－ 5 －

Be Sure To Read This Before Use

Installation

● Install the inverter on non-inflammables such as metal.

Otherwise, a fire may occur.

● Do not put inflammables near the inverter.

Otherwise, a fire may occur.

● A model over 22 kW is considered as a heavy material. Don't lift it by yourself. Otherwise, you may be injured.

● Do not hold the front cover when transporting the inverter.

It may fall, which may result in injury.

● Install the inverter in a place which can support its weight.

It may fall, which may result in injury.

● Do not install and operate the inverter which is damaged or does not have any parts.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

● Do not install the inverter in an atmosphere which contains plasticizer such as halogen and DOP

(phthalate ester).

Otherwise, it may be damaged.

● Check that the input power is turned off before wiring.

Otherwise, electric shock or a fire may occur.

Wiring

Wiring

● Be sure to connect a ground wire.

Otherwise, electric shock or a fire may occur.

● Electrical engineering technicians should connect wires.

Otherwise, electric shock or a fire may occur.

● Be sure to install the inverter before wiring.

Otherwise, electric shock or a fire may occur.

● For ground fault protection, connect a leakage protection relay or leakage circuit breaker to inverter input terminals [R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3].

Otherwise, electric shock or a fire may occur.

● Do not connect the alternating-current power supply to inverter output terminals [U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3].

Otherwise, injury or a fire may occur.

● Check that inverter power rating matches alternating-current power supply voltage.

Otherwise, injury or a fire may occur.

● Do not directly connect a resistor between direct-current terminals [+1]/[+2] and [ － ] or [+1] and [+2].

Otherwise, a fire may occur.

－ 6 －

Be Sure To Read This Before Use

Operation

● Be sure to install the front cover before turning on the input power. Do not remove the front cover during energization.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Do not use operation keys by wet hands.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Do not touch terminals such as main circuit terminals and a protective earth terminal during energization.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

● The stop button ([STOP/RESET] key) is available only when functions have been set. Provide an emergency stop button separately.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

● When alarm reset is performed with operation signals input, the inverter suddenly restarts. Check that signals are turned off, and then perform alarm reset.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

Operation

● Do not touch a heat sink and a discharge resistor because they reach high temperatures.

Otherwise, you may get burned.

● You can set speed of the inverter from low to high. Before operation, check the permitted range of the motor and machinery sufficiently.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

● Provide a holding brake separately if necessary.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

Maintenance and inspection, and replacement of parts

● Before inspection, turn off the input power after checking that the motor is stopped, and then wait for over ten minutes. Also, check that direct-current voltage between the direct-current terminals [+1] and [-] or [+2] and [-] is less than or equal to 30 V.

Otherwise, electric shock, injury, or a fire may occur.

● Check that inverter power rating matches alternating-current power supply voltage.

Otherwise, injury and electric shock may occur, or parts may be damaged.

● Do not perform maintenance and inspection or replace parts except qualified persons. Use a tool for insulation for maintenance and inspection.

Otherwise, electric shock or injury may occur.

Others

● Never modify the inverter.

Otherwise, electric shock or injury may occur.

－ 7 －

Be Sure To Read This Before Use

General notice

● To provide detailed explanation, all figures described in this manual are sometimes drawn with the cover or a safety shield removed.

To operate the inverter, be sure to set the specified cover or shield to its original position and to follow the procedure described in this manual.

● When the inverter is packed with fumigated wooden materials, its electronic components may be fatally damaged.

Be sure to use ways other than fumigation for sterilization and insect removal. Also, process them before packing.

● These safety notices and specifications in this manual are subject to change without notice.

－ 8 －

Chapter 1 Checking and Inspecting Package

Chapter 1 Checking and Inspecting Package

1.1 Checking Package and Inspection on Purchase

After receiving the inverter, check the package, and then inspect the product and accessories.

If you have any problem, contact us or the distributor.

(1) Check that the package contains the inverter main unit and the Precautions.

(2) Check that the specifications, accessories, spares, and options are delivered as you order.

The label on the surface of the cover mentions the inverter-type.

－ 9 －

Chapter 1 Checking and Inspecting Package

Example of the model label on the surface of the cover

(3) Check the product for damages and loose or removed screws during transportation.

Safety notice

To use the inverter correctly, read this manual completely.

Our inverter is not designed and produced for the purpose of being used for a device or system under a situation where human life may be threatened.

Do not use this inverter for special purposes such as riding, medical, aerospace, nuclear power control, and a submarine repeater or system.

This inverter is produced under the strict quality control. However, when it is applied to an important facility where its failure might threaten human life or cause expected serious losses, you should install any safety devices to prevent serious accidents.

When using it for load other than a three-phase alternating current motor, consult with us.

This inverter requires electrical work. Electrical engineering technicians should do it.

－ 10 －

Chapter 2 Product Overview

Chapter 2 Product Overview

2.1 Features

■ Provide three types of control methods to support various applications

The inverter can drive the induction motor and the Interior Permanent Magnetic Synchronous Motor (ED motor) to support various applications.

・ V/f control

Applications for controlling the general induction motor at variable speed

・ Vector control without sensor (induction motor, ED motor)

Applications for requiring higher torque or more accurate speed control than V/f control

・ Vector control with sensor (induction motor, ED motor)

Applications for requiring higher torque and high-accuracy speed control

■ Standard feature of Autotuning

The inverter provides an Autotuning function where the inverter itself measures motor parameters such as motor resistance and inductance and also automatically sets parameters.

It can be optimally operated with control methods of [V/f control], [Induction motor vector control], and [ED motor vector control].

■ Simple mode in which parameters can be easily set

The "simple mode," in which the display of parameters is minimized, enables you to prevent incorrect settings.

You can check operations promptly when introducing the inverter.

■ Operation possible in two control modes

You can set two types of control methods and motors.

To switch two modes (control methods or motors), you only have to set control method or motor parameters and then input external signals to the inverter.

■ Reduced maintenance cost

Long-life parts are used for components which require replacement.

・ Main circuit capacitor: About ten years (life expectancy in design)

・ Cooling fan: About five years (life expectancy in design)

For 2.2 to 7.5 kW (200 V/400 V class), you can easily replace the cooling fan without mounting screws.

With a cumulative operation timer, you are automatically notified when to replace components (alarm function).

■ Reduced running cost

The ED motor operated with high efficiency enables you to save energy. For the motor with larger volume and longer use, you can reduce more running cost.

■ Support for design and adjustment tool on personal computer

It provides a personal computer tool <VF66 series PC Tool> as an option to offer powerful support from adjustment at the introduction of the inverter to maintenance.

－ 11 －

Chapter 2 Product Overview

[Induction motor vector control] and [ED motor vector control]

[Induction motor vector control]

The vector control enables you to control torque of the induction motor and to achieve high-speed and high-accuracy speed control.

Since it develops higher torque at start, it can be used for line control such as a paper machine and film processing as well as an extruder for rubber, plastic, and metal, a centrifuge, and a mixer. Also, since it has a wider constant output (power constant) area, it can be applied to a winder and can be used under a poor working environment with the speed control without sensor.

[ED motor vector control]

The vector control enables you to control torque of the ED motor and to achieve high-speed and highaccuracy speed control.

When compared with the [induction motor vector control], this is optimal for the extruder for rubber, plastic, and metal which requires continuous operation for energy saving.

－ 12 －

2.2 Configuration

■ Inverter main unit

Chapter 2 Product Overview

・ Front cover

This is a front cover of the inverter. For how to remove it, refer to {3.2.1 How to Open Front Cover}.

・ Cooling fan

This is a fan motor for cooling. For how to replace it, refer to {7.3 How to Replace Cooling Fan}.

・ Console

It is used for operation from the inverter main unit.

It consists of a seven-segment display, a unit LED, a status display LED, and operation keys.

For details, refer to {4.1.1 Explanation of Display and Operation Keys on Console}.

－ 13 －

Chapter 2 Product Overview

■ Board

・ Main circuit board <MAC66> (for 2.2 to 7.5 kW only)

This is a main circuit part of the inverter. A terminal block is located in the lower part of it.

For details of wiring, refer to {3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals} and {3.5 Notes for Wiring and

Electrical Wire Size}. For details of the terminal block, refer to {3.4 Terminal Specifications}.

・ Control board <VFC66-Z>

This is a control part of the inverter. A terminal block is located on the left side.

For details of wiring, refer to {3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals} and {3.5.4 Electrical Wire Size on

Control Board and PG Input Board}. For details of the terminal block, refer to {3.4 Terminal Specifications}.

For how to replace the control board <VFC66-Z>, refer to {8.2 How to Replace Control Board}.

・ Console board <SET66-Z>

This is a console part of the inverter. It has switches for the LED and the operation keys.

・ PG input board <PG66-Z> or various optional boards

<PG66-Z> is used to connect a speed sensor (PG). A terminal block is located on the left side.

Optional boards are used to add external input/output and communication functions.

－ 14 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

3.1 Surrounding Environment and How to Install It

3.1.1 Installation Environment

Install the inverter in an environment below the overvoltage category III and below the pollution degree 2 defined by the IEC60664-1.

Overvoltage category

Overvoltage category

I

Equipment

Secondary circuit

II

Equipment overview

Equipment connecting to a circuit where any measures are taken to limit transient overvoltage to a lower level. It includes a protected electronic circuit.

Equipment consuming energy supplied from a fixed wiring facility.

III

Home electrical appliance and office machine

Electrical facility

IV Power receiving

Equipment in the fixed wiring facility which especially requires reliability and effectiveness.

Equipment used for a service entrance.

Pollution degree

Pollution degree

1

Overview

There is no pollution, or only dry and non-conductive pollution occurs. This type of pollution has no effect.

2 Typically, only non-conductive pollution occurs. However, when a

PDS (Power Drive System) is not running, temporary conductivity can be expected due to condensation.

3

4

Conductive pollution, or dry and non-conductive pollution resulting in conductivity due to expected condensation occurs.

Pollution causes continuous conductivity due to conductive dust, rain, and snow.

Specific example

Clean room and others

Electrical equipment in an office and the control panel, and others

In a general factory and others

Outdoor and others

3.1.2 How to Install Inverter

■ Requirements of where to install the inverter

Installation conditions of the inverter will greatly affect its life and reliability. Avoid installing it in the places listed below. Use it under the environmental conditions described in {Chapter 9 Standard Specifications}.

(1) In a humid and dusty area or a place where water or oil drips, the insulation of circuits is deteriorated, which may reduce the life of parts.

(2) Too high ambient temperature will cause the life of the main circuit capacitor or the cooling fan to be reduced.

(3) In a place containing corrosive gas, connectors may have a loose connection, electrical wires may be disconnected, and parts may be damaged.

－ 15 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

(4) In a place having many vibrations, connectors may have a loose connection, electrical wires may be disconnected, and parts may be damaged.

(5) When using the inverter in a place where ambient temperature is below 0 ℃ , use a heater, etc. to ensure that it becomes 0 ℃ or higher at the start of the inverter. After it starts, when the temperature becomes 0

℃ or higher due to its heat generation, there is no problem.

■ Mounting protective device

As a protective device when a short-circuit causes an accident, be sure to connect a fuse on the input side of the inverter. Use a fuse described in {3.5.3 Electrical Wire Size of Main Circuit Wires}.

■ Action after short-circuit

Dispose a short-circuited inverter in any circumstances without using it.

Installation

● Install the inverter on non-inflammables such as metal.

Otherwise, a fire may occur.

● Do not put inflammables near the inverter.

Otherwise, a fire may occur.

● A model over 22 kW is considered as a heavy material. Don't lift it by yourself. Otherwise, you may be injured.

● Do not hold the front cover when transporting the inverter.

It may fall, which may result in injury.

● Install the inverter in a place which can support its weight.

It may fall, which may result in injury.

● Do not install and operate the inverter which is damaged or does not have any parts.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

● Do not install the inverter in an atmosphere which contains plasticizer such as halogen and DOP

(phthalate ester).

Otherwise, it may be damaged.

■ Inverter installation requirements and heat radiation

To use the inverter, incorporate it into the control panel, etc. to meet the environmental conditions for installation.

How to install inverter

● Install it correctly.

Incorrect installation may result in a risk of electric shock or a fire.

・ Exhaust amount required for inverter loss and heat radiation

Inverter loss is represented as a ratio to the motor load capacity as follows:

2.2 to 37 kW: 5.0 %, 45 to 55 kW: 4 %, 75 to 90 kW: 3 %, 110 to 315 kW: 2.5 %

For example, when the motor load is 3.7 kW, the loss is 3.7 kW x 5.0 % = 185 W.

When heat generated from the inverter is forcibly exhausted outward by an exhaust fan installed on the control panel, necessary exhaust amount can be calculated in the following formula:

Q = q / { ρ

・ C ・ (To-Ta)}

－ 16 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

Where

Q: Exhaust flow (m 3 /s) q: Amount of heat generated from the inverter (kW)

ρ : Density (1.057 to 1.251 kg/ m 3 )

C: Specific heat (1.0 kJ/kg ・℃ )

To: Exhaust fan exit temperature ( ℃ )

Ta: Control panel inlet temperature ( ℃ )

When ambient temperature on the control panel is 40 ℃ , to ensure that exhaust temperature is below 50

℃ , a difference between intake and exhaust should be 10 ℃ .

To exhaust a loss of 1 kW, an exhaust ability of about 0.1 m 3 /s is required.

・ Installation orientation and intake/exhaust direction

Install the inverter vertically with a logo mark "VF66B" facing up. When it is installed sideways, ventilation is prevented, which may increase temperature. You should sufficiently consider a path of intake and exhaust.

The cooling fan built in the inverter sucks air from the bottom and exhausts it to the top. To prevent a wiring duct, etc. from blocking up the vent, keep enough space.

・ Keeping cooling space

To install the inverter and an optional direct-current reactor (DCL), keep cooling space.

When heat generation devices exist in the surrounding environment, place them so that they do not affect cooling of the inverter and others.

The operating temperatures of the inverter are 0 to 50 ℃ . To install it in the control panel, perform ventilation to ensure that the temperature in the board is below 50 ℃ . High ambient temperature will decrease reliability.

The figure below shows cooling space required for models below 7.5 kW. For models over 11 kW, keep the size twice as much as the dimensions described in the figure.

Heat radiation and exhaust

・ The DCL becomes hot. It may exceed 100 ℃ . Provide enough space to keep away from other devices.

・ Make sure that heat generated from the inverter and the DCL is exhausted outward from the control panel. Note that exhaust from the inverter should not circulate in the control panel.

・ When using a dynamic braking (DB) optional unit <VFDB2009>, install a dynamic braking (DB) resistor outside from the control panel as much as possible.

・ Avoid using the inverter in a seriously worse environment.

－ 17 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover

Opening and closing front cover

● Be sure to turn off the inverter when opening and closing the front cover.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

3.2.1 How to Open Front Cover

To work inside the inverter (such as connecting or wiring terminals, and maintenance/inspection), follow the steps below to open the front cover.

■ For models below 7.5 kW consisting of a resin chassis and front cover

1. Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4) to loosen a mounting screw on the front cover.

・ You do not have to remove the screw.

2. Lift the cover in the direction of the arrow (A) to the position shown in the figure, using two claws on the top of the front cover as supporting points.

3. Push the front cover in the direction of the arrow (B) and then remove the two claws on the front cover from the inverter main unit.

－ 18 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

■ For models over 11 kW consisting of a sheet-metal chassis and front cover

Remove the sheet-metal front cover and the resin control part cover.

1. Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4) to remove the mounting screws at the top of the front cover.

2. Loosen the screws at the bottom of it.

3. Remove the front cover from the main unit.

・ The number of mounting screws at the top and bottom of the front cover depends on the model. Refer to the figure below.

－ 19 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

4. When the control part cover is vibration resistant, use the

Phillips screwdriver (M4) to remove two mounting screws of the control part cover.

・ When it is not vibration resistant, it does not have mounting screws.

5. While holding the lock part of the control part cover with your thumb, pull it toward and remove it, using the two claws on the right side as supporting points.

－ 20 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

When opening the front cover, check that the serial number described in the front of the front cover matches the one described inside the main unit.

Opening and closing front cover

● The inverter model below 7.5 kW has a resin chassis.

Applying excessive force will cause the cover to be damaged.

－ 21 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

Notes for replacing parts

● Do not disassemble the inverter unreasonably.

● After disassembling it, check that any part is assembled correctly.

Incorrect assembly may result in a risk of a fire.

● In particular, if a flat cable is not inserted correctly, the control circuit may not work properly.

● Make sure that screws are tightened.

3.2.2 How to Close Front Cover

Follow the steps below to close the front cover of the inverter.

When closing the front cover, ensure that the serial number described in the main unit matches the one described on the front cover. For how to check the serial number, refer to {3.2.1 How to Open Front Cover}.

■ For models below 7.5 kW consisting of a resin chassis and front cover

Tightening screws

● Tighten screws into screw holes of the front cover within a tightening torque of 1.4 N ･ m.

Tightening them in a tightening torque of over 1.4 N ･ m can the resin front cover to be damaged.

1. Insert the two claws on the top of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter main unit.

2. Install the front cover into the main unit.

3. Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4) to tighten a mounting screw of the front cover.

・ Tighten it within a tightening torque of 1.4 N ･ m.

－ 22 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

■ For models over 11 kW consisting of a sheet-metal chassis and front cover

Install the resin control part cover and the sheet-metal front cover.

1. Insert the two claws on the right side of the control part cover into the sockets of the inverter main unit.

2. Push them until a lock clicks.

3. When the control part cover is vibration resistant, use the

Phillips screwdriver (M4) to tighten the two mounting screws of the control part cover.

・ Tighten it within a tightening torque of 1.4 N ･ m.

・ When it is not vibration resistant, it does not have mounting screws.

4. Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4) to tighten the mounting screws of the front cover.

・ Tighten it within a tightening torque of 1.5 N ･ m.

・ The number of mounting screws of the front cover depends on the model. Refer to the figure below.

－ 23 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

－ 24 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

3.3 How to Connect Inverter

3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals

The figure below shows the connection diagram of the inverter terminals.

For a connection of the speed sensor (PG), refer to {3.3.2 How to Connect Speed Sensor and PG Input

Board}.

For specifications of each terminal, refer to {3.4 Terminal Specifications}.

－ 25 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

(1) In the factory default, a control input terminal [ST-F] and multifunction input terminals [MI1] through [MI5] are set to PS common input (source input).

When changing them to GND common input (sync input), remove a jumper socket on the control board

<VFC66-Z> from [CN_SO] and then attach it to [CN_SI].

(2) Never connect [GND] and [COM] (terminals of the multifunction input/output terminal and the analog input/output terminal) to the ground.

(3) When a thermal relay of the dynamic braking (DB) resistor starts, the inverter input power supply should be blocked.

(4) Install a main circuit contactor (52M) depending on your environmental needs.

When installing the main circuit contactor (52M) on the input side of the inverter, turn off the inverter input power supply and then wait for over ten minutes before turning it on again.

(5) When the direct-current reactor (DCL) is not connected, the direct-current terminals [+1] and [+2] are short circuited.

(6) Control power supply terminals are provided for models over 11 kW.

When the control power supply terminals [MR] and [MT] are used in parallel models (<15022> through

<18022>, <40044> through <100044>), power should be supplied to not only a master unit but a slave unit.

(7) When the control board <VFC66-Z> communicates with the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit

<VFDB2009>, a communication optional board <DBIF2009-Z> for the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit is used.

For details, refer to another manual "VFDB2009 Instruction Manual."

(8) Supply electric power from the same power supply about each unit of a parallel models (<15022> through

<18022>, <40044> through <100044>).

3.3.2 How to Connect Speed Sensor and PG Input Board

To use the speed sensor (PG), follow the steps below to connect the PG input board <PG66-Z> to the PG.

The figure below shows the connection diagram for the ED motor. For the induction motor, connect PG input terminals [+12], [A], [B], and [G] only.

To connect the PG for the ED motor, an optional straight plug <MS3106B-20-29S> (manufactured by Japan

Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited) and a cable clamp <MS3057-12A> (manufactured by Japan Aviation

Electronics Industry, Limited) are required.

Setting for using speed sensor (PG)

To perform drive with the speed sensor (PG), you should change the setting value of the PG_selection

<A-10> to "1" or "2."

For details of how to change parameters, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}. For details of the

PG_selection <A-10>, refer to {5.3.2 Area A}.

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2.1 How to Open Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. When using the motor with the speed sensor (PG), turn on the switch [SW2] on the <PG66-Z> with a pair of tweezers or a tool whose tip is very short in length (about 0.8 mm).

4. Connect terminals of the <PG66-Z> to corresponding ones of the PG.

－ 26 －

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

・ Use a special twist shielded wire for cables to be connected.

The recommended cables are as follows:

ED motor: CO-SPEV-SB(A) 7P-0.5SQ

Induction motor: CO-SPEV-SB 3P-0.5SQ

5. Close the front cover.

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

－ 27 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

3.4 Terminal Specifications

Main circuit

Terminal number

R/L1, S/L2,

T/L3

U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

Purpose

Alternating-current power supply input

Inverter output

Descriptions

Connect to the alternating-current power supply

Connect the three-phase alternating-current motor

B

MR, MS, MT

DCL connection

・ DCL connection

・ Connect the dynamic braking

(DB) resistor

・ Connect a plus side terminal when using a sine wave converter

Connect the dynamic braking (DB) resistor

・

・

Connect the dynamic braking

(DB) optional unit

Connect a minus side terminal when using the sine wave converter

Protective earth terminal

Connect to the DCL

When no DCL is used, the direct-current terminals

[+1] and [+2] are short circuited.

・ Terminal for connecting the dynamic braking (DB) resistor

・ Connect a plus side terminal of the direct-current power supply when using the sine wave converter

Collector terminal for the internal dynamic braking

(DB) transistor

(It is provided for models below 22 kW)

・ Connecting terminal to a terminal "N" of the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit

・ Connect a minus side terminal of the direct-current power supply when using the sine wave converter

Control power supply terminal

[Caution] Be sure to connect it to the ground.

When using a noise filter, connect it to a protective earth terminal of the filter.

・ They are provided for models over 11 kW and are used to supply power to only control circuits.

・ Connect the alternating-current power supply between [MR] and [MT], not [MS].

[Caution] When they are used in parallel models

(<15022> through <18022>, <40044> through

<100044>), power should be supplied to not only the master unit but the slave unit.

－ 28 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

Terminal block <TB1> on the control board <VFC66-Z>

Terminal number

Purpose Descriptions

52MA Operation contact

86A Protection contact

It turns on while the inverter operates. Contact rating 230 VAC, 0.5 A

It turns on while the inverter is in the protection mode. Contact rating

230 VAC, 0.5 A

MO1 Multifunction output terminal (1)

P P terminal

MO2 Multifunction output terminal (2)

COM COM terminal

Multifunction output

・ Maximum voltage 24 VDC, maximum output current 20 mA

・ The multifunction output terminal outputs signals depending on the operation condition.

For details, refer to {5.3.9 Area H}.

・ Connect a P terminal to an external power supply (DC)

■ Initial state

・ Multifunction output terminal (1): Output signals when the frequency or the speed reach their command

・ Multifunction output terminal (2): Output signals when the inverter detects the specified frequency or speed

AOT1 Analog output (1) terminal

GND GND terminal

AIN1 Analog input (1) terminal

+10

PS

MI1

+10 V output

ST-F Forward operation

+12 V output

Multifunction input terminal (1)

Analog input and output

・ In the analog output terminal [AOT1], you can change 0 to ±10 V output and 6F (frequency) output. Its maximum output current is 1 mA.

・ In the analog input terminal [AIN1], you can switch the input range to

0 through ±10 V or 0 through 10 V by changing the setting data.

・ Also, you can switch to 4 to 20 mA input by setting the SW1 to "ON."

・ Use 10 k Ω when performing a frequency or speed command depending on volume.

■ Initial state

・ Analog output terminal [AOT1]: Output current from the inverter as "5

V/rated inverter current"

・ Analog input terminal [AIN1]: 0 to 10 V input

[Caution] Do not connect the terminal [GND] to the protective earth terminal.

Output +10 V direct-current voltage

Input terminal for a forward operation signal

Output +12 V direct-current voltage

MI2

MI3

Multifunction input terminal (2)

Multifunction input terminal (3)

MI4 Multifunction input terminal (4)

GND GND terminal

MI5 Multifunction input terminal (5)

Multifunction input

・ Maximum input voltage 24 VDC, maximum input current 3 mA

・ Like from the console, you can operate the inverter by inputting a signal into the multifunction input terminal.

For details, refer to {5.3.4 Area c}.

■ Initial state

・ Multifunction input terminal (1): Start command (reverse)

・ Multifunction input terminal (2): JOG command (forward)

・ Multifunction input terminal (3): JOG command (reverse)

・ Multifunction input terminal (4): Emergency stop (Normally open) signal

・ Multifunction input terminal (5): Protection reset

[Caution] Do not connect the terminal [GND] to the protective earth

－ 29 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

Terminal block <TB1> on the control board <VFC66-Z>

Terminal number

Purpose Descriptions terminal.

Terminal block <TB2> on the PG input board <PG66-Z>

Terminal number

+12

Purpose

+12 V power supply terminal

Descriptions

Output +12 V direct-current voltage

G

A

B

U/Z

GND terminal

PG input terminal

[Caution] Do not connect the terminal [G] to the protective earth terminal.

Input A, B, U/Z, V, and W signals of the 12 V power supply PG

(complementary output)

V

W

PGOUT PG output terminal Generate and output a subharmonic waveform from a signal of the terminal [A].

The [3] of SW4 sides are 1 / 4PG dividing signal output, and the [1] sides are 1 / 2PG dividing signal output.

－ 30 －

■ Terminal layout of main circuit terminals

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

－ 31 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

－ 32 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

3.5 Notes for Wiring and Electrical Wire Size

3.5.1 Notes for Wiring

(1) Input the specified voltage into the input terminals [R/L1, S/L2, T/L3] of the inverter.

・ If you input 400 V into the 200 V class inverter, it will be damaged.

(2) IGBT is used for elements of the inverter, and the inverter operates at high frequency. Therefore, noise frequently occurs. Consider the following points for wiring:

・ Keep main circuit wires away from a control signal wire. When placing them in parallel, keep a distance of 30 cm or longer between them.

・ When crossing them, ensure that they are crossed at right angles.

・ It is recommended that the main circuit wire should be contained into a metal pipe as a noise measure for other facilities.

(3) To prevent noise contamination, use a shielded wire or a twist shielded wire for the control signal wire.

(4) When setting speed outside from the control panel

Contain the signal wire into the metal pipe to install it.

(5) When using the shielded wire for output wiring

When the wiring has 300 m or longer in length

When the inverter is operated with the DC brake, a resonance phenomenon occurs due to floating capacitance and source inductance, both of which are generated to the ground by the inverter output electrical wire. It may cause the inverter to be damaged or not to work properly.

・ Contact us.

(6) The wiring of the 400 V class inverter has 100 m or longer in length

Due to the wiring, surge voltage generated in the motor terminal may cause the motor insulation to be deteriorated.

Take one of the following measures:

・ Use the motor with enhanced insulation.

・ Connect a surge voltage suppression filter on the inverter side.

－ 33 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

3.5.2 Electrical Corrosion Measures

When the inverter drives the motor, high-frequency common mode voltage is generated. If impedance between the motor or machine and the ground is high, voltage is applied to both sides of a bearing, which may cause electrical corrosion. To avoid this, take the following measures:

(1) Be sure to connect an inverter plate and a machine surface plate to the ground.

Be sure to connect the ground wire between the inverter plate and the motor.

(2) Put the motor and the machine on the same surface plate.

When the surface plate of the motor is isolated from that of the machine as shown in the figure below, axis current is applied from the machine bearing to a machine frame through a motor stator, a rotator, and a shaft. It may cause electrical corrosion in the machine bearing.

(3) When the motor and the machine cannot be put on the same surface plate, using insulation coupling for a connection between the motor and the machine will be effective.

(4) For belt driving, there is no problem on the machine side. Connect the inverter plate and the machine surface plate to the ground.

(5) For a long distance between the inverter plate and the motor, install an output filter for inverter output to reduce high-frequency components.

－ 34 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

3.5.3 Input / Output Devices and Electrical Wire Size of Main Circuit Wires

The electrical wire size of main circuit wires depends on the inverter model.

See the table below to use appropriate electrical wires for connection.

■ 200 V class

Applied motor capacity (2)

Inverter model

Wiring circuit breaker

(MCCB) (3)

2.2kW

2R222

3.7kW

3R722

5.5kW

5R522

7.5kW

7R522

11kW

1122

15kW

1522

22kW

2222

30kW

3022

Leakage circuit breaker

(ELCB) (3)

Fuse model

Rated

(4) current

Main circuit contactor

Input side

(5)

Output side

NV32-SV

15A

EW32SAG

15A

NV32-SV

30A

EW32SAG

30A

NV63-SV

40A

EW50SAG

40A

NV63-SV

50A

EW50SAG

50A

NV125-

SEV 75A

EW125JAG

75A

NV125-

SEV 100A

EW125JAG

100A

NV250-

SEV 150A

EW250JAG

150A

NV250-

SEV 175A

EW250JAG

200A

NF32-SV

15A

BW32SAG

15A

NF32-SV

30A

BW32SAG

30A

NF63-SV

40A

BW50SAG

40A

NF63-SV

50A

BW50SAG

50A

NF125-

SEV 75A

BW125JAG

75A

NF125-

SEV 100A

BW125JAG

100A

NF250-

SEV 150A

BW250JAG

150A

NF250-

SEV 175A

BW250JAG

200A

CR2LS-

20/UL

20A

CR2LS-

30/UL

30A

CR2LS-

50/UL

50A

CR2LS-

75/UL

75A

CR2LS-

100/UL

100A

CR2L-

150/UL

150A

CR2L-

150/UL

150A

CR2L-

260/UL

260A

S-N11

SC-0

S-N20

SC-N1

S-N35

SC-N2

S-N50

S-N10

SC-03

S-N18

SC-4-0

S-N25

SC-N1

S-N35

SC-N2S SC-N2

S-N65

SC-N3

S-N80

SC-N4

S-N125

SC-N6

S-N150

SC-N7

S-N50

SC-N2S

S-N65

SC-N3

S-N95

SC-N5

S-N125

SC-N6

Wire size [mm 2 ] (6),(10)

(Upper position: inside the board, lower position: outside the board)

Input side

Output side

DC input/

DCL

Ground wire (9)

2 2 2 3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

8

8

8

8

14

14

22

22

38

38

50

60

3.5

3.5

3.5

5.5

5.5

8

8

8

14

14

22

22

38

38

38

3.5

5.5

5.5

8

8

14

14

14

14

22

22

38

38

60

60

[AWG12]

5.5

[AWG10]

5.5

[AWG10]

8

[AWG8]

8

[AWG8]

14

[AWG6]

14

[AWG6]

22

[AWG4]

－ 35 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

■ 200 V class

Applied motor capacity (2)

Inverter model

Wiring circuit breaker

(MCCB) (3)

Leakage circuit breaker

(ELCB) (3)

Fuse model

Rated

(4) current

Main circuit contactor

Input side

(5)

Output side

37kW

3722

45kW

4522

55kW

5522

75kW

7522

90kW

9022

150kW

NF250-

SEV 225A

BW250JAG

225A

NF400-

SEW 300A

BW400SAG

300A

NF400-

SEW 350A

BW400SAG

350A

NF400-

SEW 350A

BW400SAG

350A

NF630-

SEW 500A

BW630RAG

500A

NV250-

SEV 225A

EW250JAG

225A

NV400-

SEW 300A

EW400SAG

300A

NV400-

SEW 350A

EW400SAG

350A

NV400-

SEW 350A

EW400SAG

350A

NV630-

SEW 500A

EW400SAG

500A

CR2L-

300/UL

300A

CR2L-

325/UL

325A

CR2L-

400/UL

400A

CR2L-

450/UL

450A

CR2L-

500/UL

500A

NF800-

SEW 700A

CR2L-

450/

UL×2

15022

BW800RAG

700A

450A×2

180kW

NF1000-

SEW 900A

CR2L-

500/

UL×2

18022

SA1003E

900A

500A×2

S-N220

SC-N8

S-N220

SC-N10 SC-N8

S-N300

SC-N11 SC-N10 150

S-N400

SC-N12 SC-N11 150

S-N400

S-N150

SC-N7

S-N220

S-N220

S-N300

S-N400

60

60

80

100

125

150

200 (12)

(150)

SC-N12 SC-N12 200 (12)

150

150

200

(150)

200

Wire size [mm 2 ] (6),(10)

(Upper position: inside the board, lower position: outside the board)

Input side

Output side

DC input/

DCL

Ground wire (9)

50

60

60

100

80

150

150

150

200

(150)

200

150

150

200

(150)

200

80

100

125

150

200

200

(12)

(12)

200

200

250

150×2

200

200

250

150×2

22

[AWG4]

22

[AWG4]

30

[AWG2]

30

[AWG2]

38 (11)

[AWG2]

30

[AWG2]

38

(11)

(11)

(11)

[AWG2]

－ 36 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

■ 400 V class

Applied motor capacity (2)

Inverter model

Wiring circuit breaker

(MCCB) (3)

2.2kW

2R244

3.7kW

3R744

5.5kW

5R544

7.5kW

7R544

11kW

1144

15kW

1544

22kW

2244

30kW

3044

37kW

3744

Leakage circuit breaker

(ELCB) (3)

Fuse model

Rated

(4) current

Main circuit contactor

Input side

(5)

Output side

NV32-SV

10A

EW32SAG

10A

NV32-SV

15A

EW32SAG

15A

NV32-SV

20A

EW32SAG

20A

NV32-SV

30A

EW32SAG

30A

NV63-SV

40A

EW50SAG

40A

NV63-SV

50A

EW50SAG

50A

NV125-

SEV 75A

EW125JAG

75A

NV125-

SEV 100A

EW125JAG

100A

NV125-

SEV 125A

EW250JAG

125A

NF32-SV

10A

BW32SAG

10A

NF32-SV

15A

BW32SAG

15A

NF32-SV

20A

BW32SAG

20A

NF32-SV

30A

BW32SAG

30A

NF63-SV

40A

BW50SAG

40A

NF63-SV

50A

BW50SAG

50A

NF125-

SEV 75A

BW125JAG

75A

NF125-

SEV 100A

BW125JAG

100A

NF125-

SEV 125A

BW250JAG

125A

660GH-

16UL

16A

660GH-

16UL

16A

660GH-

25UL

25A

660GH-

32UL

32A

660GH-

40UL

40A

660GH-

63UL

63A

660GH-

80UL

80A

660GH-

125UL

125A

660GH-

160UL

160A

S-N10

SC-03

S-N18

SC-4-0

S-N20

SC-4-1

S-N25

SC-N1

S-N35

SC-N2

S-N50

S-N10

SC-03

S-N18

SC-4-0

S-N18

SC-4-0

S-N20

SC-4-1

S-N25

SC-N1

S-N35

SC-N2S SC-N2

S-N65

SC-N3

S-N80

SC-N4

S-N125

SC-N6

S-N50

SC-N2S

S-N65

SC-N3

S-N80

SC-N4

Wire size [mm 2 ] (6),(10)

(Upper position: inside the board, lower position: outside the board)

Input side

Output side

DC input/

DCL

Ground wire (9)

2 2 2 2

2

2

2

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

5.5

5.5

8

8

14

14

22

22

38

38

2

2

2

2

3.5

3.5

3.5

5.5

5.5

8

8

8

14

14

22

22

22

2

2

2

3.5

3.5

5.5

5.5

8

8

8

8

14

14

38

38

38

38

[AWG14]

2

[AWG14]

5.5

[AWG10]

5.5

[AWG10]

5.5

[AWG10]

5.5

[AWG10]

8

[AWG8]

14

[AWG6]

14

[AWG6]

－ 37 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

■ 400 V class

Applied motor capacity (2)

Inverter model

45kW

4544

55kW

5544

75kW

7544

110kW

11044

160kW

16044

200kW

20044

250kW

25044

315kW

31544

Wiring circuit breaker

(MCCB) (3)

NF800-

SEW 800A

BW800RAG

800A

Leakage circuit breaker

(ELCB) (3)

NV800-

SEW 800A

EW800RAG

800A

Fuse model

Rated

660GH-

250UL

×4

(4) current

Main circuit contactor

Input side

(5)

Output side

Wire size [mm 2 ] (6),(10)

(Upper position: inside the board, lower position: outside the board)

Input side

Output side

DC input/

DCL

Ground wire (9)

NF250-

SEV 150A

BW250JAG

150A

NF250-

SEV 175A

BW250JAG

175A

NF250-

SEV 200A

BW250JAG

200A

NF400-

SEW 300A

BW400SAG

300A

NV250-

SEV 150A

EW250JAG

150A

NV250-

SEV 175A

EW250JAG

175A

NV250-

SEV 200A

EW250JAG

200A

NV400-

SEW 300A

EW400SAG

300A

NF400-

SEW 400A

NF630-SW

600A

NV400-

SEW 400A

NV630-

SW 600A

660GH-

250UL

×2

S-N300

200 (12)

(150)

BW400SAG

400A

EW400SAG

400A

NF630-SW

500A

NV630-

SW 500A

660GH-

315UL

×2

BW630RAG

500A

EW630RAG

500A

250A×2

315A×2

SC-N12

S-N600

SC-N14

SC-N11

S-N400

SC-N12

200 (12)

250

(200)

250

660GH-

200UL

×4

S-N400

S-N600 S-N600

125×2

(250)

BW630RAG

600A

EW630RAG

600A

660GH-

200UL

200A

660GH-

200UL

200A

660GH-

250UL

250A

660GH-

315UL

315A

200A×4

S-N125

SC-N7

S-N150

SC-N7

S-N180

SC-N8

S-N300

SC-N11

SC-N14

S-N95

SC-N6

S-N125

SC-N6

S-N150

SC-N7

S-N220

SC-N10

SC-N14

38

38

50

60

60

60

100

(80)

100

22

22

30

38

50

60

80

100

150

200

200

250

250

150×2 150×2

50

60

60

60

80

100

125(100)

250(200)

125×2

(200)

250

200×2

(250)

200×2

14

[AWG6]

14

[AWG6]

22 (11)

[AWG4]

22 (11)

150(100) [AWG4]

38

60

(11)

250(200) [AWG2]

50 (11)

[AWG1/

0]

(11)

[AWG1/

0]

250A×4

S-N800

SC-N16

S-N600

SC-N14

200×2

(150

×2)

200×2

(150

×2)

150×2

150×2

250×2

(150×2)

250×2

(150×2)

80 (11)

[AWG2/

0]

－ 38 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

■ 400 V class

Applied motor capacity (2)

Inverter model

Wiring circuit breaker

(MCCB) (3)

400kW

40044

500kW

50044

600kW

60044

NF1000-

SEW

1000A

SA1003E

1000A

NF1250-

SEW

1250A

SA1203E

1200A

NF1600-

SEW

1500A

SA1603E

1600A

750kW

75044

NF2000-S

2000A

SA2003E

1800A

1000kW

NF2500-S

2500A

100044

SA2503E

2500A

Leakage circuit breaker

(ELCB) (3)

Fuse model (4)

Rated current

660GH-

315UL

×4

315A×4

660GH-

200UL

×8

200A×8

660GH-

315UL

×6

315A×6

660GH-

200UL

×12

200A

×12

660GH-

200UL

×16

200A

×16

Main circuit contactor

Input side

(5)

Output side

Wire size [mm 2 ] (6),(10)

(Upper position: inside the board, lower position: outside the board)

Input side

Output side

DC input/

DCL

Ground wire (9)

250

(200)

200

125×2

(200)

50 (11)

250 250 250

[AWG1/

0]

125×2

(250)

250

200×2

(250)

60 (11)

150×2 150×2 200×2

[AWG1/

0]

250

(200)

200

125×2

(200)

50 (11)

250 250 250

[AWG1/

0]

125×2

(250)

250

200×2

(250)

60 (11)

150×2 150×2 200×2

[AWG1/

0]

125×2

(250)

250

200×2

(250)

60 (11)

150×2 150×2 200×2

[AWG1/

0]

(1) This table is based on the input voltage of 200 VAC for the 200 V class and 380 VAC for the 400 V class inverter.

(2) The applied motor capacity is for reference. Select it depending on the inverter model.

(3) For MCCB and ELCB, the upper position shows a product manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, and the lower position by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.

Use the specified MCCB and ELCB. Also, keep the power impedance of the inverter low. Keep a total of impedance including impedance of the power transformer, wiring impedance, and ACL inductance to 5 % or less. Install the fuse described in the above table into the inverter input part, regardless of whether power impedance is high or low. However, for large power capacity and in other cases, MCCB and ELCB described above may not have sufficient break capacity. Based on the technical manual provided from

MCCB and ELCB manufacturers, select the model of MCCB and ELCB depending on required breaking capacity.

When the power supply does not have a leakage protection function, you should select rated current sensitivity based on the technical manual from manufacturers and then install ELCB.

－ 39 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

(4) For the fuse, the model CR2L(S)-**/UL is a product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (UL standard product), and 660GH-**UL by HINODE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. (UL standard product). Install the fuse on

R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 each.

Please attach the fuse described quantity in parallel to each phase.

(5) For the main circuit contactor, the upper position shows a product manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation, and the lower position by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. Use the main circuit contactor with rated current over values described above.

(6) Plan the wiring between the inverter and the motor so that voltage drop is below 2 %. The table lists wire size for inside the board (3 m in length as MLFC) and for outside the board (30 m in length as CV (3 single conductor cable)).

(7) Use the R type solderless terminal standardized by Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS C 2805) or the round-shape solderless terminal certified by UL/cUL.

(8) For ELCB and the main circuit contactor for the applied motor capacity over 400 kW, contact us.

(9) Use the ground wire with many element wires, such as KIV. The brackets ([ ]) show the AWG number.

(10)For size noted in the brackets of the wire size field, use it only when it corresponds to your wire size, provided that the inverter is updated without changing load.

(11)For models with the applied motor capacity of over 75 kW, even inside the inverter, use the ground wire with the same thickness as these values.

(12)Use the solderless terminal CB200-S12 of Japan Solderless Terminal Corporation.

3.5.4 Electrical Wire Size of Control Board and PG Input Board

The electrical wire size of the terminal block <TB1> on the control board <VFC66-Z> and the terminal block

<TB2> on the PG input board <PG66-Z> is common to all inverter models.

Terminal block

Terminal block <TB1> on the control board

<VFC66-Z>

([52MA] to [GND])

Terminal block <TB2> on the PG input board

<PG66-Z>

([+12] to [PGOUT])

Wiring size [mm 2 ]

0.12 to 0.32

[AWG26 to 22]

0.12 to 0.32

[AWG26 to 22]

－ 40 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

3.6 Inverter Selection and List of Applied Motors

The inverter can be used with the induction motor or the ED motor. Select the inverter so that its rated current is more than or equal to rated motor current. The table below lists examples of combinations with our standard motors.

Motor Inverter

Type

Induction motor

ED motor

Rated voltage

180 V

200 V

360 V

400 V

190 V

380 V

200 V class

○

○

×

×

○

×

400 V class

×

×

○

○

×

○

When using the inverter in the vector control with the speed sensor, set rated motor voltage to below 90 % of power supply voltage.

When rated motor voltage is equal to power supply voltage, control characteristics are deteriorated if speed exceeds 90 % of rated motor speed.

List of applied motor capacity (induction motor)

Rated motor voltage

Inverter model

200 V 180 V

2R222

3R722

2.2 kW

3.7 kW

1.5 kW

2.2 kW

5R522

7R522

1122

1522

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

11.0 kW

15.0 kW

3.7 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

11.0 kW

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

15022

18022

22.0 kW

30.0 kW

37.0 kW

45.0 kW

55.0 kW

75.0 kW

90.0 kW

150 kW

180 kW

18.5 kW

22.0 kW

30.0 kW

37.0 kW

45.0 kW

55.0 kW

75.0 kW

132 kW

160 kW

Inverter model

3744

4544

5544

7544

11044

16044

20044

25044

2R244

3R744

5R544

7R544

1144

1544

2244

3044

31544

40044

50044

Rated motor voltage

400 V 360 V

2.2 kW

3.7 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

11.0 kW

15.0 kW

22.0 kW

30.0 kW

37.0 kW

45.0 kW

55.0 kW

75.0 kW

110 kW

160 kW

200 kW

250 kW

315 kW

400 kW

500 kW

2.2 kW

3.7 kW

3.7 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

11.0 kW

18.5 kW

22.0 kW

30.0 kW

37.0 kW

45.0 kW

55.0 kW

90.0 kW

132 kW

160 kW, 180 kW

200 kW, 220 kW

280 kW

355 kW

450 kW

*

*

－ 41 －

Chapter 3 How to Install and Connect Inverter

List of applied motor capacity (induction motor)

Inverter model

Rated motor voltage

200 V 180 V

Inverter model

60044

75044

100044

Rated motor voltage

400 V 360 V

600 kW

750 kW

1000 kW

530 kW

670 kW

900 kW

(Note) The motor capacity marked with * does not require capacity derating.

List of applied motor capacity (ED motor)

Rated motor voltage

Inverter model

190 V

2R222

3R722

2.2 kW

3.7 kW

5R522

7R522

1122

1522

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

11.0 kW

15.0 kW

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

15022

18022

18.5 kW, 22.0 kW

30.0 kW

37.0 kW

45.0 kW

55.0 kW

65.0 kW, 75.0 kW

90.0 kW

―

―

Inverter model

3744

4544

5544

7544

11044

16044

20044

25044

2R244

3R744

5R544

7R544

1144

1544

2244

3044

31544

40044

50044

60044

75044

100044

(Note) When the inverter is used in the constant output (power constant) state, the motor capacity marked with * requires a higher-grade inverter model.

Rated motor voltage

380 V

2.2 kW

3.7 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

11.0 kW

15.0 kW

18.5 kW, 22.0 kW

30.0 kW

37.0 kW

45.0 kW

55.0 kW

65.0 kW, 75.0 kW

90.0 kW, 110 kW

132 kW, 160 kW

200 kW

250 kW

315 kW, 375 kW *

375 kW, 400 kW *

400 kW, 500 kW

600 kW

750 kW

―

－ 42 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.1 Basic Operating Procedures from Console

4.1.1 Explanation of Display and Operation Keys on Console

On the console of the inverter, you can operate it, read and write each function setting data, display operating states, and display what are protected during protection operations.

The console consists of the components listed below: displays (1) through (3) and operation keys (4).

1: Seven-segment display

2: Unit LED

3: Status display LED

4: Operation keys

Inverter operation

In addition to using the console described below, you can operate the inverter and set various functions in the following ways:

・ External console option <SET66EX-Z>

・ Contact input and analog input

・ Control through external digital communication

・ Internal PLC function

Sometimes you cannot operate the inverter from the console, depending on settings.

－ 43 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ Overview of the operation from the console

The console provides three types of operation modes.

・ Monitor (MONI) mode

・ Function setting (FNC) mode

・ Protection display mode

The operation overview is described below.

(1) For what are displayed at power-on and their details, refer to {4.1.2 What Are Displayed at Power-on}.

(2) In the monitor (MONI) mode, a monitor item is displayed, and about one second later its data is displayed.

For details, refer to {4.1.6 Checking Operating State} and {4.1.7 List of Monitor Items}.

(3) In the function setting (FNC) mode, parameter setting items and their values can be switched and displayed.

(4) In the protection display mode, a protection operation item in the seven-segment display will blink to notify you. Output will stop. For details, refer to {6.1 Protection Displays and Actions}.

－ 44 －

■ Descriptions of the display part

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

・ Seven-segment display

It displays alphanumeric characters as seven-segment. For details, refer to the next section "Basic reading of the seven-segment display."

It displays operating states, functional symbols (numbers), function selection and setting data, protection operations, and protection histories.

When only one digit of alphanumeric characters blinks, it indicates that this becomes an operating digit.

You can change alphanumeric characters of the operating digit by using keys [ ] and [ ].

・ Unit display LED

The LED (r/min, Hz, A, or V) corresponding to the unit of numerical values in the seven-segment display turns on.

・ Status display LED

FNC: It turns on when the function setting (FNC) mode is selected.

DIR: It turns on when the [START] key or the [JOG/ ] key is enabled for operation from the console.

REV: It turns on when the rotation direction of the motor is set to reverse.

ALM: It turns on when cumulative operation time exceeds a specified time.

RUN: It turns on while the inverter is running. It blinks while the inverter is decelerating to stop or putting on the DC brake.

JOG: It turns on while the inverter is jogging. Even when the inverter is running, it turns on along with the

[RUN] LED.

■ Basic reading of the seven-segment display

The table below lists a mapping of the seven-segment display to alphanumeric characters.

Since they are represented as seven-segment, in particular, you should carefully check alphabets. Some alphabets are not used to avoid a difficulty in reading them.

－ 45 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

－ 46 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ Descriptions of the operation keys

The function of each operation key depends on the operation mode setting on the console.

Operation keys in monitor (MONI) mode

[SET] key Changes a monitor item (forward).

[MONI/FNC] key

[FWD/REV] key

[START] key

Switches to the function setting (FNC) mode.

Switches between forward and reverse commands when the [START] key or the

[JOG/ ] key is enabled.

Starts the inverter when "2" (Console) is set to the Operation_command_input_ selection <b-11>.

[ ] key

[ ] key

Changes a monitor item (reverse).

Changes a monitor item (forward).

[JOG/ ] key Operates the inverter when "2" (Console) is set to the JOG_command_input_ selection <b-12>.

[STOP/RESET] key Stops the inverter when it was started with the [START] key.

Operation keys in function setting (FNC) mode

Confirms your selection when you set a parameter setting item.

[SET] key

Writes data of a parameter setting value.

[MONI/FNC] key

[FWD/REV] key

[START] key

Switches to the monitor (MONI) mode.

No function

No function

Changes a parameter setting item area in the alphabetical reverse order.

[ ] key

Decreases a value of the operating digit by one when you specify a number or a value of a parameter setting item.

Changes a parameter setting item area in the alphabetical order.

[ ] key Increases a value of the operating digit by one when you specify a number or a value of a parameter setting item.

[JOG/ ] key Shifts the operating digit by one to the right.

[STOP/RESET] key Stops the inverter when it was started with the [START] key.

－ 47 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Operation keys in protection display mode

[SET] key Reads out one-point traceback data.

[MONI/FNC] key

[FWD/REV] key

Moves to the monitor (MONI) mode or the function setting (FNC) mode.

[START] key

[ ] key

[ ] key

[JOG/ ] key

No function

[STOP/RESET] key Resets protection operation.

◆ Notes for each operation key

・ [MONI/FNC] key

It switches the monitor (MONI) mode to the function setting (FNC) mode and vice versa.

The current mode is indicated by the [FNC] LED on or off.

・ [START] key, [JOG/ ] key, [FWD/REV] key, [STOP/RESET] key

Only when these operation keys are enabled for operation from the console, you can operate the inverter by using them.

When they are enabled, the [DIR] LED turns on.

・ [ ] key, [ ] key

Each time you press these keys, the display changes one by one. Also, when you press and hold them, the display changes continuously.

■ Basic operating procedures for keys

(1) To move the operating digit

When you change various settings in the function setting (FNC) mode, a blinking digit of alphanumeric characters indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

You can shift the operating digit to the right by pressing the [JOG/ ] key. However, a shift function to the left is not provided. If you press the [JOG/ ] key while the operating digit is in the right edge of the seven-segment display, it moves to the leftmost digit or the maximum settable digit.

(2) To change numerical values

How to set a negative value in the seven-segment display on the console

Use the [JOG/ ] key to move the operating digit to the leftmost one and then use the key [ ] or [ ] to change a number.

・ By pressing the [ ] key

A number changes in the following order: "0" -> "1" -> "2" -> ･･････ -> "8" -> "9" -> "-." After "9," a negative value is displayed.

・ By pressing the [ ] key

A number changes in the following order: "0" -> "-" -> "9" -> ･･････ -> "3" -> "2" -> "1." After "0," a negative value is displayed.

－ 48 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.1.2 What Are Displayed at Power-on

When the inverter is turned on, the following contents appear in the seven-segment display on the console:

1. The inverter series name is displayed for 1.5 seconds.

The inverter series name "VF66B" is displayed.

2. The capacity and the voltage class of the inverter are displayed for 1.5 seconds.

・ Starting from the left, the first three digits show the inverter capacity, and the next two digits the voltage class.

・ The inverter capacity is displayed in kW, and a decimal point is represented as "r."

・ For a voltage class of 200 V, "22" is displayed, for 400 V,

"44" is displayed.

In the left three digits, "3.7" is displayed.

In the right two digits, "22" is displayed.

3. Symbols for representing the setting block and the inverter control method are displayed for 1.5

seconds.

・ Starting from the leftmost digit, the items listed below are displayed:

Control method of the first setting block

- (hyphen)

Control method of the second setting block

Current setting block

・ The inverter control method is represented as follows:

[V/f control]: "o"

[Induction motor vector control]: "V"

[ED motor vector control]: "E"

The control method of the first setting block is "o," and that of the second setting block is "V." Currently, the first setting block is being selected.

For details of the inverter control method, refer to {4.1.5

Changing Inverter Control Methods}.

4. The console enters the monitor (MONI) mode, and a monitor item is displayed for one second.

"Fout" shows output frequency

－ 49 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

5. Data of the monitor item is displayed.

・ What is displayed depends on the setting of the inverter control method.

・ For details of monitor items and their data, refer to {4.1.7 List of Monitor Items}.

Current output frequency is "0.0" Hz

About setting blocks

The inverter has the first setting block and the second setting block, for each of which you can set different control methods and parameters (some parameters are common to both blocks).

You can operate one motor by switching the speed vector control without sensor drive and the vector control drive with speed sensor, or you can also switch the ED motor and the induction motor.

・ Two motors cannot be operated at the same time.

・ To use two motors, you need to use a contactor, etc. to switch between the wirings to the motors.

For which of the first or second setting block and which of the three control methods are currently used, you can check them based on what are displayed on the console at power-on.

・ In the default setting, the first setting block is selected.

To change the first setting block to the second setting block, use an external signal.

・ For details, refer to {5.3.4 Area c}.

About the cooling fan

When the inverter is turned on, the cooling fan installed on it also starts at the same time.

It behaves as follows:

・ Power-on: It operates for five minutes after power-on and then stops. However, when the inverter is operated within five minutes after power-on, the cooling fan stops in one minute after the inverter stops.

・ Running: It always operates.

・ Stop: After the inverter stops, it operates for one minute and then stops.

－ 50 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings

This section provides the basic operating procedures for checking and changing parameter settings required to operate the inverter on the console.

・ Set the console to the function setting (FNC) mode.

・ Two modes "simple mode" and "full mode" are provided for parameters, and the procedures are common to both of them. For differences between them, refer to {4.1.4 Changing Parameter Simple Mode and Full

Mode}.

・ Some parameters can be changed while the inverter is running. For details, refer to {5.1 List of Parameters

That Can Be Changed in Simple Mode}.

Notation of inverter control methods

In subsequent sections, three types of inverter control methods are represented as follows:

・ [V/f control] -> [V/f]

・ [Induction motor vector control] -> [IM]

・ [ED motor vector control] -> [EDM]

For details of the control methods, refer to {4.1.5 Changing Inverter Control Methods}.

－ 51 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ How to check parameter setting values

To check parameter settings of the inverter, perform the following steps on the console:

For example, this section provides procedures to display a setting value of the parameter <b-13> of the area b.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the

[MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and the console enters the function setting (FNC) mode.

・ A setting item appears in the seven-segment display on the console. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

[V/f] Frequency_command <0.FrEF>

[IM] [EDM] Speed_command <0.SrEF>

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display the first setting item "b-00" of the area b.

・ The alphabet character "b" in the setting item blinks, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

3. Press the [JOG/ ] key once to blink "0" in the tens digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to "1."

・ As a result, "b-10" is displayed.

－ 52 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key once to blink "0" in the single digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to "3."

・ As a result, "b-13" is displayed.

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "b-13" is confirmed, and for example its

Initialized data "150" is displayed as a current setting value.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds.

6. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, and the console returns to the monitor (MONI) mode.

・ The monitor item, which was displayed before setting the parameter, is displayed for about one second.

Then, its data is displayed.

Operating digit of parameter setting items

When setting items of the area A through area S are displayed, an alphabet character or a number blinks, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

Each time the [JOG/ ] key is pressed, the operating digit moves in the following order: alphabet character

-> number in the tens digit -> number in the single digit -> alphabet character.

When a number in the single digit is changed, in some cases, a number in the tens digit is also changed.

For example:

・ Press the [ ] key: "b-09" -> "b-10," "b-19" -> "b-20," "b-99" -> "b-00"

・ Press the [ ] key: "b-10" -> "b-09," "b-20" -> "b-19," "b-00" -> "b-99"

－ 53 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ How to change parameter setting values

To manually set and change parameters of the inverter, perform the following steps on the console:

For example, this section provides procedures for changing the parameter <b-13> of the area b from its

Initialized data "150" to "125."

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and the console enters the function setting (FNC) mode.

・ A setting item appears in the seven-segment display on the console. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display the first setting item "b-00" of the area b.

・ The alphabet character "b" in the setting item blinks, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

3. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "b-13."

4. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "b-13" is confirmed, "150" is displayed as a current setting value.

・ The operating digit blinks. In the initial setting, the maximum digit within the SettingBand (in this case "1") blinks.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds.

5. Press the [JOG/ ] key once to blink "5," and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to "2."

・ As a result, "120" is displayed.

－ 54 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

6. Press the [JOG/ ] key once to blink "0," and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to "5."

・ As a result, "125" is displayed.

7. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-13" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, its change is not confirmed.

・ To change other parameters, repeat the procedures from the step 2.

8. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, and the console returns to the monitor (MONI) mode.

・ The monitor item, which was displayed before setting the parameter, is displayed for about one second.

Then, its data is displayed.

Operating digit of parameter setting values

The operating digit of a setting value is indicated by blinking.

・ A number from "0" to "9," a minus sign "-," or an underscore "_" (representing a blank) blinks.

Immediately after the setting value is displayed, the maximum digit within the SettingBand of that parameter blinks. Therefore, immediately after the setting value is displayed, which becomes the operating digit depends on parameters.

For example:

・ When selecting one of selecting items "0" to "3": A number in the single digit blinks.

・ When "150" is set in the SettingBand of "0" to "150": "1" in the hundreds digit blinks.

・ When "80" is set in the SettingBand of "0" to "150": An underscore blinks in the hundreds digit.

However, note that the display of the setting value of the parameter automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds.

－ 55 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.1.4 Changing Parameter Simple Mode and Full Mode

The inverter provides two modes "simple mode" and "full mode" for parameters.

(1) Simple mode

In the "simple mode," only parameters required for basic operation can be displayed and changed.

・ The inverter is set to the "simple mode" at the factory.

・ For parameters that can be displayed and changed in the "simple mode," refer to {5.1 List of Parameters

That Can Be Changed in Simple Mode}.

(2) Full Mode

In the "full mode," all parameters can be displayed and changed.

・ For parameters which can be displayed and changed in the "full mode," refer to "Features of full mode" in this chapter, {5.2 List of Parameters in Full Mode}, and {5.3 Detailed Explanation of Parameters}.

■ How to check current mode

To check which mode is currently applied to parameters, perform the following steps on the console:

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] continuously to check that other items in addition to the basic setting area items,

"A-00," "b-00," and "S-00" are displayed.

・ When only basic setting area items, "A-00," "b-00," and

"S-00" are displayed, it indicates that the "simple mode" is applied.

・ When "c-00," "P-00," and others are displayed, it indicates that the "full mode" is applied.

In the "full mode," "P-00" is displayed.

3. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

Also, you can check the mode with the Inverter_operation_mode_monitor <L-21>. For details, refer to {5.3.12

Area L}.

－ 56 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ Features of full mode

The inverter provides parameters of a total of 16 areas: "basic setting area" and "area A" through "area S" which are listed in the table below.

In the "full mode," parameters of all areas can be displayed and changed. On the other hand, in the "simple mode," only parameters of some areas can be displayed and changed.

For detailed explanation of each parameter, refer to {5.3 Detailed Explanation of Parameters}.

Switching mode and setting values

When you switch the mode to the "simple mode" after changing a setting value in the "full mode," Initialized data will be used for the items having " ○ " in the "Use Initialized data in simple mode" field in the table below.

Also, when you switch the mode to the "simple mode" after setting the parameters of the "area c" through the "area P" in the "full mode" and then you change it to the "full mode" once again, the values previously specified in the "full mode" are used for those of the "area c" through the "area P."

List of inverter setting areas

Setting area

Main contents

Basic Frequency setting

Jog frequency setting

Acceleration or deceleration time (1) and (2)

A Maximum frequency

Rated motor b Rewrite protection

Stop mode and stop frequency

Instantaneous power interruption and reverse prohibition

Operation/JOG/frequency command input selection

Torque limit c Multifunction input function selection

Simple mode

Setting for each block

○ Yes

Use

Initialized data in simple mode

―

○

○

―

Yes

Yes

No

―

―

―

Remarks

Also support standard terminals d Acceleration or deceleration time (3) and (4), and S-pattern acceleration or deceleration setting

Preset frequency

Jump frequency

Functions related to MRH

E Boost mode

Regeneration stall prevention

Motor temperature compensation

"ON"/"OFF"

Current control gain

Simulation mode

Forward direction change

―

―

Yes

Yes

○

○

－ 57 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

List of inverter setting areas

Setting area

Main contents

F Overspeed protection, overload protection, and overtorque protection

Traceback

Cumulative operation timer

Other protections

Simple mode

―

Setting for each block

Yes

Use

Initialized data in simple mode

○

Remarks

J

L

G Optional board analog input and output characteristics selection

Temperature detection options

Line speed monitor adjustment

H Multifunction output selection

Multifunction output data i Internal PLC

Droop controls

Second speed control gain and others

Speed control selection, positioning, and others n

Communication options

Vdc adjustment gain

Analog input/output adjustment gain and offset

Change simple/full mode

Control method and inverter capacity

―

―

―

―

―

― o Special adjustment

P For internal PLC

S Autotuning function and initialization

Cumulative operation timer reset

ROM rewrite protection

―

―

Partially available

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

―

No

No

○

○

○

○

―

―

―

○

―

Specified through the area S

Specified through the area S

・ Data is not memorized.

・ Only some data can be rewritten in the simple mode.

－ 58 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ How to change to the full mode

The inverter is set to the "simple mode" at the factory.

To change it to the "full mode," perform the following steps on the console:

The parameter to be changed is the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

・ When the first item of the basic setting area is displayed, press the [ ] key once to display "S-00."

・ For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to

{5.3.16 Area S}.

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ On the extreme right, "0" is displayed.

・ The underscore blinks on the extreme left, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "1040."

・ "1040" is a password. It is required to change a setting of the

Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and "S-00" is displayed again.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating a password error is displayed. In this case, press the keys [ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 3.

Display indicating a password error

－ 59 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key four times to blink "0" in the single digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to "4" (Switch the simple mode and full mode).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the

[SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed.

・ The selection is confirmed, and "FuLL" and "SurE" blink alternately. "FuLL" indicates the "full mode."

9. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "S-00" is displayed again.

・ This changes the mode to the "full mode." However, no change appears on the display of the console. For confirmation, refer to " ■ How to check current mode" in this section {4.1.4}.

10. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

■ How to change to the simple mode

To change the "full mode" to the "simple mode," follow the same steps as described in " ■ How to change to the full mode."

In the step 8, "SnPL" and "SurE" blink alternately.

－ 60 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Here, press the [SET] key to change it to the "simple mode."

Parameter setting values when changing to the simple mode

When the mode is changed to the "simple mode," Initialized data shall be used in some parameters. For details, refer to " ■ Features of full mode" in this section.

4.1.5 Changing Inverter Control Methods

Three types of control methods listed in the table below can be set in the inverter.

In the initial state, the V/f control of the induction motor is set.

Symbol o

V

E

Inverter control method

V/f control

Descriptions

Frequency of the induction motor can be controlled with keeping a ratio of voltage and frequency constant.

Induction motor vector control

Speed and torque of the induction motor can be controlled at high speed and high accuracy.

ED motor vector control Speed and torque of the ED motor can be controlled at high speed and high accuracy.

■ How to check current mode

To check which control method is currently set in the inverter, use the Inverter_control_mode <n-00>.

Perform the following steps on the console:

These steps are enabled only when the parameter is in the "full mode." Before doing it, refer to {4.1.4

Changing Parameter Simple Mode and Full Mode} and change to the "full mode."

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "n-00."

・ For details of the Inverter_control_mode <n-00>, refer to

{5.3.13 Area n}.

・ <n-00> is read-only. You cannot change the inverter control method with this parameter.

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of the parameter is confirmed, and either of

"o," "V," or "E" is displayed as a current inverter control method.

・ o: [V/f control]

・ V: [Induction motor vector control]

・ E: [ED motor vector control]

"o" indicates [V/f]

4. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

－ 61 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ How to change the inverter control method

To change the inverter control method, perform the following steps on the console:

The parameter to be changed is the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

・ When the first item of the basic setting area is displayed, press the [ ] key once to display "S-00."

・ For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to

{5.3.16 Area S}.

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ On the extreme right, "0" is displayed.

・ The underscore blinks on the extreme left, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "1040."

・ "1040" is a password. It is required to change a setting of the

Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and "S-00" is displayed again.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 3.

・ Here, you can abort the procedures by pressing the

[STOP/RESET] key.

Display indicating a password error

6. Press the [SET] key.

－ 62 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key four times to blink "0" in the single digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to "2" (Change the inverter control method).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is

.

pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

・ A message of "CHAnGE inVErtEr ControL" is displayed in turns.

・ Then, "SurE" blinks.

・ Here, you can abort the procedures by pressing the

[STOP/RESET] key.

9. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection is confirmed, and the control method of the first setting block is displayed. You will not find a blinking digit, but the rightmost digit becomes the operating digit.

・ o: [V/f control]

・ V: [Induction motor vector control]

・ E: [ED motor vector control]

"SurE" blinks

Display indicating the first setting block is

"o"

10. Use the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the inverter control method of the first setting block, and press the [SET] key.

Display after changing to "V" of [IM]

・ The control method of the second setting block is displayed.

11. Similarly, use the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the inverter control method of the second setting block, and press the [SET] key.

－ 63 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

・ After "CHAnG" is displayed for a few seconds, "End" is displayed. Now, the procedures to change the inverter control method are completed.

・ About five seconds later, like what are displayed at power-on, the series name, capacity and voltage, and setting block and inverter control method of the inverter appear in the seven-segment display.

・ Then, a monitor item is displayed for about one second, and its data is displayed.

Setting blocks and inverter control methods

The inverter provides the first setting block and the second setting block, for each of which you can set different control methods.

In default, the first setting block is selected. For how to change the setting block, refer to {5.3.4 Area c}.

4.1.6 Checking Operating State

The inverter can display data such as motor speed, current, and voltage on the console while it is running.

A total of 24 monitor items are provided. For contents of each item, refer to {4.1.7 List of Monitor Items}.

To change a monitor item, perform the following steps on the console:

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns on, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, and the console enters the monitor (MONI) mode.

2. The monitor item currently set is displayed.

"Fout" shows output frequency

・ About one second later, data of the monitor item is automatically displayed.

"0.0" Hz is displayed as output frequency

3. Press either of the [SET] key, [ ] key, or [ ] key to return to the display of the monitor item.

Display example of output frequency

<Fout> in [V/f]

4. Press either of the [SET] key, [ ] key, or [ ] key while the monitor item is displayed.

－ 64 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

・ The next monitor item is displayed.

・ About one second later, data of the monitor item is automatically displayed.

・ The display order of the monitor items will differ between the

[SET]/[ ] key and the [ ] key.

Display after pressing the [ ] key in [V/f]

[SET] key, [ ] key

[ ] key

Top to bottom in the list of monitor items

Bottom to top in the list of monitor items

For the types and order of monitor items, refer to the next section {4.1.7 List of Monitor Items}.

－ 65 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.1.7 List of Monitor Items

The table below lists all monitor items which appear in the seven-segment display on the console in the monitor (MONI) mode.

For details of how to change the display of monitor items, refer to {4.1.6 Checking Operating State}.

Press the [SET] key or [ ] key to change a monitor item from top down in the table, and the [ ] key from bottom up.

List of monitor items

Monitor contents

Output frequency/

Motor speed

Frequency command value/

Speed command value

Output current

Output torque/

Torque command

Display of selecting items

Fout/

SPd

FrEF/

SrEF iout tout/ trEF

Vdc

Unit

Hz r/min

Hz r/min

A

%

V

Remarks

Displays output frequency/motor speed.

Displays a value of frequency command/motor speed command.

Displays an effective value of output current.

[V/f] Displays a calculated value of output torque. Accuracy is not guaranteed in the V/f control.

[IM] [EDM] Displays a torque command after limit input into the torque control part is processed.

Displays direct-current voltage.

Direct-current voltage

Output voltage

Motor speed/

Output frequency

Overload protection

Counter

Line speed

Motor temperature

Input terminal check 1

Vout

SPd/

Fout oLcnt

L_SP tEnP i1cH

V r/min

Hz

%

Displays an effective value of voltage between output lines.

[V/f] Displays a value of motor speed converted from frequency.

[IM] [EDM] Displays output frequency.

Displays a counter value of overload protection (oL) or overtorque protection (oT). When this value reaches 100 %, a protection operation starts.

m/min Displays line speed as a ratio being a setting value of the

Line_speed_monitor_adjustment at the maximum frequency/ maximum speed.

・ For a setting value of the line speed monitor, refer to {5.3.8

Area G}.

℃

―

Displays motor temperature.

・ A special optional board is required to measure motor temperature.

Displays the state "ON"/"OFF" of the input terminal on the control board .

Starting from the right digit, states of the following input terminals are displayed:

[ST-F]: Operation through the external switch

[MI1] through [MI4]: The input terminal on the control board .

・ Refer to another table "Displays of input and output terminal

－ 66 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

List of monitor items

Monitor contents

Display of selecting items

Input terminal check 2

Input terminal check 3

Input terminal check 4

Output terminal check 1 i2cH i3cH i4cH o1cH

Unit Remarks

―

―

―

― check."

・ "1" indicates "ON," and "0" indicates "OFF."

・ For [ST-F], refer to {4.5 Start and Stop through External

Contact in V/f Control}.

・ For the settings of [MI1] through [MI4], refer to {5.3.4 Area c}.

Displays the state "ON"/"OFF" of the input terminal on the control board and optional board .

Starting from the right digit, states of the following input terminals are displayed:

[MI5]: The input terminal on the control board .

[MI6] through [MI9]: Input terminals on the optional board

・ Refer to another table "Displays of input and output terminal check."

・ "1" indicates "ON," and "0" indicates "OFF."

・ For the setting of [MI5], refer to {5.3.4 Area c}.

・ For the settings of [MI6] through [MI9], refer to the "Instruction

Manual" of the optional board.

Displays the state "ON"/"OFF" of the input terminals [MI10] through [MI14] on the optional board.

Starting from the right digit, states of the following input terminals are displayed:

[MI10] through [MI14]: Input terminals on the optional board

・ Refer to another table "Displays of input and output terminal check."

・ "1" indicates "ON," and "0" indicates "OFF."

・ For the settings of [MI10] through [MI14] , refer to the

"Instruction Manual" of the optional board.

Displays the state "ON"/"OFF" of the input terminals [MI15] through [MI17] on the optional board.

Starting from the right digit, states of the following input terminals are displayed:

[MI15] through [MI17]: Input terminals on the optional board

・ Refer to another table "Displays of input and output terminal check."

・ "1" indicates "ON," and "0" indicates "OFF."

・ For the settings of [MI15] through [MI17] , refer to the

"Instruction Manual" of the optional board.

Starting from the right digit, displays the relay state and terminal state on the control board.

[52MA]: Inverter operation

[86A]: Inverter protection

[MO1] through [MO2]: The output terminals on the control board

・ Refer to another table "Displays of input and output terminal check."

・ "1" indicates "ON," and "0" indicates "OFF."

－ 67 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

List of monitor items

Monitor contents

Display of selecting items

Unit Remarks

Output terminal check 2 o2cH tin

―

Hr

For the settings of [MO1] and [MO2], refer to {5.3.9 Area H}.

Displays the state "ON"/"OFF" of the output terminals [MO3] through [MO6] on the optional board.

Starting from the right digit, states of the following output terminals are displayed:

[MO3] through [MO6]: Output terminals on the optional board

・ Refer to another table "Displays of input and output terminal check."

・ "1" indicates "ON," and "0" indicates "OFF."

・ For the settings of [MO3] through [MO6] , refer to the

"Instruction Manual" of the optional board.

Displays cumulative operation time.

Cumulative operation time

Timer remaining time 1 tin1 Hr

Timer remaining time 2

Main unit version

PLC function version

Analog input voltage tin2

VEr

VErSq

Vin

SPdSP

Hr

―

―

V

―

Displays remaining time of the main circuit capacitor timer.

2.2 to 1000 kW models: When cumulative operation time exceeds 43800 hours (it can be changed in the "full mode"), the [ALM] LED turns on.

・ This numerical value is a guideline of remaining life of the main circuit capacitor, which does not provide any guarantee.

・ To set the Cumulative_operation_timer(1), refer to {5.3.7

Area F}. To clear it, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

Displays remaining time of the cooling fan timer.

2.2 to 1000 kW models: When cumulative operation time exceeds 21900 hours (it can be changed in the "full mode"), the [ALM] LED turns on.

・ This numerical value is a guideline of remaining life of the cooling fan, which does not provide any guarantee.

・ To set the Cumulative_operation_timer(2), refer to {5.3.7

Area F}. To clear it, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

Displays the version of the main unit program.

・ For example: VF66B-02-A1 -> h02A1

Displays the date when a sequence ladder was created.

・ For example: 2001-09-28 -> h1928

Month is converted and displayed as follows: 10 -> A, 11 ->

B, and 12-C.

Displays voltage input into the terminal [AIN1] on the control board .

・ Voltage input into the terminals [AIN2] through [AIN5] on the optional board can be also displayed. For how to set it, refer to {5.3.8 Area G}.

Special monitor for special adjustment Adjustment monitor

Protection history trbLE ― Displays the history of the last six protection items and the data

－ 68 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

List of monitor items

Monitor contents

Display of selecting items display

Unit Remarks of protection operations.

・ For details, refer to {6.4 How to Check Protection History}.

Displays of input and output terminal check

Display digit

Input terminal check 1

Input terminal check 2

Input terminal check 3

Input terminal check 4

Output terminal check 1

Output terminal check 2

Leftmost

MI4

MI9

MI14

Unused

Unused

Unused

MI3

MI8

MI13

Unused

MO2

MO6

Middle

MI2

MI7

MI12

MI17

MO1

MO5

MI1

MI6

MI11

MI16

86A

MO4

Rightmost

ST-F

MI5

MI10

MI15

52MA

MO3

－ 69 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.2 Operation Flow of Inverter

This section provides operating procedures for the inverter from the console.

After installing and connecting the inverter, perform Autotuning to automatically set the parameters for the motor to be used.

For how to perform Autotuning, refer to {4.3 Autotuning of Parameters (Automatic Setting)}.

For detailed procedures such as changing a frequency command and acceleration or deceleration time, refer to {4.4 Operations on Console}.

When the inverter can be operated from the console, the [DIR] LED turns on.

・ In the initial state, it can be operated from the console.

・ When the [DIR] LED turns off, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

－ 70 －

■ Operation flow of V/f control

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

It is recommended that you perform Autotuning even when using the [V/f] control, like the [IM] control described in the next section.

－ 71 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ Operation flow of induction motor vector control and ED motor vector control

－ 72 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.3 Autotuning of Parameters (Automatic Setting)

4.3.1 What Is Autotuning of Parameters?

Since the inverter executes control based on the motor parameters including motor resistance and inductance, you should first set such information to it.

The inverter provides an Autotuning function which enables the inverter itself to measure parameter information and automatically set parameter values.

■ Need for Autotuning depending on the inverter control methods

In [V/f], when the parameters required for the motor are not set, you should conduct Autotuning to measure and set them.

In [IM] and [EDM], be sure to perform Autotuning before operation.

■ Types of Autotuning

The following types of Autotuning are provided:

Types of Autotuning

Full Mode Autotuning (forward)

Full Mode Autotuning (reverse)

Direct Current Mode Autotuning (forward)

Direct Current Mode Autotuning (reverse)

Motor D-axis Measurement Mode Autotuning (forward)

Motor D-axis Measurement Mode Autotuning (reverse)

[V/f]

×

○

×

[IM]

○

○

×

[EDM]

○

○

○

Full Mode Autotuning measures all required parameters.

Direct Current Mode Autotuning measures only primary resistance and deadtime compensation which are some of required parameters.

Motor D-axis Measurement Mode Autotuning measures the pole position of the ED motor.

Motor temperature when parameters are automatically set

Perform Autotuning when the motor temperature is below about 25 ℃ .

Performing Autotuning at high temperatures of the motor will cause motor characteristics to be changed, which may cause incorrect measurement.

■ Autotuning selection

In [IM] and [EDM], typically perform Full Mode Autotuning (forward).

For Direct Current Mode Autotuning (forward) and motor D-axis Measurement Mode Autotuning (forward), perform them as an additional adjustment of the motor whose Full Mode Autotuning has already been done.

Also, only when each Autotuning (forward) cannot be performed in relation to load machines and others, you should perform each Autotuning (reverse).

Autotuning in [V/f control]

In [V/f], standard motor parameters are preconfigured at the factory. Therefore, you can operate the inverter without conducting Autotuning of parameters.

However, for better performance of the inverter, it is recommended that you perform Direct Current Mode

Autotuning after connecting the inverter to the motor.

－ 73 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.3.2 Requirements for Performing Autotuning

Before Autotuning, on the console, you should set a rated value of the motor for which Autotuning will be performed.

Also, for [IM] and [EDM], separate the motor for Autotuning from load machines to ensure that it is isolated.

Set a rated value of the motor with the parameters <A-00> through <A-07>. For details of the SettingBand and others, refer to {5.3.2 Area A}.

Setting item

A-00

A-01

A-02

A-03

A-04

A-05

A-06

A-07

Contents

Maximum_frequency/

Maximum_speed

Minimum_frequency/

Minimum_speed

Rated_motor_capacity

Rated_motor_voltage

Rated_motor_current

Rated_motor_speed

Number_of_motor_pole

Rated_motor_frequency

Applicable inverter control method

Common to [V/f], [IM], and

[EDM]

For [V/f] and [IM] only

In <A-02> through <A-07>, set each rated value described in the motor nameplate or the data sheet. For details of the settings, refer to {5.3.2 Area A}.

For the motor that has two types of rated voltage and rated current, set a larger value within the speed range in the

Rated_motor_voltage <A-03> and the Rated_motor_current

<A-04>.

When using the motor until the constant output (power constant) area in [IM] and [EDM], set the base speed in the

Rated_motor_speed <A-05>.

－ 74 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ Setting rated motor values

To set a rated value of the motor, perform the following steps on the console:

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "A-00."

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "A-00" is confirmed, a current setting value is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

For [V/f], Initialized data "60.0" is displayed

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change numbers.

・ To set a negative value, specify "-" in the leftmost digit.

・ For data selection, use the keys [ ] and [ ] to select one.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

Display after changing to "200.0"

5. After completing all the digits you need to change, press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

・ When data cannot be written, the contents below are displayed. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to return to the display of the setting item.

・ "u-Lim": Above the upper limit of SettingBand

・ "L-Lim": Below the lower limit of SettingBand

・ "PrtCt": Writing is prohibited by the Setting_data_rewrite_ protection <b-00>.

When a numerical value is too large

When a numerical value is too small

When rewriting is protected

－ 75 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

・ The change is confirmed, and "A-00" is displayed again.

6. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink the number, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to become "A-01."

・ Repeat the steps 3 through 6 and set <A-01>.

・ Similarly, set the parameters <A-02> through <A-07>.

7. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

[V/f] Output frequency <Fout>

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed <SPd>

－ 76 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.3.3 How to Perform Autotuning

■ [IM] [EDM] Operating procedures for Full Mode Autotuning

For Full Mode Autotuning in [IM] and [EDM], perform the following steps on the console:

The parameter to be changed is the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

[EDM] Full Mode Autotuning

● During Autotuning, voltage is applied to the ED motor even while the inverter is stopped.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

[IM] [EDM] Full Mode Autotuning

● When Full Mode Autotuning is performed, the motor rotates. Separate it from load machines to ensure that it is isolated.

Otherwise, machines may be damaged, or you may be injured.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

・ When the first item of the basic setting area is displayed, press the [ ] key once to display "S-00."

・ For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to

{5.3.16 Area S}.

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ On the extreme right, "0" is displayed.

・ The underscore blinks on the extreme left, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "1040."

・ "1040" is a password. It is required to change a setting of the

Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

－ 77 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and "S-00" is displayed again.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 3.

Display indicating a password error

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "10" (forward) or "11" (reverse).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ Two digits on the right side show the setting block ("1" or

"2") and Autotuning mode.

・ The Autotuning mode is displayed as follows:

" " (blank): Full Mode

"d": Direct Current Mode

"P": Motor D-axis Measurement Mode

9. Press the [JOG/ ] key.

・ Autotuning starts, and "tunSt" is displayed.

・ The motor behaves during Full Mode Autotuning as follows:

This shows the setting block "1" and the mode " " (full mode)

Autotuning starts

(1) [IM] The four-pole motor makes about 1/2 revolution slowly, and then it accelerates until it reaches a speed of about 80 % of rated speed.

(2) [EDM] After the six-pole motor makes about one revolution slowly, it performs measurement while it stops and then accelerates until it reaches a speed of about 80 % of rated speed.

10. Autotuning automatically terminates.

－ 78 －

・ When it normally terminates, "tunEd" is displayed.

・ In case of abnormality, a protection message or "Err--" is displayed. For details and how to clear it, refer to {6.1.4

Meaning of Setting Error ( SE--) Display}.

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Autotuning terminates

Error indication

11. Press the [STOP/RESET] key for three seconds.

・ The inverter series name is displayed.

・ Subsequently, the screen displays contents similar to what are displayed at power-on, and then the console returns to the monitor (MONI) mode. For details, refer to {4.1.2 What

Are Displayed at Power-on}.

■ Operating procedures for Direct Current Mode Autotuning

For Direct Current Mode Autotuning, perform the following steps on the console:

The parameter to be changed is the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

[EDM] Direct Current Mode Autotuning

When Direct Current Mode Autotuning is performed in [EDM], the motor rotates. Therefore, isolate it from machines or release machine brakes to ensure that it can rotate freely.

Otherwise, machines may be damaged.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

・ When the first item of the basic setting area is displayed, press the [ ] key once to display "S-00."

・ For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to

{5.3.16 Area S}.

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ On the extreme right, "0" is displayed.

・ The underscore blinks on the extreme left, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

－ 79 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "1040."

・ "1040" is a password. It is required to change a setting of the

Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and "S-00" is displayed again.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 3.

Display indicating a password error

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "12" (forward) or "13" (reverse).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ Two digits on the right side show the setting block ("1" or

"2") and Autotuning mode.

・ The Autotuning mode is displayed as follows:

" " (blank): Full Mode

"d": Direct Current Mode

"P": Motor D-axis Measurement Mode

9. Press the [JOG/ ] key.

"1" and "d" indicate the setting block and mode (Direct Current), respectively

－ 80 －

・ Autotuning starts, and "tunSt" is displayed.

・ The motor behaves during Direct Current Mode Autotuning as follows:

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Autotuning starts

(1) [V/f] [IM] The four-pole motor makes about 1/2 revolution slowly, and then it may slowly make about 1/2 revolution in the forward and reverse directions each. Since the induction motor develops lower torque, it does not rotate if load is put on it or the machine brake is applied. Even when it does not rotate, Autotuning can be performed.

(2) [EDM] The six-pole motor makes up to about 2/3 revolution slowly in the forward direction.

10. Autotuning automatically terminates.

・ When it normally terminates, "tunEd" is displayed.

・ In case of abnormality, a protection message or "Err--" is displayed. For details and how to clear it, refer to {6.1.4

Meaning of Setting Error ( SE--) Display}.

Autotuning terminates

Error indication

11. Press the [STOP/RESET] key for three seconds.

・ The inverter model is displayed.

・ Subsequently, the screen displays contents similar to what are displayed at power-on, and then the console returns to the monitor (MONI) mode. For details, refer to {4.1.2 What

Are Displayed at Power-on}.

■ [EDM] Operating procedures for motor D-axis Measurement Mode Autotuning

For motor D-axis Measurement Mode Autotuning, perform the following steps on the console:

The parameter to be changed is the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

・ When the first item of the basic setting area is displayed, press the [ ] key once to display "S-00."

・ For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to

{5.3.16 Area S}.

3. Press the [SET] key.

－ 81 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

・ On the extreme right, "0" is displayed.

・ The underscore blinks on the extreme left, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "1040."

・ "1040" is a password. It is required to change a setting of the

Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-00" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 3.

Display indicating a password error

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "14" (forward) or "15" (reverse).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ Two digits on the right side show the setting block ("1" or

"2") and Autotuning mode.

・ The Autotuning mode is displayed as follows:

" " (blank): Full Mode

"d": Direct Current Mode

"P": Motor D-axis Measurement Mode

"1" and "P" indicate the setting block and mode (Motor D-axis Measurement), respectively

－ 82 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

9. Press the [JOG/ ] key.

・ Autotuning starts, and "tunSt" is displayed.

Autotuning starts

10. Autotuning automatically terminates.

・ When it normally terminates, "tunEd" is displayed.

・ In case of abnormality, a protection message or "Err--" is displayed. For details and how to clear it, refer to {6.1.4

Meaning of Setting Error ( SE--) Display}.

Autotuning terminates

11. Press the [STOP/RESET] key for three seconds.

・ The inverter series name is displayed.

・ Subsequently, the screen displays contents similar to what are displayed at power-on, and then the console returns to the monitor (MONI) mode. For details, refer to {4.1.2 What

Are Displayed at Power-on}.

Error indication

－ 83 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.4 Operations on Console

4.4.1 Rotating Motor with Specified Frequency/Speed

To rotate the motor with a specified frequency/speed, perform the following steps on the console:

The parameter to be changed is the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/Speed_command <0.SrEF>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/Speed_command <0.SrEF>.

・ For details of the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/Speed_command <0.SrEF>, refer to {5.3.1 Basic

Setting Area}.

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of the setting item is confirmed, a current setting value is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

"0.5" indicates Initialized data (Hz) of the

Frequency_command in [V/f]

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change numbers (frequency/speed).

・ The SettingBand depends on the inverter control method.

・ [V/f] The SettingBand in the default setting is -60.0 to 60.0

Hz.

・ [IM] [EDM] The SettingBand in the default setting is -1800 to

1800 r/min.

Frequency_command changed to "10.0"

Hz in [V/f]

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/Speed_command <0.SrEF> is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the

[SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

6. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

－ 84 －

7. Press the [START] key.

・ The inverter starts, the motor starts to rotate, and then their frequency/speed changes until it reaches the setting value.

・ While it operates, the currently set monitor item data is displayed.

・ If the motor does not rotate even when the [START] key is pressed, change the settings of the Frequency_command

<0.FrEF>/Speed_command <0.SrEF>. You can change them even while the inverter is running.

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

"10.0" Hz displayed as current output frequency in [V/f]

8. Press the [STOP/RESET] key.

・ The inverter stops, and rotation of the motor stops.

"0.0" Hz displayed as output frequency when the inverter is stopped in [V/f]

[V/f] SettingBand, Initialized data, and unit of Frequency_command

Display Contents

0.FrEF

Frequency_ command

SettingBand

-Maximum_frequency <A-00> to

+Maximum_frequency <A-00>

Initialized data

0.5

Unit

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

○

[IM] [EDM] SettingBand, Initialized data, and unit of Speed_command

Display Contents SettingBand

Initialized data

0 0.SrEF

Speed_command -Maximum_speed <A-00> to

+Maximum_speed <A-00>

For details of the Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed <A-00>, refer to {5.3.2 Area A}.

Unit r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○

－ 85 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.4.2 Changing Acceleration or Deceleration Time

To change acceleration or deceleration time, perform the following steps on the console:

The parameters to be changed are the Acceleration_time(1) <3.Acc1> and Deceleration_time(1) <4.dEc1>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display the Acceleration_time(1) <3.Acc1> or Deceleration_time(1)

<4.dEc1>.

・ To change acceleration time, select "3.Acc1." To change deceleration time, select "4.dEc1."

・ This parameter is common to [V/f], [IM], and [EDM].

・ For details of the Acceleration_time(1) <3.Acc1> and

Deceleration_time(1) <4.dEc1>, refer to {5.3.1 Basic Setting

Area}.

To change acceleration time

To change deceleration time

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of the setting item is confirmed, a current setting value is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number (acceleration or deceleration time).

・ The SettingBand is 0.0 to 3600.0 sec.

"30.0" indicates Initialized data (sec) of the Acceleration_time(1)

Acceleration time changed to "50.0" sec

－ 86 －

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

・ The change is confirmed, and the Acceleration_time(1)

<3.Acc1> or Deceleration_time(1) <4.dEc1> is displayed again.

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Display after changing the acceleration time

Display after changing the deceleration time

6. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

7. Press the [START] key.

・ The inverter starts, the motor starts to rotate, and then it accelerates or decelerates until it reaches the specified acceleration or deceleration time.

・ While the inverter is in operation, the currently set monitor item data is displayed.

・ You can change acceleration or deceleration time while the inverter is running.

8. Press the [STOP/RESET] key.

・ The inverter stops, and rotation of the motor stops.

"10.0" Hz displayed as current output frequency in [V/f]

"0.0" Hz displayed as output frequency when the inverter is stopped in [V/f]

SettingBand, Initialized data, and unit of Acceleration_time(1) and Deceleration_time(1)

Display Contents SettingBand

0.0 to 3600.0

Initialized data

30.0

3.Acc1

Acceleration_time

(1)

4.dEc1

Deceleration_time

(1)

Unit sec

Driving

ReWrite

○

－ 87 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ What is acceleration or deceleration time?

The motor behaves as shown in the figure below.

When acceleration time is increased, a slope of Time - Frequency/speed is decreased. In this case, it takes long time for the motor to reach the setting value of the Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed.

Conversely, when acceleration time is decreased, a slope of Time - Frequency/speed is increased. It takes short time for the motor to reach the setting value of the Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed.

If current is too much when it accelerates or an overvoltage protection (oV) occurs when it decelerates, you should increase setting values of the Acceleration_time(1) and Deceleration_time(1).

For details of the Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed <A-00>, refer to {5.3.2 Area A}.

4.4.3 Changing Rotation Direction

To change rotation direction, perform the following steps on the console:

You can do it while the inverter is either in operation or stopped.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns on, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, and the console enters the monitor (MONI) mode.

・ A monitor item is displayed for about one second, and its data is displayed.

－ 88 －

2. Press the [FWD/REV] key.

・ Rotation direction of the motor changes.

・ When the [REV] LED turned off, it turns on. This indicates that rotation direction of the motor is reverse. Conversely, when the [REV] LED turned on, it turns off. This indicates that rotation direction of the motor is forward.

・ The frequency/speed remains unchanged before the direction is changed.

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

■ Setting a negative value to a command

You can reverse rotation of the motor by setting a negative value to the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/

Speed_command <0.SrEF> in the section {4.4.1 Rotating Motor with Specified Frequency/Speed}.

For how to set a negative value, refer to {4.1.1 Explanation of Display and Operation Keys on Console}.

You can change the setting of the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/Speed_command <0.SrEF> while the inverter is in operation.

4.4.4 How to Perform JOG Operation

For JOG operation, use the [JOG/ ] key on the console to perform the following steps:

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns on, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, and the console enters the monitor (MONI) mode.

・ A monitor item is displayed for about one second, and its data is displayed.

2. Press the [JOG/ ] key.

・ Only while the [JOG/ ] key is pressed, the motor performs

JOG operation.

・ The [RUN] LED and [JOG] LED turn on.

3. Release the [JOG/ ] key.

・ JOG operation stops.

・ The [RUN] LED and [JOG] LED turn off.

－ 89 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.4.5 Changing JOG Frequency/Speed

To change JOG frequency/speed, perform the following steps on the console:

The parameters to be changed are the Forward_JOG_frequency/Forward_JOG_speed <1.FJoG> and the

Reverse_JOG_frequency/Reverse_JOG_speed <2.rJoG>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "1.FJoG" (Forward_JOG_frequency/Forward_JOG_speed) or

"2.rJoG" (Reverse_JOG_frequency/Reverse_JOG_speed).

・ For JOG operation, you can set different values for forward and reverse.

・ To change frequency/speed of forward JOG operation, select "1.FJoG."

・ To change frequency/speed of reverse JOG operation, select "2.rJoG."

・ For details of the Forward_JOG_frequency/Forward_JOG_ speed <1.FJoG> and the Reverse_JOG_frequency/

Reverse_JOG_speed <2.rJoG>, refer to {5.3.1 Basic Setting

Area}.

For forward JOG

For reverse JOG

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of the setting item is confirmed, a current setting value is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

"1.0" indicates Initialized data (Hz) of the

Forward_JOG_frequency in [V/f]

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number (forward and reverse JOG frequency/speed).

・ The SettingBand depends on the inverter mode.

・ [V/f] The SettingBand in the default setting is 0.5 to 30.0 Hz for forward and -30.0 to -0.5 Hz for reverse.

・ [IM] [EDM] The SettingBand in the default setting is 12 to

300 r/min for forward and -300 to -12 r/min for reverse.

Forward_JOG_frequency changed to

"2.0" Hz in [V/f]

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

・ The change is confirmed, and the Forward_JOG_frequency/

Display after changing the forward JOG

－ 90 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Forward_JOG_speed <1.FJoG> or the Reverse_JOG_ frequency/Reverse_JOG_speed <2.rJoG> is displayed again.

Display after changing the reverse JOG

6. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key.

・ Forward JOG operation starts, and frequency/speed changes until it reaches the setting value of the Forward_

JOG_frequency/Forward_JOG_speed.

・ Press the [FWD/REV] key and then the [JOG/ ] key to start reverse JOG operation. Then, the frequency/speed changes until it reaches the setting value of the Reverse_JOG_ frequency/Reverse_JOG_speed

・ While the inverter is in operation, the currently set monitor item data is displayed.

・ You can change forward or reverse JOG frequency/speed while the inverter is running.

"2.0" Hz displayed as current output frequency in [V/f]

8. Release the [JOG/ ] key.

・ JOG operation stops.

"0.0" Hz displayed as output frequency when the inverter is stopped in [V/f]

[V/f] SettingBand, Initialized data, and unit of JOG frequency

Display Contents

1.FJoG

Forward_JOG_ frequency

2.rJoG

Reverse_JOG_ frequency

SettingBand

Minimum_frequency <A-01> to 30.0

-30.0 to -Minimum_frequency <A-01>

[IM] [EDM] SettingBand, Initialized data, and unit of JOG speed

Display Contents SettingBand

1.FJoG

Forward_JOG_ speed

2.rJoG

Reverse_JOG_ speed

Minimum_speed <A-01> to 300

-300 to -Minimum_speed <A-01>

Initialized data

1.0

-1.0

Initialized data

24

-24

Unit

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

○

Hz ○

Unit r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○ r/min ○

－ 91 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

For details of the Minimum_frequency/Minimum_speed <A-01>, refer to {5.3.2 Area A}.

4.4.6 Changing JOG Acceleration or Deceleration Time

To change JOG acceleration or deceleration time, perform the following steps on the console:

The parameters to be changed are the Acceleration_time(2) <5.Acc2> and Deceleration_time(2) <6.dEc2>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "5.Acc2" (Acceleration_time(2)) or "6.dEc2" (Deceleration_time(2)).

・ To change acceleration time, select "5.Acc2." To change deceleration time, select "6.dEc2."

・ This parameter is common to [V/f], [IM], and [EDM].

・ For details of the Acceleration_time(2) <5.Acc2> and

Deceleration_time(2) <6.dEc2>, refer to {5.3.1 Basic Setting

Area}.

When changing JOG acceleration time

When changing JOG deceleration time

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of the setting item is confirmed, a current setting value is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number (acceleration or deceleration time).

・ The SettingBand is 0.0 to 3600.0 sec.

"0.3" indicates Initialized data (sec) of the Acceleration_time(2)

Acceleration time changed to "1.0" sec

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

・ The change is confirmed, and "5.Acc2" (Acceleration_time

(2)) or "6.dEc2"(Deceleration_time(2)) is displayed again.

－ 92 －

Display after changing the acceleration time

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Display after changing the deceleration time

6. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key.

・ JOG operation starts, and the inverter accelerates or decelerates until it reaches the specified value of acceleration or deceleration time.

・ While it operates, the currently set monitor item data is displayed.

・ You can change acceleration or deceleration time while the inverter is running.

"2.0" Hz displayed as current output frequency in [V/f]

8. Release the [JOG/ ] key.

・ JOG operation stops.

"0.0" Hz displayed as output frequency when the inverter is stopped in [V/f]

SettingBand, Initialized data, and unit of JOG acceleration or deceleration time

Display Contents SettingBand

0.0 to 3600.0

Initialized data

0.3

5.Acc2

Acceleration_time

(2)

6.dEc2

Deceleration_time

(2)

0.0 to 3600.0

0.3

Unit sec

Driving

ReWrite

○ sec ○

－ 93 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.5 Start and Stop through External Contact in V/f Control

In [V/f], you can start and stop the inverter by installing an external contact, in addition to using the [START] key and the [STOP/RESET] key on the console.

Connect the external contact to the control input terminal [ST-F] of the terminal block <TB1> on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

This section provides a configuration and operating procedures for installing the external contact to start and stop the inverter.

■ Checking jumper socket position

Check the position of the jumper socket for a jumper pin next to the terminal block <TB1> on the control board

<VFC66-Z>.

・ When it is positioned at [CN-SO], this indicates PS common input (source input).

・ When it is positioned at [CN-SI], this indicates GND common input (sync input).

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. Check the position of the jumper socket for a jumper pin.

4. Close the front cover.

■ Installing the external contact and changing settings

This section provides procedures for installation and settings when the jumper socket is positioned at

[CN-SO] (PS common input).

When it is positioned at [CN-SI] (GND common input), you should replace a terminal [PS] with a terminal

[GND] in the procedures.

The parameter to be changed is the Operation_command_input_selection <b-11>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

－ 94 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

Installation of the external contact

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before installing the external contact.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Be sure to turn off the external contact to be installed.

If it is installed with it turned on, the motor may suddenly start when the inverter is turned on.

Items to prepare

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ External contact

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. Install the external contact between the control input terminal [ST-F] and the terminal [PS] of the terminal block on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to

{3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

4. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

5. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

6. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "b-00."

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "b-11."

・ For details of the Operation_command_input_selection

<b-11>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

8. Press the [SET] key.

－ 95 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

・ The selection of "b-11" is confirmed, a current setting value

("0" to "3") is displayed. In default, "0" (Interlocked) is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

9. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "1"

(Terminal block).

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-11" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

11. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

12. Turn on the installed external contact to start operation, and turn it off to stop operation.

Using the external contact

● When you turn on the power with signals input in the control input terminal [ST-F] on the terminal block, the motor suddenly restarts. After checking that no signal is input in the terminal [ST-F], turn on the power.

－ 96 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

4.6 Changing Speed through Voltage Setting Device/Variable Resistor in

V/f Control

In [V/f], you can change a frequency command and speed of the motor by installing a voltage setting device/variable resistor, in addition to setting frequency with the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>.

Connect the voltage setting device/variable resistor among the terminals [+10], [AIN1], and [GND] on the control board <VFC66-Z>. Install the variable resistor with a resistance of around 10 k&#937;.

This section provides a configuration and operating procedures for installing the voltage setting device/ variable resistor to change a frequency command and speed of the motor.

■ Installing the voltage setting device/variable resistor and changing settings

The parameter to be changed is the Frequency_command_input_selection <b-10>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

Installation of the voltage setting device/variable resistor

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before installing the voltage setting device/variable resistor.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● When installing the voltage setting device/variable resistor, be sure to keep the minimum resistance value between the terminals [AIN1] and [GND].

Turning on the inverter may cause the motor to suddenly start.

Items to prepare

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Variable resistor (a resistance of around 10 k&#937;) or voltage setting device

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. Install the variable resistor or the voltage setting value among the terminals [+10], [AIN1], and [GND] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to

{3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

4. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

5. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

－ 97 －

Chapter 4 Basic Operating Procedures for Inverter

6. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "b-00."

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "b-10."

・ For details of the Frequency_command_input_selection

<b-10>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "b-10" is confirmed, a current setting value

("0" to "7") is displayed. In default, "0" (Interlocked) is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

9. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "1"

(Terminal block).

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-10" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

11. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

12. When the variable resistor or the voltage setting device regulates, a value of a frequency command will change.

－ 98 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.1 List of Parameters That Can Be Changed in Simple Mode

The table below lists the parameters that can be changed in the "simple mode."

To display and change all the parameters, you should change the mode to the "full mode." For how to change to the "full mode," refer to {4.1.4 Changing Parameter Simple Mode and Full Mode}.

The symbols in the Driving ReWrite field on the right in the table have the following meanings:

○ : ReWrite is possible, ×: ReWrite is not possible

5.1.1 V/f Control

Basic setting area

Display Setting item SettingBand

0.FrEF

Frequency_ command

1.FJoG

Forward_JOG_ frequency

2.rJoG

Reverse_JOG_ frequency

3.Acc1

Acceleration_time

(1)

-Maximum_frequency to

+Maximum_frequency

Minimum_frequency to 30.0

-30.0 to -Minimum_frequency

0.0 to 3600.0

4.dEc1

Deceleration_time

(1)

5.Acc2

Acceleration_time

(2)

6.dEc2

Deceleration_time

(2)

7.tbSt

Torque_boost_ amount

8.dcbr

9.Stb

0.0 to 3600.0

0.0 to 20.0

DC_brake_voltage 0.0 to 20.0

Stabilizer_amount 0.0 to 100.0

Initialized data

0.5

Unit

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

○

1.0

-1.0

30.0

Hz

Hz sec

○

○

○

0.3

0.0

0.0

0.0

sec ○

%

%

%

○

○

○

－ 99 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display

A-00

Setting item

Maximum_ frequency

SettingBand or selecting item

15.0 to 400.0

Initialized data

60.0

A-01

A-02

Minimum_frequency 0. to 10.0

Rated_motor_ capacity

0 to Rated capacity of the inverter *1

0.5

Inverter rating

A-03

A-04

A-05

A-06

A-07

Rated_motor_ voltage

[200 V class] 70 to 230

[400 V class] 140 to 460

20 to 150 % of the rated inverter current Rated_motor_ current

Rated_motor_speed 400 to 24000

Number_of_motor_ pole

2 to 12

Rated_motor_ frequency

15.0 to Maximum_frequency <A-00>

200

400

Inverter rating

1760

4

60.0

A-08

A-09

―

PWM_carrier_ frequency

―

1.0 to 6.0

―

2.0

A-10

A-11

A-12

―

0.00 to 9.99

―

Value depending on the rated inverter *2

A-13

A-14

A-15

A-16

A-17

―

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase minus side)

Motor_primary_ resistance

(The SettingBand depends on the rated inverter) *2

Value depending on the

Unit

Hz

Hz kW r/min

Pole

Hz

― kHz

―

µ sec m

V

A

Ω

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

―

×

―

×

×

－ 100 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data rated inverter *2

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

＊ 1: When the rated motor voltage is larger than 190 V [200 V class] or 380 V [400 V class], the maximum value in the SettingBand becomes larger proportional to that voltage.

＊ 2: As shown in the table below, the Initialized data of <A-11> through <A-17> and the SettingBand of

<A-17> depend on the inverter model.

Initialized data of <A-11> through <A-17> and SettingBand of <A-17>

Initialized data SettingBand

Inverter model

<A-11> to

<A-16>

<A-17> <A-17>

Inverter model

Initialized data

<A-11> to

<A-16>

<A-17>

2R222

3R722

4.00

4.00

626

469.9

1 to 65535

0. to

6553.5

2R244

3R744

4.00

4.00

2566

1880

5R522

7R522

4.00

4.00

228.8

186.8

5R544

7R544

4.00

4.00

915

747.3

1122

1522

2222

3022

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

94.0

76.6

34.00

25.80

0.01 to

655.35

1144

1544

2244

3044

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

376.0

306.2

136.0

103.2

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

15022

18022

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

20.10

15.40

10.80

7.00

5.30

2.812

1.743

0.001 to

65.535

3744

4544

5544

7544

11044

16044

20044

25044

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

80.4

61.50

43.30

28.00

14.60

7.80

6.20

4.92

31544

40044

50044

60044

75044

100044

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

2.80

3.33

2.633

1.782

1.206

0.820

0.645

SettingBand

<A-17>

1 to

65535

0.1 to

6553.5

0.01 to

655.35

0.001 to

65.535

－ 101 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area b (setting area for operation mode and operation sequence)

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item b-00 b-01 b-02 b-03 b-04 b-05 b-06 b-07 b-08 b-09 b-10 b-11 b-12

Setting_data_ rewrite_protection

Stop_mode_ selection

OFF: None

ON: Setting data rewrite protection

0: Free stop

1: Deceleration stop

2: Deceleration stop with DC brake

0.0 to 30.0

0.0 to 10.0

Stop_frequency

DC_brake_ operation_time

―

JOG_stop_mode_ selection

JOG_stop_ frequency

Instantaneous_ power_interruption_ restart

Reverse_ prohibition_mode_ selection

Command_input_ when_coupled

Frequency_ command_input_ selection

―

0: Free stop

1: Deceleration stop

2: Deceleration stop with DC brake

0.0 to 10.0

OFF: Not restart

ON: Restart

0: Normal

1: Reverse prohibition against command

2: Reverse prohibition

0: Terminal block

1: Console

2: Digital communication option

0: Interlocked

1: Analog input (1) terminal [AIN1]

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

4: Analog input (2) or digital communication option terminal

[AIN2]

5: Digital setting input option

6: Analog input (3) terminal [AIN3]

7: Internal PLC

0: Interlocked Operation_ command_input_ selection

JOG-command_ 1: Terminal block

Initialized data

OFF

1

1.0

0.0

―

0

1.0

OFF

0

1

0

0

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

―

Hz sec

―

―

Hz

―

―

―

―

―

○

○

○

―

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

－ 102 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area b (setting area for operation mode and operation sequence)

Display Setting item input_selection b-13 b-14 b-15 b-16 b-17 b-18 b-19 b-20 b-21

SettingBand or selecting item

Powering_torque_ limit

Regenerative_ torque_limit

Powering_torque_ limit_usage_ selection

Regenerative_ torque_limit_ usage_selection

Analog_frequency_ command_ characteristic_ selection

Analog_frequency_ command_upper_ limit_frequency

Analog_frequency_ command_lower_ limit_frequency

Analog_input_

ZeroLimit_voltage

Analog_output(1)_ characteristics_ selection

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

0 to 150

(The SettingBand changes from 0 to up to

200 % depending on the motor)

-150 to 0

(The SettingBand changes from -200 to up to 0 % depending on the motor)

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

0: 0 to ±10 V

1: 0 to 10 V

2: 4 to 20 mA

Absolute value of Analog_frequency_ command_lower_limit_frequency to 100.0

-Analog_frequency_command_upper_ limit_frequency to +Analog_frequency_ command_upper_limit_frequency

0.000 to 1.000

0: Output voltage

1: Output current

2: Output torque

3: Frequency

4: Frequency command

5: Internal PLC output

6: Calibration

7: Monitor for adjustment

-1: 6F frequency

-2: 6F speed

-3: 6F calibration

Initialized data

150

-150

ON:

1

100.0

0.0

0.000

1

Unit

%

%

―

―

%

%

V

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

×

×

○

○

○

×

－ 103 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area S (inverter control method selection, Autotuning)

Display

S-00

S-01

Setting item

Special_mode_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

1: Initialize the inverter

2: Change the inverter control method

3: Clear protections

4: Switch the simple mode and full mode

12: Direct Current Mode Autotuning

(forward)

13: Direct Current Mode Autotuning

(reverse)

99: Initialize the inverter (for special adjustment) *

101: Data transfer to <SET66EX-Z>

102: Copy data from <SET66EX-Z>

(without area A)

103: Copy data from <SET66EX-Z>

(with area A)

104: Compare data with <SET66EX-Z>

1: Clear the Cumulative_operation_ timer(1)

Initialized data

―

―

S-02

Cumulative_ operation_timer(1)_ clear

Cumulative_ operation_timer(2)_ clear

1: Clear the Cumulative_operation_ timer(2)

―

＊ This is for special adjustment only. Do not use it usually.

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

―

―

○

○

－ 104 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.1.2 Induction Motor Vector Control

Basic setting area

Display

0.SrEF

Setting item

Speed_command

SettingBand

-Maximum_speed <A-00> to

+Maximum_speed <A-00>

Minimum_speed <A-01> to 300 1.FJoG

Forward_JOG_ speed

2.rJoG

Reverse_JOG_ speed

3.Acc1

Acceleration_time

(1)

4.dEc1

Deceleration_time

(1)

5.Acc2

Acceleration_time

(2)

6.dEc2

Deceleration_time

(2)

7.ASrP

Speed_control_ proportion_gain(1)

8.ASrI

Speed_control_ integral_time_ constant(1)

9.ASrJ

System_inertia_ moment(1)

-300 to -Minimum_speed <A-01>

0.0 to 3600.0

0.0 to 3600.0

1 to 50

20 to 10000

0 to 65535

Initialized data

0

Unit r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○

24

-24

30.0

0.3

15

40

10 r/min r/min sec sec

― msec gm 2

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

A-00

A-01

A-02

A-03

A-04

A-05

A-06

A-07

Maximum_speed

Minimum_speed

300 to 14700

0 or 12 (value depending on the setting of to

Maximum_speed

*2 )

Value depending on the inverter *3 to

Rated capacity of the inverter *1

Rated_motor_ capacity

Rated_motor_ voltage

[200 V class] 70 to 230

[400 V class] 140 to 460

20 to 150 % of the rated inverter current Rated_motor_ current

Rated_motor_speed 20 to 100 % of Maximum_speed

Number_of_motor_ pole

2 to 12

Rated_motor_ (Rated speed x Number of poles/120) to

1800

12

0.00

0

0.00

0

4

0.0

Unit r/min r/min kW

V

A r/min

Pole

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

－ 105 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

A-08 frequency

Number_of_PGpulse

(Rated speed x Number of poles/120 + 7.0)

60 to 32767 600

A-09

A-10

PWM_carrier_ frequency

PG_selection

1.0 to 6.0

6.0

0

A-11

0: S mode drive without sensor

1: V mode with PG (A,B phase input) drive

0.00 to 9.99

0.00

A-12

A-13

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase plus side)

A-14

A-15

A-16

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase minus side)

A-17

A-18

A-19

A-20

A-21

A-22

Motor_primary_ resistance

Motor_secondary_ resistance

Motor_leakage_ inductance

Motor_mutual_ inductance

Motor_inductance_ saturation_ coefficient(1)

Motor_inductance_ saturation_

(The SettingBand depends on the inverter capacity) *3

(The SettingBand depends on the inverter capacity) *3

0.0 to 50.0

0.0

*4

0.0

*4

0.0

Unit

P/R kHz

―

µsec m Ω mH

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

－ 106 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

A-23

A-24

A-25 coefficient(2)

Motor_core_loss_ torque_ compensation

Motor_loss_ coefficient(1)

Motor_loss_ coefficient(2)

0.0 to 20.0

0.0 to 200.0

0.0

0.0

Unit

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

＊ 1: When the rated motor voltage is larger than 190 V [200 V class] or 380 V [400 V class], the maximum value in the SettingBand becomes larger proportional to that voltage.

＊ 2: The minimum value in the SettingBand of <A-01> becomes "12" when "0" (S mode) is set to <A-10>, and "0" when "1" (V mode) is set to <A-10>.

＊ 3: As shown in the tables below, the minimum value in the SettingBand of <A-02>, the SettingBand of

<A-17> and <A-18>, and the SettingBand of <A-19> and <A-20> depend on the inverter model.

＊ 4: For Initialized data of <A-17> through <A-20>, the position of its decimal point depends on the inverter capacity.

Minimum value in SettingBand of <A-02>

Inverter model <A-02> Inverter model

2R222

3R722

0.75

1.10

2R244

3R744

5R522

7R522

1122

1522

1.50

2.20

3.70

5.50

5R544

7R544

1144

1544

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

15022

18022

7.50

11.00

15.00

22.0

30.0

37.0

45.0

55.0

75.0

2244

3044

3744

4544

5544

7544

11044

16044

20044

25044

31544

40044

50044

60044

<A-02>

0.75

1.10

1.50

2.20

3.70

5.50

7.50

11.00

15.00

22.0

30.0

37.0

45.0

55.0

75.0

110.0

160.0

200.0

250.0

315.0

－ 107 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Minimum value in SettingBand of <A-02>

Inverter model <A-02> Inverter model

75044

100044

SettingBand of <A-17> through <A-20>

Inverter model

<A-17>

<A-18>

<A-19>

<A-20>

2R222

3R722

5R522

7R522

1 to 65535

0.1 to 6553.5

0.1 to 3276.7

0.01 to 327.67

1122

1522

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

15022

18022

0.01 to 655.35

0.001 to 65.535

0.001 to 32.767

2244

3044

3744

4544

5544

7544

11044

16044

Inverter model

2R244

3R744

5R544

7R544

1144

1544

20044

25044

31544

40044

50044

60044

75044

100044

<A-02>

400.0

500.0

<A-17>

<A-18>

1 to 65535

0.1 to 6553.5

0.01 to 655.35

0.001 to 65.535

<A-19>

<A-20>

0.1 to 3276.7

0.01 to 327.67

0.001 to 32.767

－ 108 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area b (setting area for operation mode and operation sequence)

Display b-00 b-01 b-02 b-03 b-04 b-05 b-06 b-07 b-08 b-09 b-10 b-11 b-12

Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Setting_data_ rewrite_protection

Stop_mode_ selection

Command_input_ when_coupled

Speed_command_ input_selection

OFF: None

ON: Setting data rewrite protection

0: Free stop

1: Deceleration stop

2: Deceleration stop with DC brake

0 to 300

0.0 to 10.0

Stop_speed

DC_brake_ operation_time

DC_brake_gain

JOG_stop_mode_ selection

JOG_stop_speed

Instantaneous_ power_interruption_ restart

Reverse_ prohibition_mode_ selection

20.0 to 500.0

0: Free stop

1: Deceleration stop

2: Deceleration stop with DC brake

0 to 300

OFF: Not restart

ON: Restart

0: Normal

1: Reverse prohibition against command

2: Reverse prohibition

0: Terminal block

1: Console

2: Digital communication option

0: Interlocked

1: Analog input (1) terminal [AIN1]

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

4: Analog input (2) <IO66-Z> or digital communication option terminal

[AIN2]

5: Digital setting input option

<BCD66-Z>

6: Analog input (3) <IO66-Z> terminal

[AIN3]

7: Internal PLC

0: Interlocked Operation_ command_input_ selection

JOG-command_ 1: Terminal block

Initialized data

OFF

1

30

0.0

100.0

0

30

OFF

0

1

0

0

Unit

―

― r/min sec

%

― r/min

―

―

―

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

－ 109 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area b (setting area for operation mode and operation sequence)

Display Setting item b-13 b-14 b-15 b-16 b-17 b-18 b-19 b-20 b-21

SettingBand or selecting item input_selection

Forward_powering_ torque_limit

Forward_ regenerative_ torque_limit

Reverse_ powering_torque_ limit

Reverse_ regenerative_ torque_limit

Analog_speed_ command_ characteristic_ selection

Analog_speed_ command_upper_ limit_speed

Analog_speed_ command_lower_ limit_speed

Analog_input_

ZeroLimit_voltage

Analog_output(1)_ characteristics_ selection

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

0 to Value depending on the Rated_motor_ current <A-04> *1

Value depending on -Rated_motor_current

<A-04> *1 to 0

Value depending on -Rated_motor_current

<A-04> *1 to 0

0 to Value depending on the Rated_motor_ current <A-04> *1

0: 0 to ±10 V

1: 0 to 10 V

2: 4 to 20 mA

Absolute value of Analog_speed_ command_lower_limit_speed <b-19> to

100.0

-Analog_speed_command_upper_limit_ speed <b-18> to +Analog_speed_ command_upper_limit_speed <b-18>

0.000 to 1.000

0: Output voltage

1: Output current

2: Torque command

3: Speed

4: Speed command

5: Internal PLC output

6: Calibration

7: Monitor for adjustment

-1: 6F frequency

-2: 6F speed

-3: 6F calibration

Initialized data

150

-150

-150

150

1

100.0

0.0

0.000

1

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

%

%

%

%

―

%

%

V

―

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

×

＊ 1: The maximum (minimum) value of torque limit is calculated for VF66B-2R222 through 5522 and 2R244 through 5544 as follows:

200 x (Rated inverter current)/Rated_motor_current <A-04>

(However, when the calculated value exceeds 200 %, it should be 200 %)

－ 110 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

It is calculated for VF66B-7522 through 18022 and 7544 through 100044 as follows:

150 x (Rated inverter current)/Rated_motor_current <A-04>

(However, when the calculated value exceeds 200 %, it should be 200 %)

Area S (inverter control method selection, Autotuning)

Display

S-00

S-01

Setting item

Special_mode_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

1: Initialize the inverter

2: Change the inverter control method

3: Clear protections

4: Switch the simple mode and full mode

10: Full Mode Autotuning (forward)

11: Full Mode Autotuning (reverse)

12: Direct Current Mode Autotuning

(forward)

13: Direct Current Mode Autotuning

(reverse)

99: Initialize the inverter (for special adjustment) *

101: Data transfer to <SET66EX-Z>

102: Copy data from <SET66EX-Z>

(without area A)

103: Copy data from <SET66EX-Z>

(with area A)

104: Compare data with <SET66EX-Z>

1: Clear the Cumulative_operation_ timer(1)

Initialized data

―

―

S-02

Cumulative_ operation_timer(1)_ clear

Cumulative_ operation_timer(2)_ clear

1: Clear the Cumulative_operation_ timer(2)

―

Unit

―

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

＊ This is for special adjustment only. Do not use it usually.

－ 111 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.1.3 ED Motor Vector Control

Basic setting area

Display

0.SrEF

Setting item

Speed_command

SettingBand

-Maximum_speed <A-00> to

+Maximum_speed <A-00>

Minimum_speed <A-01> to 300 1.FJoG

Forward_JOG_ speed

2.rJoG

Reverse_JOG_ speed

3.Acc1

Acceleration_time

(1)

4.dEc1

Deceleration_time

(1)

5.Acc2

Acceleration_time

(2)

6.dEc2

Deceleration_time

(2)

7.ASrP

Speed_control_ proportion_gain(1)

8.ASrI

Speed_control_ integral_time_ constant(1)

9.ASrJ

System_inertia_ moment(1)

-300 to -Minimum_speed <A-01>

0.0 to 3600.0

0.0 to 3600.0

1 to 50

20 to 10000

0 to 65535

Initialized data

0

Unit r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○

24

-24

30.0

r/min r/min sec

○

○

○

0.3

sec ○

15

40

― msec

○

○

10 gm 2 ○

－ 112 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

A-00

A-01

A-02

A-03

A-04

A-05

A-06

A-07

Maximum_speed

Minimum_speed

Rated_motor_ capacity

Rated_motor_ voltage

300 to 20000

0 to Maximum_speed <A-00>

Value depending on the inverter *2 to

150 % of the rated capacity of the inverter

[200 V class] 70 to 230

[400 V class] 140 to 460

20 to 150 % of the rated inverter current Rated_motor_ current

Rated_motor_speed 20 to 100 % of Maximum_speed <A-00>

Number_of_motor_ pole

2 to 64

Motor_q-axis_ pulse_pole_ determination_ current

0 to 200 (ratio to the rated motor current)

(It is always unchangeable in the P mode)

*1

1800

0

0.00

0

0.0

0

6

50

A-08

A-09

A-10

Number_of_PGpulse *3

PWM_carrier_ frequency

PG_selection

60 to 32767 *4

1.0 to 6.0

600

6.0

0

A-11

0: S mode drive without sensor

1: V mode with PG (A,B,Z phase input) drive

2: P mode with PG (A,B,U,V,W phase input) drive

3: RL mode with resolver drive

(Resolution 10 bit)

4: RH mode with resolver drive

(Resolution 12 bit)

0.00 to 9.99

0.00

A-12

A-13

A-14

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase minus side)

Unit r/min r/min kW

V

A r/min

Pole

%

P/R kHz

―

µsec

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

－ 113 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

A-15

A-16

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase minus side)

A-17 0.0

*5

A-18

Motor_primary_ resistance

Motor_d-axis_ inductance

(The SettingBand depends on the rated inverter) *2

(The SettingBand depends on the rated inverter) *2

0.0

*5

A-19

A-20

A-21

Motor_q-axis_ inductance

Motor_magnetic_ flux

Motor_core_loss_ torque_ compensation

0.000 to 9.999

0.0 to 0.0

0.000

0.0

A-22

A-23

A-24

Lq-change_rate_ at_30%_motor_qaxis_current

Lq-change_rate_ at_60%_motor_qaxis_current

Lq-change_rate_ at_90%_motor_qaxis_current

-100.0 to 100.0

0.0

A-25

A-26

A-27

A-28

A-29

Lq-change_rate_ at_120%_motor_qaxis_current

Ld-change_rate_ at_30%_motor_daxis_current

Ld-change_rate_ at_60%_motor_daxis_current

Ld-change_rate_ at_90%_motor_daxis_current

Ld-change_rate_ at_120%_motor_daxis_current

-100.0 to 100.0

0.0

Unit

Driving

ReWrite m Ω mH

Wb

%

%

%

×

×

×

×

×

×

－ 114 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display

A-30

Setting item

Motor_d-axis_ position

SettingBand or selecting item

0 to 30000

("-1" indicates that a value is not set)

("0" specified in <A-10> is always unchangeable in the S mode)

Initialized data

-1

A-31 Pole_ determination_ selection

0: Motor q-axis determination by pulse (1)

1: Motor q-axis determination by pulse (2)

0

A-32

2: Motor d-axis determination by pulse

-12.7 to 12.7

0.0

A-33

Motor_d-axis_ measurement_ pulse_width

Motor_d-axis_ measurement_ pulse_voltage_ amplitude

0: 30 %

1: 50 %

2: 75 %

3: 100 %

4: 7 %

5: 9.5 %

6: 12 %

7: 20 %

0

Unit

―

― msec

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

＊ 1: When the rated motor voltage is larger than 190 V [200 V class] or 380 V [400 V class], the maximum value in the SettingBand becomes larger proportional to that voltage.

＊ 2: For the minimum value in the SettingBand of <A-02>, refer to {5.1.2 Induction Motor Vector Control}. For the SettingBand of <A-17>, <A-18>, and <A-19>, refer to the next table.

＊ 3: When "0" (S mode drive without sensor) is set to <A-10>, the Number_of_PG-pulse is not available.

＊ 4: When "3" (RL mode with resolver drive) is set to <A-10>, the maximum value in the SettingBand becomes 256 x (Number of resolver poles).

4: When "4" (RH mode with resolver drive) is set to <A-10>, the maximum value in the SettingBand becomes 256 x (Number of resolver poles) x 4.

＊ 5: For Initialized data of <A-17> through <A-19>, the position of its decimal point depends on the inverter capacity.

－ 115 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

SettingBand of <A-17> through <A-19>

Inverter model

<A-17>

2R222

3R722

1 to 65535

0.1 to 6553.5

<A-18>

<A-19>

0.1 to 3276.7

0.01 to 327.67

5R522

7R522

1122

1522

0.01 to 655.35

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

15022

18022

0.001 to 65.535

0.001 to 32.767

2244

3044

3744

4544

5544

7544

11044

16044

Inverter model

2R244

3R744

5R544

7R544

1144

1544

20044

25044

31544

40044

50044

60044

75044

100044

<A-17>

1 to 65535

0.1 to 6553.5

0.01 to 655.35

0.001 to 65.535

<A-18>

<A-19>

0.1 to 3276.7

0.01 to 327.67

0.001 to 32.767

－ 116 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area b (setting area for operation mode and operation sequence)

Display b-00 b-01 b-02 b-03 b-04 b-05 b-06 b-07 b-08 b-09 b-10 b-11 b-12

Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Setting_data_ rewrite_protection

Stop_mode_ selection

Command_input_ when_coupled

Speed_command_ input_selection

OFF: None

ON: Setting data rewrite protection

0: Free stop

1: Deceleration stop

2: Deceleration stop with DC brake

0 to 300

0.0 to 10.0

Stop_speed

DC_brake_ operation_time

DC_brake_gain

JOG_stop_mode_ selection

JOG_stop_speed

Instantaneous_ power_interruption_ restart

Reverse_ prohibition_mode_ selection

20.0 to 500.0

0: Free stop

1: Deceleration stop

2: Deceleration stop with DC brake

0 to 300

OFF: Not restart

ON: Restart

0: Normal

1: Reverse prohibition against command

2: Reverse prohibition

0: Terminal block

1: Console

2: Digital communication option

0: Interlocked

1: Analog input (1) terminal [AIN1]

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

4: Analog input (2) <IO66-Z> or digital communication option terminal

[AIN2]

5: Digital setting input option

<BCD66-Z>

6: Analog input (3) <IO66-Z> terminal

[AIN3]

7: Internal PLC

0: Interlocked Operation_ command_input_ selection

JOG-command_ 1: Terminal block

Initialized data

OFF

1

30

0.0

100.0

0

30

OFF

0

1

0

0

Unit

―

― r/min sec

%

― r/min

―

―

―

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

－ 117 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area b (setting area for operation mode and operation sequence)

Display Setting item b-13 b-14 b-15 b-16 b-17 b-18 b-19 b-20 b-21

SettingBand or selecting item input_selection

Forward_powering_ torque_limit

Forward_ regenerative_ torque_limit

Reverse_ powering_torque_ limit

Reverse_ regenerative_ torque_limit

Analog_speed_ command_ characteristic_ selection

Analog_speed_ command_upper_ limit_speed

Analog_speed_ command_lower_ limit_speed

Analog_input_

ZeroLimit_voltage

Analog_output(1)_ characteristics_ selection

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

0 to Value depending on the Rated_motor_ current <A-04> *1

Value depending on -Rated_motor_current

<A-04> *1 to 0

Value depending on -Rated_motor_current

<A-04> *1 to 0

0 to Value depending on the Rated_motor_ current <A-04> *1

0: 0 to ±10 V

1: 0 to 10 V

2: 4 to 20 mA

Absolute value of Analog_speed_ command_lower_limit_speed <b-19> to

100.0

-Analog_speed_command_upper_limit_ speed <b-18> to +Analog_speed_ command_upper_limit_speed <b-18>

0.000 to 1.000

0: Output voltage

1: Output current

2: Torque command

3: Speed

4: Speed command

5: Internal PLC output

6: Calibration

7: Monitor for adjustment

-1: 6F frequency

-2: 6F speed

-3: 6F calibration

Initialized data

150

-150

-150

150

1

100.0

0.0

0.000

1

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

%

%

%

%

―

%

%

V

―

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

×

＊ 1: The maximum (minimum) value of torque limit is calculated for VF66B-2R222 through 5522 and 2R244 through 5544 as follows:

200 x (Rated inverter current)/Rated_motor_current <A-04>

(However, when the calculated value exceeds 200 %, it should be 200 %)

－ 118 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

It is calculated for VF66B-7522 through 18022 and 7544 through 100044 as follows:

150 x (Rated inverter current)/Rated_motor_current <A-04>

(However, when the calculated value exceeds 200 %, it should be 200 %)

Area S (inverter control method selection, Autotuning)

Display

S-00

S-01

S-02

Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Special_mode_ selection

Cumulative_ operation_timer(1)_ clear

Cumulative_ operation_timer(2)_ clear

1: Initialize the inverter

2: Change the inverter mode

3: Clear protections

4: Switch the simple mode and full mode

10: Full Mode Autotuning (forward)

12: Full Mode Autotuning (reverse)

12: Direct Current Mode Autotuning

(forward)

13: Direct Current Mode Autotuning

(reverse)

14: Motor D-axis Measurement Mode

Autotuning (forward)

15: Motor D-axis Measurement Mode

Autotuning (reverse)

16 to 19: For special adjustment *

20: Motor D-axis Measurement

Second Mode Autotuning (forward)

21: Motor D-axis Measurement

Second Mode Autotuning (reverse)

99: Initialize the inverter (for special adjustment) *

101: Data transfer to <SET66EX-Z>

102: Copy data from <SET66EX-Z>

(without area A)

103: Copy data from <SET66EX-Z>

(with area A)

104: Compare data with <SET66EX-Z>

1: Clear the Cumulative_operation_ timer(1)

1: Clear the Cumulative_operation_ timer(2)

Initialized data

―

―

―

Unit

―

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

＊ This is for special adjustment only. Do not use it usually.

－ 119 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.2 List of Parameters in Full Mode

The table below lists a mapping of the seven-segment display and the setting items on the console in the full mode.

For details of each parameter, refer to another manual "Parameter List."

Basic setting area

Display [V/f]

0.FrEF Frequency_ command

1.

FJoG

Forward_JOG_ frequency

2.rJoG Reverse_JOG_ frequency

3.Acc1 Acceleration_time

(1)

4.dEc1 Deceleration_time

(1)

Display [IM]

0.SrEF Speed_command

1.

FJoG

Forward_JOG_speed

2.rJoG Reverse_JOG_speed

3.Acc1 Acceleration_time(1)

4.dEc1 Deceleration_time(1)

Display [EDM]

0.SrEF Speed_command

1.

FJoG

Forward_JOG_speed

2.rJoG Reverse_JOG_speed

3.Acc1 Acceleration_time(1)

4.dEc1 Deceleration_time(1)

5.Acc2 Acceleration_time

(2)

6.dEc2 Deceleration_time

(2)

5.Acc2 Acceleration_time(2)

6.dEc2 Deceleration_time(2)

5.Acc2 Acceleration_time(2)

6.dEc2 Deceleration_time(2)

7.tbSt

Torque_boost_ amount

7.

ASrP

Speed_control_proportion_ gain(1)

7.

ASrP

Speed_control_proportion_ gain(1)

8.dcbr DC_brake_voltage 8.ASrI Speed_control_integral_ time_constant(1)

8.ASrI Speed_control_integral_ time_constant(1)

9.Stb

Stabilizer_amount 9.ASrJ System_inertia_moment(1) 9.ASrJ System_inertia_moment(1)

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency/maximum speed, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display [V/f] [IM] [EDM]

A-00

A-01

Maximum_frequency

Minimum_frequency

Maximum_speed

Minimum_speed

A-02

A-03

A-04

A-05

A-06

A-07

Rated_motor_capacity

Rated_motor_voltage

Rated_motor_current

Rated_motor_speed

Number_of_motor_pole

Rated_motor_frequency Motor_q-axis_pulse_pole_ determination_current

A-08

A-09

A-10

A-11

― Number_of_PG-pulse

PWM_carrier_frequency

― PG_selection

DeadTime_compensation(U/T1_phase plus side)

－ 120 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area A (setting area for maximum frequency/maximum speed, rated motor, and other parameters)

Display [V/f] [IM] [EDM]

A-12

A-13

DeadTime_compensation(U/T1_phase minus side)

DeadTime_compensation(V/T2_phase plus side)

A-14

A-15

A-16

A-17

DeadTime_compensation(V/T2_phase minus side)

DeadTime_compensation(W/T3_phase plus side)

DeadTime_compensation(W/T3_phase minus side)

Motor_primary_resistance

A-18

A-19

A-20

A-21

A-22

A-23

A-24

A-25

A-26

A-27

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

Motor_secondary_resistance Motor_d-axis_inductance

Motor_leakage_inductance

Motor_mutual_inductance

Motor_inductance_saturation_ coefficient(1)

Motor_inductance_saturation_ coefficient(2)

Motor_core_loss_torque_ compensation

Motor_loss_coefficient(1)

Motor_loss_coefficient(2)

―

―

Motor_q-axis_inductance

Motor_magnetic_flux

Motor_core_loss_torque_ compensation

Lq-change_rate_at_30%_ motor_q-axis_current

Lq-change_rate_at_60%_ motor_q-axis_current

Lq-change_rate_at_90%_ motor_q-axis_current

Lq-change_rate_at_120%_ motor_q-axis_current

Ld-change_rate_at_30%_ motor_d-axis_current

Ld-change_rate_at_60%_ motor_d-axis_current

A-28

A-29

A-30

A-31

A-32

A-33

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

Ld-change_rate_at_90%_ motor_d-axis_current

Ld-change_rate_at_120%_ motor_d-axis_current

Motor_d-axis_position

Pole_determination_selection

Motor_d-axis_measurement_ pulse_width

Motor_d-axis_measurement_ pulse_voltage_amplitude

Area b (setting area for operation mode and operation sequence)

Display [V/f] [IM] b-00 b-01

Setting_data_rewrite_protection

Stop_mode_selection b-02 b-03

Stop_frequency

DC_brake_operation_time

Stop_speed

[EDM]

－ 121 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters b-11 b-12 b-13 b-14 b-15

Area b (setting area for operation mode and operation sequence)

Display [V/f] [IM] b-04 b-05

― DC_brake_gain b-06 b-07

JOG_stop_mode_selection

JOG_stop_frequency JOG_stop_speed

Instantaneous_power_interruption_restart b-08 b-09 b-10

Reverse_prohibition_mode_selection

Command_input_when_coupled

Frequency_command_input_ selection

[EDM]

Speed_command_input_selection b-16 b-17 b-18

Operation_command_input_selection

JOG-command_input_selection

Powering_torque_limit

Regenerative_torque_limit

Powering_torque_limit_ usage_selection

Regenerative_torque_limit_ usage_selection

Analog_frequency_command_ characteristic_selection

Analog_frequency_command_ upper_limit_frequency

Forward_powering_torque_limit

Forward_regenerative_torque_limit

Reverse_powering_torque_limit

Reverse_regenerative_torque_limit

Analog_speed_command_characteristic_selection

Analog_speed_command_upper_limit_speed b-19 b-20 b-21

Analog_frequency_command_ lower_limit_frequency

Analog_speed_command_lower_limit_speed

Analog_input_ZeroLimit_voltage

Analog_output(1)_characteristics_selection

Area c (setting area for parameters related to multifunction input)

Display [V/f] [IM] c-00 c-01 to c-17

Multifunction_input_place_selection

Multifunction_input_terminal(1) through (17)_function_selection

[EDM]

Area d (setting area for acceleration or deceleration time, frequency/speed jump functions, and MRH functions)

Display d-00

[V/f] [IM]

Acceleration/Deceleration_time_selection

[EDM] d-01 d-02 d-03 d-04

JOG_acceleration/deceleration_time_selection

Acceleration_time(3)

Deceleration_time(3)

Acceleration_time(4)

－ 122 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters d-22 to d-25 d-26 d-27 d-28 d-29 d-30 d-31 d-32 d-10 d-11 d-12 d-13 d-14 d-15 to d-21

Area d (setting area for acceleration or deceleration time, frequency/speed jump functions, and MRH functions)

Display d-05

[V/f]

Deceleration_time(4)

[IM] [EDM] d-06 d-07 d-08 d-09

S-pattern_acceleration/deceleration_usage_selection

S-pattern_rise_time(1)

S-pattern_acceleration_reach_time(1)

S-pattern_fall_time(1)

S-pattern_deceleration_reach_time(1)

S-pattern_rise_time(2)

S-pattern_acceleration_reach_time(2)

S-pattern_fall_time(2)

S-pattern_deceleration_reach_time(2)

Preset_frequency(1) through

(7)

Preset_speed(1) through (7)

Jump_frequency(1) through (4) Jump_speed(1) through (4)

Jump_frequency_width

MRH_function_usage_selection

Jump_speed_width

MRH_upper_limit_frequency

MRH_lower_limit_frequency

―

―

―

MRH_upper_limit_speed

MRH_lower_limit_speed

Speed_deviation_limiting_command_selection

Maximum_deviation(positive)

Maximum_deviation(negative)

E-05

E-06

E-07

E-08

E-09

E-10

E-11

Area E (setting area for frequency characteristics, torque limit, torque command characteristics, and speed control)

Display

E-00

[V/f] [IM]

Regeneration_stall_prevention_function_usage_selection

[EDM]

E-01

E-02

E-03

E-04

Regeneration_stall_prevention_voltage

Start_mode_selection

Forward_direction_change

Simulation_mode

High-efficient_mode_usage_selection

Autoboost_mode

Restart_delay_time

V/f_pattern_selection

Voltage_at_turnoff_point

Frequency_at_turnoff_point

―

―

Torque_command_mode_selection

Flux_reinforcing_rate_at_start

Current_control_proportion_gain

Current_control_integral_gain(1)

Restart_prohibition_time

Current_control_integral_gain(2)

Motor_temperature_compensation

Flux_command Free_start_maximum_speed

－ 123 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area E (setting area for frequency characteristics, torque limit, torque command characteristics, and speed control)

Display

E-12

[V/f]

―

[IM]

Motor_cooling_fan

(sensor-less_drive)

[EDM]

Inverter_output_maximum_ voltage

F-13

F-14

F-15 to

F-26

F-27

F-28

F-29

F-30

F-31

F-32

Area F (setting area for built-in dynamic brake (DB) operation, protection functions, and traceback)

Display [V/f] [IM] [EDM]

F-00

F-01

Built-in_DB(DynamicBrake)_operation_level

Forward_overfrequency_ protection_setting

Forward_overspeed_protection_setting

F-02

F-03

F-04

F-05

F-06

F-07

F-08

F-09 to

F-12

Reverse_overfrequency_ protection_setting

Reverse_overspeed_protection_setting

Overload_protection_setting

Cumulative_operation_timer(1)(Main circuit capacitor life)

Cumulative_operation_timer(2)(Cooling fan life)

Motor_overheat_protection_operation_selection

Protection_relay(86A)_operation_selection_upon_power_failure

Protection_retry_count_setting

External_failure(1) through (4)_detection_delay_time

Traceback_pitch

Traceback_trigger_point

Traceback_CH1 through CH12_selection

―

―

―

―

―

―

Overtorque_protection_function_selection

Overtorque_protect_level_setting

Overtorque_protection_operation_standard_torque

Speed_control_error_function_usage_selection

Speed_control_error_detection_speed_width(positive)

Speed_control_error_detection_speed_width(negative)

Area G (setting area for analog input and output)

Display [V/f] [IM]

G-00

G-01

Temperature_detection_selection

Temperature_detection_offset_adjustment

G-02

G-03

G-04

G-05

Temperature_detection_gain_adjustment

Analog_input(2)_characteristics_selection

Analog_input(2)_upper_limit_ frequency

Analog_input(2)_lower_limit_ frequency

[EDM]

Analog_input(2)_upper_limit_speed

Analog_input(2)_lower_limit_speed

－ 124 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

G-13

G-14

G-15

G-16

G-17

Area G (setting area for analog input and output)

Display [V/f] [IM]

G-06

G-07

Analog_input(3)_characteristics_selection

Analog_input(3)_upper_limit_ frequency

[EDM]

Analog_input(3)_upper_limit_speed

G-08

G-09

G-10

G-11

G-12

Analog_input(3)_lower_limit_ frequency

Analog_input(3)_lower_limit_speed

Analog_output(2)_characteristics_selection

Analog_output(3)_characteristics_selection

Analog_input(4)_characteristics_selection(For expanded options)

Analog_input(5)_characteristics_selection(For expanded options)

Analog_output(4)_characteristics_selection(For expanded options)

Analog_output(5)_characteristics_selection(For expanded options)

Line_speed_monitor_adjustment

Analog_input_monitor_display_selection

Motor_protect_temperature

Area H (setting area for multifunction output)

Display [V/f] [IM]

H-00 to

H-05

Multifunction_output_terminal(1) through (6)_function_selection

H-06

H-07

H-08

H-09

Frequency_detection(1)

Frequency_detection(2)

Frequency_detection_width

Torque_detection(with_polarity)

Speed_detection(1)

Speed_detection(2)

Speed_detection_width

H-10

H-11

H-12

Torque_detection(absolute_value)

Overload_protection_pre-alarm_operation_level_setting

Maximum_frequency_ reduction_rate

Maximum_speed_reduction_rate

[EDM]

Area i (setting area for internal PLC, droop control, and mechanical loss compensation)

Display [V/f] [IM] [EDM] i-00 i-01

PLCL_function_usage_selection

PLCH_function_usage_selection i-02 i-03 i-04

Droop_control_usage_selection

Droop_start_frequency

Droop_rate_changeover_ frequency

Droop_start_speed

Droop_rate_changeover_speed i-05 i-06 i-07

Droop_rate

Droop_start_torque

― Operation_mode_selection

－ 125 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters i-26 i-27 i-28 i-29 i-22 i-23 i-24 i-25 i-30 i-31 i-32 i-18 i-19 i-20 i-21 i-14 i-15 i-16 i-17 i-10 i-11 i-12 i-13

Area i (setting area for internal PLC, droop control, and mechanical loss compensation)

Display [V/f] [IM] [EDM] i-08 i-09

―

―

Torque_command_input_place_selection

Analog_input_torque_command_gain

―

―

―

―

Speed_control_proportion_gain(2)

Speed_control_integral_time_constant(2)

System_inertia_moment(2)

JOG-proportion_gain_selection

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

ASR_cancelation_usage_selection

ASR_feed-forward_usage_selection

Variable_structure_proportion_gain_start_speed

Variable_structure_proportion_gain_minimun_gain_percentage

Initial_excitation_selection

Mechanical_loss_compensation_usage_selection

Mechanical_loss_offset_amount

Gradient_of_mechanical_loss

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

Positioning_speed(0)

Positioning_speed(1)

Positioning_acceleration_time

Positioning_deceleration_time

Creep_speed

Number_of_moving_pulse_within_a_creep_period

Number_of_stop_pulse

Positioning_emergency_stop_selection

Proportion_gain_for_positioning

Integral_time_constant_for_positioning

System_moment_of_inertia_for_positioning

J-02

J-03

J-04

J-05

Area J (setting area for digital communication options)

Display [V/f] [IM]

J-00

J-01

Digital_communication_option_selection

ASYC66-Z/CC66-Z_option_baud_rate

J-06

J-07

OPCN66-Z_option_baud_rate

PBUS66-Z_slave_address

OPCN66-Z_option_input

OPCN66-Z_option_output

(For expanded options)

[EDM]

ASYC66-Z.OPCN66-Z_transmission_selection/

CC66-Z_CC-Link_version ･ number_of_occupied_stations_selection

EIP66-Z_IP_adress_setting (upper_2_bytes)

－ 126 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

J-13

J-14

J-15

J-16

J-17

J-18

J-19

Area J (setting area for digital communication options)

Display

J-08

[V/f] [IM] [EDM]

ASYC66-Z/OPCN66-Z/PBUS66-Z/CC66-Z_Communication_mode_selection

EIP66-Z_IP_adress_setting (lower_2_bytes)

J-09

J-10

J-11

J-12

DNET66-Z_output_instance_number_setting

DNET66-Z_input_instance_number_setting

DNET66-Z_speed_scale_setting

DNET66-Z_monitor_data_number_setting

― HighSpeed_response_input_selection

Date/Time_data_selection_from_communication

Connected_number_of_outside_DB(Dynamic_Brake)_units_VFDB2009

EIP66-Z_Subnet_mask_setting (upper_2_bytes)

EIP66-Z_Subnet_mask_setting (lower_2_bytes)

EIP66-Z_Default_gate_way_setting (upper_2_bytes)

EIP66-Z_Default_gate_way_setting (lower_2_bytes)

L-14

L-15

L-16

L-17

L-18

L-19

L-20

L-21

L-06

L-07

L-08

L-09

L-10

L-11

L-12

L-13

Area L (setting area for input and output gain)

Display [V/f] [IM]

L-00

L-01

Vdc_detection_gain

Analog_input(1)_gain

L-02

L-03

L-04

L-05

Analog_input(1)_offset

Analog_output(1)_gain

Analog_output(1)_offset

Analog_input(2)_gain

Analog_input(2)_offset

Analog_input(3)_gain

Analog_input(3)_offset

Analog_output(2)_gain

Analog_output(2)_offset

Analog output (3) terminal

Analog_output(3)_offset

Analog_input(4)_gain

Analog_input(4)_offset

Analog_input(5)_gain

Analog_input(5)_offset

Analog_output(4)_gain

Analog_output(4)_offset

Analog_output(5)_gain

Analog_output(5)_offset

Inverter_operation_mode_monitor

[EDM]

－ 127 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Area n (monitor adjustment area)

Display [V/f] n-00 n-01 n-02

Inverter_control_mode

Capacity/Voltage_class

―

[IM] [EDM]

Decimal_point_position_in_revolutions_display

Area o (special adjustment area)

Display o-00

[V/f] [IM]

Special_adjustment_analog_output_address_H o-01 o-02

Special_adjustment_analog_output_address_L

Special_adjustment_SET66-Z_output_address_H o-03 o-04 to o-53

Special_adjustment_SET66-Z_output_address_L

― ―

[EDM]

―

Area P (setting area for internal PLC and P register)

Display [V/f] [IM]

P-00 to

P-99

P-register_setting

[EDM]

S-06

S-07

S-08

S-09

S-10

S-11

S-12

S-13

Area S (setting area for mode selection and analog input/output adjustment)

Display [V/f] [IM] [EDM]

S-00

S-01

Special_mode_selection

Cumulative_operation_timer(1)_clear

S-02

S-03

S-04

S-05

Cumulative_operation_timer(2)_clear

Vdc_adjustment

ROM_rewrite_switch

―

S-14

S-15

S-16

S-17

Analog_input(1)_adjustment

Analog_output(1)_adjustment

Analog_input(2)_adjustment

Analog_output(2)_adjustment

Analog_input(3)_adjustment

Analog_output(3)_adjustment

Analog_input(4)_adjustment

Analog_output(4)_adjustment

Analog_input(5)_adjustment

Analog_output(5)_adjustment

Special adjustment

Changing_parameter_upon_power_suppply_from_control_power_terminal_[MR]/[MT]

－ 128 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.3 Detailed Explanation of Parameters

5.3.1 Basic Setting Area

In the basic setting area, the common-used basic setting items to operate the inverter are shown below.

In this area, you can set frequency/operating speed and adjust normal acceleration or deceleration time from the console.

■ <0.FrEF>/<0.SrEF>, <1.FJoG>, <2.rJoG>

[V/f] Operating frequency setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

0.FrEF

Frequency_ command

1.FJoG

Forward_JOG_ frequency

2.rJoG

Reverse_JOG_ frequency

-Maximum_frequency <A-00> to

+Maximum_frequency <A-00>

Minimum_frequency <A-01> to 30.0

-30.0 to -Minimum_frequency <A-01>

Frequency_command <0.FrEF>

Set the frequency at which you operate the inverter from the console.

Parameter setting is effective in the following cases:

Initialized data

0.5

1.0

-1.0

Unit

Hz

Hz

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

・ When you select "1" (console) in the Command_input_when_coupled <b-09> and select "0" (interlocked) in the Frequency_command_input_selection <b-10>

・ When you select "2" (console) in the Frequency_command_input_selection <b-10>

Forward_JOG_frequency <1.FJoG>

Reverse_JOG_frequency <2.rJoG>

Set the forward or reverse jog frequency.

[IM] [EDM] Operating speed setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

0.SrEF

Speed_command -Maximum_speed <A-00> to

+Maximum_speed <A-00>

Minimum_speed <A-01> to 300 1.FJoG

Forward_JOG_ speed

2.rJoG

Reverse_JOG_ speed

-300 to -Minimum_speed <A-01>

Speed_command <0.SrEF>

Set the speed at which you operate the inverter from the console.

Parameter setting is effective in the following cases:

Initialized data

0

24

-24

Unit r/min r/min r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

・ When you select "1" (console) in the Command_input_when_coupled <b-09> and select "0" (interlocked) in the Speed_command_input_selection <b-10>

・ When you select "2" (console) in the Speed_command_input_selection <b-10>

Forward_JOG_speed <1.FJoG>

Reverse_JOG_speed <2.rJoG>

－ 129 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Set the forward or reverse jog speed.

■ <3.Acc1>, <4.dEc1>, <5.Acc2>, <6.dEc2>

Acceleration or deceleration time setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

0.0 to 3600.0

3.Acc1

Acceleration_time

(1)

4.dEc1

Deceleration_time

(1)

5.Acc2

Acceleration_time

(2)

6.dEc2

Deceleration_time

(2)

0.0 to 3600.0

Initialized data

30.0

Unit sec

Driving

ReWrite

○

0.3

sec ○

Acceleration_time(1) and Deceleration_time(1) <3.Acc1><4.dEc1>

Acceleration_time(2) and Deceleration_time(2) <5.Acc2><6.dEc2>

Set the acceleration time from 0 to the Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed <A-00> and the deceleration time from the Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed <A-00> to 0.

The inverter provides four types of acceleration time and deceleration time, and they can be switched by multifunction input with settings or from outside.

In the default setting, the Acceleration_time(1) and Deceleration_time(1) <3.Acc1><4.dEc1> are for normal operation, and the Acceleration_time(2) and Deceleration_time(2) <5.Acc2><6.dEc2> are for jog operation.

Possible to set four types of acceleration and deceleration time

For the Acceleration_time(3)/Deceleration_time(3) and Acceleration_time(4)/Deceleration_time(4) which are not described in this section, you can set them in the parameters <d-02> through <d-05> of the area d.

■ [V/f] <7.tbSt>, <8.dcbr>, <9.Stb>

[V/f] Torque boost amount setting

Display Contents

7.tbSt

Torque_boost_ amount

SettingBand or selecting item

0.0 to 20.0

Torque_boost_amount <7.tbSt>

Set the manual boost voltage as a ratio to the Rated_motor_ voltage <A-03>.

When torque is not sufficient at start, you can make starting torque higher by setting a larger value to this parameter to increase current at start.

This function not available when the auto boost is selected.

Also refer to the boost_mode_selection <E-05> and the

V/f_pattern_selection <E-07>.

Initialized data

0.0

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

－ 130 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[V/f] DC brake amount setting

Display

8.dcbr

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

DC_brake_voltage 0.0 to 20.0

Initialized data

0.0

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

DC_brake_voltage <8.dcbr>

Set the DC brake voltage as a ratio to the Rated_motor_voltage <A-03>. You can increase DC brake amount by setting a larger value to this parameter.

However, excessive current flow may cause the overload protection. Also refer to the DC_brake_operation_ time <b-03>.

[V/f] Stabilizer (stabilization adjustment) setting

Display Contents

9.Stb

Stabilizer_amount

SettingBand or selecting item

0.0 to 100.0

Initialized data

0.0

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

Stabilizer_amount <9.Stb>

If the motor rotates unsteadily, you can stabilize it by adjusting this parameter.

Operate the motor at frequency which it rotates unsteadily, and gradually increase the stabilizer amount until it rotates steadily. Note that excessive amount will cause rotation of the motor to be unstable.

■ [IM] [EDM] <7.ASrP>, <8.ASri>, <9.ASrJ>

[IM] [EDM] Speed control gain setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

15

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

○ 7.ASrP

Speed_control_ proportion_gain(1)

8.ASri

Speed_control_ integral_time_ constant(1)

9.ASrJ

System_inertia_ moment(1)

1 to 50

20 to 10000

0 to 65535

40

10

― msec gm 2

In the vector control of the inverter, you can control speed with the MFC control which combines the feed forward with the cancellation using the disturbance torque observer.

○

○

Speed_control_proportion_gain(1) <7.ASrP>

Set the speed control proportion gain.

Speed_control_integral_time_constant(1) <8.ASri>

Set the speed control integral gain equivalent with a filter time constant.

System_inertia_moment(1) <9.ASrJ>

Set the inertia moment used for speed control cancellation and feed forward in gm 2 . Typically, input 20 to 100

% of a value where inertia moment of the motor itself is added to a load inertia moment value converted to the motor shaft.

In case of the gear rattle caused by large gear backlash or the belt vibration connected motor and load, take the following measures:

・ Set a smaller value.

・ Change the settings of the ASR_cancelation_usage_selection <i-14> and the ASR_feed-forward_usage_

－ 131 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters selection <i-15>. Not use the cancellation and feed forward.

Speed control block

5.3.2 Area A (Setting Area for Maximum Frequency/Maximum Speed, Rated Motor, and

Other Parameters)

In the area A, set the motor parameters required for control by the inverter.

Before operating the inverter, be sure to set each parameter for your motor and system.

Autotuning of area A parameters

<A-11> and subsequent parameters are automatically set by Autotuning.

Before operating the inverter, perform Autotuning with your motor. For how to perform Autotuning, refer to

{4.3 Autotuning of Parameters (Automatic Setting)}.

■ <A-00>, <A-01>

[V/f] Motor maximum and minimum frequency setting

Display Contents

A-00

A-01

Maximum_ frequency

SettingBand or selecting item

15.0 to 400.0

Minimum_frequency 0.0 to 10.0

Initialized data

60.0

Unit

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

×

0.5

Hz ○

Maximum_frequency <A-00>

Set the maximum frequency (absolute value) at which the motor operates. The inverter controls frequency, considering this value as 100 % (standard). Set a value more than or equal to the rated frequency for your motor.

Minimum_frequency <A-01>

－ 132 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Set the minimum frequency (absolute value) at which the motor operates. When the frequency command is less than or equal to this setting value, the inverter limits frequency to this setting value.

When "Minimum frequency start" is selected in the Start_mode_selection <E-02>, the output frequency starts at the frequency specified in <A-01>.

[IM] [EDM] Motor maximum and minimum speed setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

1800

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

× A-00

A-01

Maximum_speed

Minimum_speed

[IM] 300 to 14700

[EDM] 300 to 20000

[IM] 0 or 12

(Depending on the setting of the PG_ selection <A-10>) to

Maximum_speed <A-00>

[EDM] 0 to Maximum_speed <A-00>

12 r/min r/min ○

0

Maximum_speed <A-00>

Set the maximum speed (absolute value) at which the motor operates. The inverter controls speed, considering this value as 100 % (standard).

The above table lists the maximum value which can be set in the inverter. However, in reality it should be set to a value to meet the following requirements according to the rating of your motor. When using the speed less than or equal to the rated motor speed, set a value of the rated motor speed.

・ [IM]

(1) One to four times the rated speed of your motor.

(2) 400 Hz or less when speed is converted to frequency. For instance, when the number of motor poles is four and six, it should be 12000 r/min or less and 8000 r/min or less, respectively.

・ [EDM]

(1) One to 1.33 times the rated speed of your motor.

(2) 400 Hz or less when speed is converted to frequency. For instance, when the number of motor poles is six, it should be 8000 r/min or less.

Minimum_speed <A-01>

Set the minimum speed (absolute value) at which the motor operates. For speed control, even when you input a speed command below this speed as an absolute value, it will be limited to this setting value.

When the motor operates in the torque control mode with the Operation_mode_selection <i-07>, the setting of

<A-01> is not available.

Minimum value of minimum speed in [IM]

The minimum value (unit: r/min) in the setting band of the Minimum_speed <A-01> depends on the

PG_selection <A-10>.

When <A-10> is "0," the minimum value is "12." When <A-10> is "1," it is "0."

－ 133 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ [V/f] [IM] <A-02> through <A-07>, [EDM] <A-02> through <A-06>

Set the values of the motor nameplate.

[V/f] Motor nameplate value setting

Display Contents

A-02

A-03

A-04

A-05

A-06

A-07

Rated_motor_ capacity

Rated_motor_ voltage

SettingBand or selecting item

0 to Rated capacity of the inverter *

[200 V class] 70 to 230

[400 V class] 140 to 460

20 to 150 % of the rated inverter current Rated_motor_ current

Rated_motor_speed 400 to 24000

Number_of_motor_ pole

2 to 12

Rated_motor_ frequency

15.0 to Maximum_frequency <A-00>

Initialized data

Inverter rating

200

400

Inverter rating

1760

4

60.0

Unit kW

V

A r/min

Pole

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

×

×

[IM] Motor nameplate value setting

Display Contents

A-02

A-03

A-04

A-05

A-06

A-07

Rated_motor_ capacity

Rated_motor_ voltage

SettingBand or selecting item

Value depending on the inverter to Rated capacity of the inverter *

[200 V class] 70 to 230

[400 V class] 140 to 460

20 to 150 % of the rated inverter current Rated_motor_ current

Rated_motor_speed 20 to 100 % of Maximum_speed <A-00>

Number_of_motor_ pole

2 to 12

Rated_motor_ frequency

(Rated speed x Number of poles/120) to

(Rated speed x Number of poles/120 + 7.0)

Initialized data

0.00

0

0.00

0

4

0.0

Unit kW

V

A r/min

Pole

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

×

×

[EDM] Motor nameplate value setting

Display

A-02

A-03

A-04

A-05

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Rated_motor_ capacity

Rated_motor_ voltage

Value depending on the inverter to 150 % of rated capacity of the inverter *

[200 V class] 70 to 230

[400 V class] 140 to 460

Rated_motor_ current

20 to 150 % of the rated inverter current

Rated_motor_speed 20 to 100 % of Maximum_speed <A-00>

Initialized data

0.00

0

0.00

0

Unit kW

V

A r/min

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

－ 134 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[EDM] Motor nameplate value setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

A-06 Number_of_motor_ pole

2 to 64

Initialized data

6

Unit

Pole

Driving

ReWrite

×

＊ The maximum value in the setting band becomes larger proportional to the rated motor voltage when it is larger than 190 V [200 V class] or 380 V [400 V class].

[IM] [EDM] For the minimum value in the setting band of <A-02>, refer to {5.1.2 Induction Motor Vector

Control} (it is common to both [IM] and [EDM]).

Rated_motor_capacity <A-02>

Rated_motor_voltage <A-03>

Rated_motor_current <A-04>

Rated_motor_speed <A-05>

Number_of_motor_pole <A-06>

Rated_motor_frequency <A-07> for [V/f] and [IM] only

In <A-02> through <A-07> (through <A-06> for [EDM]), set the each rated value described in the motor nameplate or the data sheet.

Before performing Autotuning, be sure to set these values because they are used during operation and Autotuning.

Set each value described in the motor nameplate or the data sheet as shown in the figure to the right.

For the motor that has two types of rated voltage and rated current, set a larger value within the speed range in the

Rated_motor_voltage <A-03> and the Rated_motor_current

<A-04>.

・ [V/f]

V/f characteristics mean the condition where the output voltage becomes the Rated_motor_voltage

<A-03> when the output frequency is equal to the Rated_motor_frequency <A-07>. When the output frequency is more than or equal to the Rated_motor_frequency <A-07>, the output voltage becomes constant in the Rated_motor_voltage <A-03>.

・ [IM] [EDM]

When using the motor until the constant output (power constant) range, set the base speed in the

Rated_motor_speed <A-05>. When the speed is slower than or equal to the Rated_motor_speed <A-05>, the torque constant control area is used. When the speed is faster than or equal to the Rated_motor_ speed <A-05>, the power constant control area is used.

■ [EDM] <A-07>

[EDM] Motor q-axis pulse pole determination current

Display Contents

A-07 Motor_q-axis_ pulse_pole_ determination_ current

SettingBand or selecting item

0 to 200 (ratio to the rated motor current)

Initialized data

50

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

－ 135 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Motor_q-axis_pulse_pole_determination_current <A-07>

When the Pole_determination_selection <A-31> is set to "Motor q-axis pulse pole determination," apply the current specified in this parameter to determine the pole direction at start using [EDM].

When the Pole_determination_selection <A-31> is set to "Motor d-axis pulse pole determination," this setting is not used.

■ [IM] [EDM] <A-08>

[IM] [EDM] Number of PG-pulse setting

Display Contents

A-08 Number_of_PGpulse

SettingBand or selecting item

60 to 32767

Initialized data

600

Unit

P/R

Driving

ReWrite

×

Number_of_PG-pulse <A-08>

When using PG as a speed sensor in [IM] or as a position and speed sensor in [EDM], set the pulse number of PG directly connected to your motor shaft in the Number_of_PG-pulse <A-08>.

In the speed vector control without sensor or the position and speed vector control without sensor, the setting of <A-08> is ignored.

・ [EDM]

When "3" (RL mode) is selected in the PG_selection <A-10>, the maximum value in the setting band is

256 x (Number of resolver poles).

When "4" (RH mode) is selected in the PG_selection <A-10>, the maximum value in the setting band is

256 x (Number of resolver poles) x 4.

■ <A-09>

PWM carrier frequency setting

Display

A-09

Contents

PWM_carrier_ frequency

SettingBand or selecting item

[V/f] 1.0 to 6.0

[IM] [EDM] 1.0 to 6.0

Initialized data

2.0

6.0

PWM_carrier_frequency <A-09>

This indicates the modulating carrier frequency of the inverter voltage output PWM.

Unit kHz

Driving

ReWrite

×

・ [IM] [EDM]

Since the torque control cycle needs to be synchronized with the PWM carrier frequency, changing the

PWM carrier frequency will change control characteristics.

Especially, when the PWM carrier frequency is set to less than 2 kHz, the torque control cycle is delayed, which may cause characteristics to be worse. Typically, use it at a frequency of 6.0 kHz.

－ 136 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ [IM] [EDM] <A-10>

[IM] [EDM] PG selection

Display

A-10

Contents

PG_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

[IM]

0: S mode drive without sensor

1: V mode with PG (A,B phase input) drive

[EDM]

0: S mode drive without sensor

1: V mode with PG (A,B,Z phase input) drive

2: P mode with PG (A,B,U,V,W phase input) drive

3: RL mode with resolver drive

(Resolution 10 bit)

4: RH mode with resolver drive

(Resolution 12 bit)

Initialized data

0

0

Unit

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

PG_selection <A-10>

Select whether or not PG is used.

In the default setting, "0" (S mode) drive without sensor, or "Without PG," is selected.

To perform drive with PG, you need the PG input board <PG66-Z> or a separate optional board.When using

<PG66-Z>, turn on the switch [SW2] on the <PG66-Z> with a pair of tweezers or a tool whose tip is very short in length (about 0.8 mm). For an optional board, refer to the optional "Instruction Manual."

・ [EDM]

When selecting drive with PG, typically select "2" (P mode) drive with PG (ABUVW phase input).

"1" (V mode) drive with PG (ABZ phase input) is a special mode.

To perform drive with the resolver, you need an optional board.

■ <A-11> through <A-29>

These parameters are set by Autotuning. They include settings of deadtime compensation of IGBT inside the inverter, motor primary resistance, and others.

Autotuning of area A parameters

<A-11> and subsequent parameters are automatically set by Autotuning. You do not have to set them manually.

Before operating the inverter, perform Autotuning with your motor. For how to perform Autotuning, refer to

{4.3 Autotuning of Parameters (Automatic Setting)}.

－ 137 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[V/f] Autotuning setting parameters

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

A-11

A-12

A-13

A-14

A-15

A-16

A-17

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase minus side)

Motor_primary_ resistance

0.00 to 9.99

Depending on the rated inverter (refer to another table * )

Initialized data

(Refer to another table * )

Unit

μ sec

Driving

ReWrite

×

(Refer to another table * ) m Ω ×

＊ For the initialized data of the <A-11> through <A-17> depending on the inverter model and the setting band of <A-17>, refer to {5.1.1 V/f Control}.

DeadTime_compensation <A-11> through <A-16>

In <A-11> through <A-16>, set the deadtime compensation of IGBT for each phase inside the inverter to accurately calculate output voltage used for control operation.

Deadtime compensation settings for a total of six elements (plus side and minus side for each U/T1, V/T2, and

W/T3 phase) are provided.

Motor_primary_resistance <A-17>

In <A-17>, set (motor primary resistance) + (wiring resistance from inverter to motor).

In the factory default setting, a typical value is provided depending on the inverter capacity. Although you can operate the inverter with the initialized data, you should perform Autotuning for more accurate operation.

－ 138 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[IM] [EDM] Autotuning setting parameters (deadtime compensation of IGBT inside the inverter)

Display

A-11

Contents

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase plus side)

SettingBand or selecting item

0.00 to 9.99

Initialized data

0.00

Unit

μ sec

A-12

A-13

DeadTime_ compensation(U/

T1_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase plus side)

A-14

A-15

A-16

DeadTime_ compensation(V/

T2_phase minus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase plus side)

DeadTime_ compensation(W/

T3_phase minus side)

Driving

ReWrite

×

DeadTime_compensation <A-11> through <A-16>

In <A-11> through <A-16>, set the deadtime compensation of IGBT for each phase inside the inverter to accurately calculate output voltage used for control operation.

Deadtime compensation settings for a total of six elements (plus side and minus side for each U/T1, V/T2, and

W/T3 phase) are provided.

－ 139 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[IM] Autotuning setting parameters (motor electric constant)

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

A-17

A-18

A-19

A-20

A-21

A-22

A-23

A-24

A-25

Motor_primary_ resistance

Motor_secondary_ resistance

Motor_leakage_ inductance

Motor_mutual_ inductance

Motor_inductance_ saturation_ coefficient(1)

Motor_inductance_ saturation_ coefficient(2)

Motor_core_loss_ torque_ compensation

Motor_loss_ coefficient(1)

Motor_loss_ coefficient(2)

(The setting band depends on the inverter capacity.

*2 )

(The setting band depends on the inverter capacity.

*2 )

0.0 to 50.0

0.0 to 20.0

0.0 to 200.0

Initialized data

0.0

0.0

*1

*1

0.0

0.0

0.0

Unit m Ω mH

%

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

×

＊ 1: The decimal point position of the initialized data depends on the inverter capacity.

＊ 2: For the setting band of <A-17> through <A-20>, refer to {5.1.2 Induction Motor Vector Control}.

Motor_primary_resistance <A-17>

Set (Motor primary resistance) + (Wiring resistance from inverter to motor).

You can set the optimal value by performing Autotuning.

<A-17> is set by the Full Mode Autotuning or the Direct Current Mode Autotuning.

Since the vector mode requires a correct value for <A-11> to <A-17>, you should always perform one of

Autotuning.

If the wiring length is significantly changed after Autotuning, perform Autotuning again.

Motor_secondary_resistance <A-18>

Set the value where the motor secondary resistance (= rotor resistance) is converted on the primary side.

When you cannot perform Autotuning and the value from the motor data sheet is set manually, set a value converted to 25 ℃ .

Motor_leakage_inductance <A-19>

Set the motor leakage inductance.

When you cannot perform Autotuning and a value from the motor data sheet is set manually, set the average of the primary side leakage inductance and the secondary side leakage inductance (converted value on the primary side).

Motor_mutual_inductance <A-20>

Set the motor mutual inductance.

Inductance is saturated by magnetic flux. Here, set the inductance value at rated magnetic flux.

Motor_inductance_saturation_coefficient(1) <A-21>, Motor_inductance_saturation_coefficient(2) <A-22>

These indicate a compensation coefficient which corrects mutual inductance saturation.

－ 140 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

You set the rate of increase in % to the Motor_mutual_inductance <A-20> where the magnetic flux reaches 90

% or 70 % of the rated magnetic flux.

Motor_core_loss_torque_compensation <A-23>

Set the core loss torque compensation in the motor.

Motor_loss_coefficient(1) <A-24>, Motor_loss_coefficient(2) <A-25>

These are a coefficient which indicates electrical or mechanical loss measured by Autotuning.

Since these parameters are not used for controlling, you do not need to set them manually.

[EDM] Autotuning setting parameters (motor electric constant)

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

A-17

A-18

A-19

A-20

A-21

A-22

A-23

A-24

A-25

A-26

A-27

A-28

A-29

Motor_primary_ resistance

Motor_d-axis_ inductance

Motor_q-axis_ inductance

Motor_magnetic_ flux

Motor_core_loss_ torque_ compensation

Lq-change_rate_ at_30%_motor_qaxis_current

Lq-change_rate_ at_60%_motor_qaxis_current

Lq-change_rate_ at_90%_motor_qaxis_current

Lq-change_rate_ at_120%_motor_qaxis_current

Ld-change_rate_ at_30%_motor_daxis_current

Ld-change_rate_ at_60%_motor_daxis_current

Ld-change_rate_ at_90%_motor_daxis_current

Ld-change_rate_ at_120%_motor_daxis_current

(The setting band depends on the inverter capacity.

*2 )

(The setting band depends on the inverter capacity.

*2 )

0.000 to 9.999

0.0 to 20.0

-100.0 to 100.0

-100.0 to 100.0

Initialized data

0.0

0.0

*1

*1

0.000

0.0

0.0

0.0

Unit m Ω mH

Wb

%

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

×

×

－ 141 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

＊ 1: The decimal point position of the initialized data depends on the inverter capacity.

＊ 2: For the setting band of <A-17> through <A-19>, refer to {5.1.3 ED Motor Vector Control}.

Motor_primary_resistance <A-17>

Set (Motor primary resistance) + (Wiring resistance from inverter to motor).

You can set the optimal value by performing Autotuning.

<A-17> is set by the Full Mode Autotuning or the Direct Current Mode Autotuning.

Since the vector mode requires a correct value for <A-11> to <A-17>, you should always perform one of

Autotuning.

If the wiring length is significantly changed after Autotuning, perform it again.

Motor_d-axis_inductance <A-18>, Motor_q-axis_inductance <A-19>

Set the motor d-axis inductance and motor q-axis inductance.

These parameters are set by the Full Mode Autotuning.

Motor_magnetic_flux <A-20>

Set the interlinkage magnetic flux to the primary winding of the permanent magnet embedded in the rotor of the ED motor.

This parameter is set by the Full Mode Autotuning.

Motor_core_loss_torque_compensation <A-21>

Set the core loss torque compensation in the ED motor.

This parameter is set by the Full Mode Autotuning.

Lq-change_rate <A-22> through <A-25>, Ld-change_rate <A-26> through <A-29>

In <A-22> through <A-29>, set the change rate (correction factor) of motor d-axis or q-axis inductance at 30

%, 60 %, 90 %, or 120 % current.

Calculate the actual inductance from the Motor_d-axis_inductance <A-18>, the Motor_q-axis_inductance

<A-19>, and these setting values, and then perform control operation.

This parameter is set by the Full Mode Autotuning.

■ [EDM] <A-30>

[EDM] Motor d-axis position setting

Display Contents

A-30 Motor_d-axis_ position

SettingBand or selecting item

0 to 30000

Initialized data

-1

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Motor_d-axis_position <A-30>

For PG, set the angle from the reference position angle to the position angle of the magnetic pole of the magnet embedded in the rotor as PG-pulse count number.

For the resolver, set the position angle of the magnetic pole of the magnet as an absolute position.

This parameter is set by the Full Mode Autotuning when the PG_selection <A-10> is set to "2" (P mode) or "1"

(V mode).

・ Even when you perform Autotuning with the PG_selection <A-10> set to "0" (S mode), this parameter is not set.

・ A value of "-1" in the Motor_d-axis_position <A-30> indicates that the initialized data remains unset.

・ When switching the PG_selection <A-10> to "2" (P mode) or "1" (V mode) and starting the inverter without performing Autotuning, the protection will operate to stop the inverter.

Even if the model of the motor is the same, its value depends on the setting angle of PG or the resolver. Be sure to set a value after performing Autotuning for each motor.

Also, when changing the wiring of the inverter output terminals [U/T1, V/T2, W/T3] and reversing the motor, you need to perform Autotuning again.

－ 142 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ [EDM] <A-31> through <A-33>

[EDM] Pole determination setting

Display

A-31

A-32

Contents

Pole_ determination_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: Motor q-axis pulse pole determination

(1)

1: Motor q-axis pulse pole determination

(2)

2: Motor d-axis pulse pole determination

-12.7 to 12.7

Initialized data

0

0.0

A-33

Motor_d-axis_ measurement_ pulse_width

Motor_d-axis_ measurement_ pulse_voltage_ amplitude

0: 30 %

1: 50 %

2: 75 %

3: 100 %

4: 7 %

5: 9.5 %

6: 12 %

7: 20 %

0

Unit

― msec

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

The following determination settings are performed by Autotuning:

・ Pole direction determination by Autotuning in the Motor D-axis Measurement Mode

・ Pole determination when the PG_selection <A-10> is set to "0" (S mode) drive without sensor (without PG)

・ Pole determination at start without sensor during the initial operation after power-on when the PG_selection

<A-10> is set to "1" (V mode)

Pole_determination_selection <A-31>

[EDM] of the inverter provides two types of pole determination selections: "Motor d-axis pulse pole determination" and "Motor q-axis pulse pole determination."

Performing the Full Mode Autotuning will automatically set the pole determination suited for your motor characteristics to be applied to <A-31>.

Differences between the Motor q-axis pulse pole determination (1) and the Motor q-axis pulse pole determination (2) are conditions determined when the Full Mode Autotuning is performed. The motor q-axis pulse pole determination is used for operation in both ways.

Motor_d-axis_measurement_pulse_width <A-32>

Set the pulse time width in the motor d-axis pulse pole determination. A negative value indicates that a determined pole has a negative characteristic.

This parameter is set by the Full Mode Autotuning.

Motor_d-axis_measurement_voltage_amplitude <A-33>

Set the pulse voltage amplitude in the motor d-axis pulse pole determination.

This parameter is set by the Full Mode Autotuning.

< Motor d-axis pulse pole determination setting>

When the Pole_determination_selection <A-31> is set to "Motor d-axis pole determination" by Autotuning:

・ The settings of the Motor_d-axis_measurement_pulse_width <A-32> and the Motor_d-axis_measurement_ pulse_voltage_amplitude <A-33> will be enabled.

< Motor q-axis pulse pole determination setting>

When the Pole_determination_selection <A-31> is set to "Motor q-axis pole determination (1)" or "Motor

－ 143 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters q-axis pole determination (2)" by Autotuning and also the PG_selection <A-10> is set to "0" (S mode) start without sensor or "1" (V mode) initial start without sensor after power-on:

・ The setting of the Motor_q-axis_pulse_pole_determination_current <A-07> will be enabled.

・ This setting is not used by Autotuning in the Motor D-axis Measurement Mode.

・ In the Motor_q-axis_pulse_pole_determination_current <A-07>, set the command value of the motor q-axis pulse current as a ratio to the rated motor current.

Typically, it should be 50 % of the initialized data. If "Sensor-less start error (SLSE)" protection operates at start depending on load conditions, you should adjust this setting to a large degree.

However, note that increasing a value too much will cause a large shock at start.

About start in the ED motor vector control

● You can switch the setting of the Pole_determination_selection <A-31> manually.

However, when switching it manually, the inverter might determine the pole incorrectly, which can output torque in a direction opposite to the commanding direction.

In principle, do not change a value set by Autotuning.

● In the motor q-axis pulse pole determination, the rotor may rotate a few degrees at start. Note that it cannot be used in the system where this reverse behavior may cause any problem.

－ 144 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.3.3 Area b (Setting Area for Operation Mode and Operation Sequence)

In area b, set the parameters related to the operation mode or stop mode of the inverter and operation sequence.

■ <b-00>

Setting data rewrite protection setting

Display Contents b-00 Setting_data_ rewrite_protection

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Without protection

ON: With protection

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Setting_data_rewrite_protection <b-00>

When <b-00> is set to "ON," you cannot change data from the console or in other ways.

When you want to change the setting value of the parameter, select this as "OFF."

When you try to rewrite data with <b-00> set to "ON," "PrtCt" appears in the seven-segment display on the console.

■ <b-01> through <b-06>

Stop mode setting

Display b-01 b-02 b-03 b-04 b-05 b-06

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Stop_mode_ selection

0: Free stop

1: Deceleration stop

2: Deceleration stop with DC brake

[V/f] Stop_frequency 0.0 to 30.0

0 to 300 [IM] [EDM]

Stop_speed

DC_brake_ operation_time

[V/f] -

0.0 to 10.0

―

[IM] [EDM]

DC_brake_gain

JOG_stop_mode_ selection

20.0 to 500.0

(Rated excitation current = 100 %)

0: Free stop

1: Deceleration stop

2: Deceleration stop with DC brake

0.0 to 10.0

[V/f] JOG_stop_ frequency

[IM] [EDM]

JOG_stop_speed

0 to 300

Initialized data

1

1.0

30

0.0

―

100.0

0

1.0

30

Unit

―

Hz r/min sec

―

%

―

Hz r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

―

○

○

○

In the Stop_mode_selection <b-01> and the JOG_stop_mode_selection <b-05>, select a behavior when turning off an operation or jog command.

For [IM] and [EDM], when the Operation_mode_selection <i-07> is not "0" (speed control mode), free stop always occurs regardless of the settings of <b-01> and <b-05>. In the JOG_stop_speed <b-06>, set the speed at JOG stop.

－ 145 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Differences among these stop modes are as follows:

Free stop

Turning off an operation or JOG command will cause the inverter to stop voltage output.

Deceleration stop

The inverter gradually decelerates according to the deceleration time until it reaches the settings of the Stop_frequency/Stop_ speed <b-02> and the JOG_stop_frequency/JOG_stop_speed

<b-06>, and then it stops voltage output.

Deceleration stop with DC brake

The inverter gradually decelerates according to the deceleration time until it reaches the speed specified in the Stop_frequency/

Stop_speed <b-02> and the JOG_stop_frequency/JOG_stop_ speed <b-06>, and then it puts on the DC brake for the amount of time specified in the DC_brake_operation_time <b-03>.

・ [V/f]

You can adjust current at DC brake with the DC_brake_voltage

<8.dcbr> in the basic setting area.

・ [IM] [EDM]

You can set current at DC brake with the DC_brake_gain <b-04>.

About free run in the ED motor vector control

● Since the ED motor has the permanent magnet embedded in the rotor, it generates voltage proportional to speed even in the free run condition.

● In the area where generated voltage is higher than direct current voltage of the inverter (for example, running in the constant output (power constant) area), the inverter continues to control and to generate voltage until it reaches the speed where generated voltage is lower than direct current voltage even when free stop is selected.

● When you use the constant output (power constant) area and want to immediately stop output voltage with the operation turned off, put the main circuit contactor (52M) between the motor and the inverter to operate it with a relay contact [52MA].

－ 146 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <b-07>

Instantaneous power interruption restart behavior setting

Display Contents b-07 Instantaneous_ power_interruption_ restart

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Not restart

ON: Restart

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Instantaneous_power_interruption_restart <b-07>

Select whether or not restarting the inverter after restoring power when instantaneous power interruption occurs and the operation is temporarily stopped.

Instantaneous power interruption means that direct current voltage becomes the specified value or less and then returns to the specified value or more without control power failure.

・ "OFF": The inverter does not restart even after the power is restored.

It remains to be stopped.

To restart it, you need to turn off the operation or JOG command and turn it on.

・ "ON": The inverter automatically restarts after the power is restored.

However, when it operates from the contact signal or the digital communication option command, the operation command to the inverter should be kept "ON."

After the inverter stops, when you cannot restart it with the operation command kept "ON," the start traffic protection (StrF) will operate.

About instantaneous power interruption restart

● When the Instantaneous_power_interruption_restart <b-07> is set to "ON," the motor automatically restarts after detecting instantaneous power interruption and restoring power. Therefore, do not come close to the motor while instantaneous power interruption is being detected.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

■ <b-08>

Reverse prohibition mode setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item b-08 Reverse_ prohibition_mode_ selection

0: Normal

1: Reverse prohibition against command

2: Reverse prohibition

Reverse_prohibition_mode_selection <b-08>

Set the reverse prohibition.

Initialized data

0

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

・ Normal <b-08>: "0"

It indicates the normal operation and does not have limitations of forward and reverse operations.

・ Reverse prohibition against command <b-08>: "1"

It prohibits the opposite direction to the operation command at inverter start.

Once the inverter starts, the opposite direction to the command at start is prohibited until it stops. Even when you switch the forward start and the reverse start command after start, the direction does not change

－ 147 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters unless the inverter stops.

Positive frequency/speed command

Start in the forward operation

Start in the reverse operation

Forward operation

Reverse operation

Negative frequency/speed command

Limited to the positive minimum frequency

Limited to the negative minimum frequency

・ Reverse operation prohibition <b-08>: "2"

It prohibits the reverse operation of the motor regardless of the direction of the operation command. Here,

"forward operation" means the rotation direction where the phase sequence of the inverter output voltage is U/T1, V/T2, and then W/T3.

The frequency/speed command of the reverse direction is limited to the positive minimum frequency/speed.

■ <b-09> through <b-12>

Frequency/speed, operation, JOG command input selection

Display b-09 b-10 b-11

Contents

Command_input_ when_coupled

Frequency_ command_input_ selection/Speed_ command_input_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: Terminal block

1: Console

2: Digital communication option

0: Interlocked

1: Analog input (1) terminal [AIN1]

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

4: Analog input (2) <IO66-Z> or digital communication option terminal

[AIN2]

5: Digital setting input option

<BCD66-Z>

6: Analog input (3) <IO66-Z> terminal

[AIN3]

7: Internal PLC

0: Interlocked

Initialized data

1

0

0 b-12

Operation_ command_input_ selection

JOG-command_ input_selection

1: Terminal block

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

Unit

―

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

Select frequency/speed, operation, and JOG command input.

You can also set these input places collectively with the Command_input_when_coupled <b-09>.

The table below lists the input place for each command with a combination of the settings of <b-09> through

<b-12>.

－ 148 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Frequency_ command_ input_ selection/

Speed_ command_ input_ selection

<b-10>

Operation command

<b-11>

JOG command

<b-12>

0: Interlocked

Speed_command_input_selection <b-09>

0: Terminal block 1: Console

Control board

<VFC66-Z> terminal

[AIN1]

<0.FrEF>/<0.SrEF> setting

Control board <VFC66-Z> terminal [AIN1]

2: Digital communication option

Speed command by communication

1: Terminal

[AIN1]

2: Console

3: Digital communication option

<0.FrEF>/<0.SrEF> setting

Command by communication

4: Analog input

(2) optional board terminal

[AIN2]

5: Digital setting input option

<IO66-Z> and others

<BCD66-Z>

6: Analog input

(3) optional board terminal

[AIN3]

<IO66-Z>

7: Internal PLC Internal PLC

0: Interlocked Set the control board

<VFC66-Z>, the control input terminal

[ST-F], and the multifunction input terminal to the start command (reverse)

Console [START]

[FOR/REV] key

Operation command by communication

1: Terminal block Set the control board <VFC66-Z>, the control input terminal [ST-F], and the multifunction input terminal to the start command (reverse)

2: Console Console [START] [FOR/REV] key

Operation command by communication 3: Digital communication option

0: Interlocked Set the control board

<VFC66-Z> and the multifunction input terminal to the JOG command (forward),

(reverse)

Console [JOG/ ]

[FOR/REV] key

JOG command by communication

1: Terminal block Set the control board <VFC66-Z> and the multifunction input terminal to the JOG command (forward), (reverse)

2: Console Console [JOG/ ] [FOR/REV] key

－ 149 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Speed_command_input_selection <b-09>

0: Terminal block 1: Console 2: Digital communication option

3: Digital communication option

JOG command by communication

・ [V/f]

When the frequency command is set to the terminal block, you can switch input characteristics (0 to ±10 V voltage input, 0 to +10 V voltage input, 4 to 20 mA current input) with the Analog_speed_command_ characteristic_selection <b-17>.

In the factory default setting, 0 to ±10 V voltage input is selected.

・ [IM] [EDM]

When the speed command is set to the terminal block, you can switch input characteristics (0 to ±10 V voltage input, 0 to +10 V voltage input, 4 to 20 mA current input) with the Analog_speed_command_ characteristic_selection <b-17>.

In the factory default setting, 0 to ±10 V voltage input is selected.

Using control input terminal [ST-F]

● When you turn on the power or perform protection reset with signals input in the control input terminal

[ST-F], the motor suddenly restarts. After checking that no signal is input in the control input terminal [ST-F], turn on the power or perform protection reset.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

■ <b-13> through <b-16>

[V/f] Torque limiter setting

Display Contents b-13 b-14

Powering_torque_ limit

Regenerative_ torque_limit

SettingBand or selecting item

0 to 150

-150 to 0

Initialized data

150

-150

Unit

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

Powering_torque_limit <b-13>

Regenerative_torque_limit <b-14>

Set the powering and regenerative torque limit values. When the torque command exceeds these values, it is limited to this setting value.

The maximum (minimum) value in the setting band changes within the range of up to 200 % (-200 %) according to the rated current of your motor. When using the motor suited for the inverter capacity, it should be typically set to up to 150 % (-150 %).

[V/f] Torque limiter usage selection

Display Contents b-15 Powering_torque_ limit_usage_

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Unused

Initialized data

ON

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

－ 150 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[V/f] Torque limiter usage selection

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item b-16 selection

Regenerative_ torque_limit_ usage_selection

ON: Used

Initialized data

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

Powering_torque_limit_usage_selection <b-15>

Regenerative_torque_limit_usage_selection <b-16>

When <b-15> or <b-16> is set to "ON," powering or regenerative torque is limited.

In this case, when values specified in the Powering_torque_limit <b-13> and the Regenerative_torque_limit

<b-14> exceed the torque limit value, the output torque is limited to these setting values.

[IM] [EDM] Torque limiter setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

150

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

○ b-13 b-14 b-15 b-16

Forward_powering_ torque_limit

Forward_ regenerative_ torque_limit

Reverse_ powering_torque_ limit

Reverse_ regenerative_ torque_limit

0 to Value depending on the Rated_motor_ current <A-04>

Value depending on -Rated_motor_current

<A-04> to 0

Value depending on -Rated_motor_current

<A-04> to 0

0 to Value depending on the Rated_motor_ current <A-04>

-150

-150

150

%

%

%

%

○

○

○

Forward_powering_torque_limit <b-13>

Forward_regenerative_torque_limit <b-14>

Reverse_powering_torque_limit <b-15>

Reverse_regenerative_torque_limit <b-16>

For [IM] and [EDM], you can set powering and regenerative torque limit values for each forward and reverse operation. When the torque command exceeds these values, it is limited to this setting value.

The maximum (minimum) value of torque limit is calculated for VF66B-2R222 through 5522 and 2R244 through 5544 as follows:

200 x (Rated inverter current)/Rated_motor_current <A-04>

(However, when the calculated value exceeds 200 %, it should be 200 %).

It is calculated for VF66B-7522 through 18022 and 7544 through 100044 as follows:

150 x (Rated inverter current)/Rated_motor_current <A-04>

(However, when the calculated value exceeds 200 %, it should be 150%).

－ 151 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <b-17> through <b-19>

Analog speed command characteristic setting (control board <VFC66-Z> terminal [AIN1])

Display b-17

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

1 Analog_frequency_ command_ characteristic_ selection/

Analog_speed_ command_ characteristic_ selection

0: 0 to ±10 V (bipolar)

1: 0 to ±10 V (unipolar)

2: 4 to 20 mA b-18 100.0

b-19

Analog_frequency_ command_upper_ limit_frequency/

Analog_speed_ command_upper_ limit_speed

Analog_frequency_ command_lower_ limit_frequency/

Analog_speed_ command_lower_ limit_speed

Absolute value of the Analog_frequency_ command_lower_limit_frequency/Analog_ speed_command_lower_limit_speed

<b-19> to 100.0

-Analog_frequency_command_upper_limit_ frequency/Analog_speed_command_ upper_limit_speed <b-18> to

Analog_frequency_command_upper_limit_ frequency/Analog_speed_command_ upper_limit_speed <b-18>

0.0

Unit

―

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

○

Analog_frequency_command_characteristic_selection/Analog_speed_command_characteristic_ selection <b-17>

Select the frequency/speed command input to the analog input (1) terminal [AIN1] from voltage input (bipolar and unipolar) and current input.

You need to change the setting of the parameter and also the switch [SW1] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ When "2" (4 to 20 mA input) is used in <b-17>: "ON" (terminal block side)

・ When "0" or "1" (voltage input) is used in <b-17>: "OFF" (console side)

Set it to "ON"/"OFF" using the tip of a pair of tweezers or a tool with a narrow tip (about 0.8 mm).

For the position of the switch [SW1], refer to {5.4.5 Analog Input (1) Gain Adjustment (For 4 to 20 mA Input

Characteristic)}.

Analog_frequency_command_upper_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_upper_limit_speed <b-18>

Analog_frequency_command_lower_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19>

Set the value as a ratio to the Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed <A-00>.

For settings of the frequency/speed command place selection, refer to the sections of the Command_input_ when_coupled <b-09> and the Frequency_command_input_selection/Speed_command_input_selection <b-10>.

－ 152 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

◆ When using analog input (1) terminal [AIN1] for frequency/speed command

The characteristics of the frequency/speed command input with analog input (1) are described below.

(1) Voltage input (0 to ± 10 V): when <b-17> is "0"

A negative value of command input voltage will cause the inverter to be reversed.

However, when the inverter operates with the reverse operation command, a positive voltage value will cause it to be reversed and a negative voltage to be forwarded.

For +10 V input, a value specified in the Analog_frequency_command_upper_limit_frequency/Analog_ speed_command_upper_limit_speed <b-18> is applied. For -10 V input, a negative value specified in the

Analog_frequency_command_upper_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_upper_limit_speed

<b-18> is applied. When a negative value smaller than a value specified in the Analog_frequency_ command_lower_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19> is limited.

When using the negative maximum value, you need to set -100 % to the Analog_frequency_command_ lower_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19>.

When the Minimum_frequency/Minimum_speed <A-01> is not "0," the absolute value is limited so that it is not below this frequency/speed. In this case, around 0 V, a hysteresis characteristic is observed as shown in the figure below.

When the inverter starts in the forward operation, the forward minimum frequency/speed is applied. When it starts in the reverse operation, the reverse minimum frequency/speed is applied.

Selecting voltage input (0 to ±10 V) [left] and Minimum frequency <A-01> hysteresis characteristic around 0 V [right]

(2) Voltage input (0 to 10 V): when <b-17> is "1"

For 0 V input, a value specified in the Analog_frequency_command_lower_limit_frequency/Analog_ speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19> is applied. For 10 V input, a value specified in the Analog_ frequency_command_upper_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_upper_limit_speed <b-18> is applied.

・ Only positive voltage input is enabled. Negative voltage is limited to the Analog_frequency_command_ lower_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19>.

・ When a negative value is set in the Analog_frequency_command_lower_limit_frequency/Analog_ speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19>, the frequency/speed command is "0."

When the Minimum_frequency/Minimum_speed <A-01> is not "0," the absolute value is limited so that it is not below this frequency/speed.

The frequency/speed command is enabled for forward operation only. For reverse operation, use the reverse operation command.

－ 153 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Selecting 0 to 10 V (<b-19> is set to

(3) Current input (4 to 20mA): when <b-17> is "2"

For 4 mA input, a value specified in the Analog_frequency_command_lower_limit_frequency/Analog_ speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19> is applied. For 20 mA input, a value specified in the

Analog_frequency_command_upper_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_upper_limit_speed

<b-18> is applied.

・ Only positive current input is enabled. Negative current is limited to the Analog_frequency_command_ lower_limit_frequency/Analog_speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19>.

・ When a negative value is set in the Analog_frequency_command_lower_limit_frequency/Analog_ speed_command_lower_limit_speed <b-19>, the frequency/speed command is "0."

When the Minimum_frequency/Minimum_speed <A-01> is not "0," the absolute value is limited so that it is not below this frequency/speed.

The frequency/speed command is enabled for forward operation only. For reverse operation, use the reverse operation command.

Selecting 4 to 20 mA (<b-19> is set to

Safety notice

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before connecting terminals.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Close the front cover before turning on the power.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

－ 154 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <b-20>

Analog input zero limit setting

Display Contents b-20 Analog_input_

ZeroLimit_voltage

SettingBand or selecting item

0.000 to 1.000

Initialized data

0.000

Unit

V

Driving

ReWrite

○

Analog_input_ZeroLimit_voltage <b-20>

The command is forcibly set to "0" when the absolute value of the command input voltage into the analog input (1) terminal [AIN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z> is less than or equal to this setting value.

Use it when a value does not become completely zero even if you set 0 V with analog circuit drift.

・ [IM] [EDM]

It is enabled for both speed and torque commands.

■ <b-21>

Analog output (1) characteristic selection (control board <VFC66-Z> terminal [AOT1])

Display b-21

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

1 Analog_output(1)_ characteristic_ selection

0: Output voltage

1: Output current

2: [V/f] Output torque

[IM] [EDM] Torque command

3: Frequency/speed

4: Frequency/speed command

5: Internal PLC output

6: Calibration

7: Monitor for adjustment

-1: 6F frequency

-2: 6F speed

-3: 6F calibration

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Analog_output(1)_characteristic_selection <b-21>

Select analog output (1) data between the terminals [AOT1] and [GND] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

Here, "6F" means a sixfold frequency signal. When "-2" (6F speed) or "-3" (6F calibration) is selected in

<b-21>, a sixfold signal of the frequency conversion value is output. You cannot adjust gain and offset for 6F output.

Analog output and 6F output selected in the Analog_output(1)_characteristic_selection

Selecting items Output voltage/6F output

0 Output voltage [200 V class] 7.5 V/200 V

[400 V class] 7.5 V/400 V

1

2

Output current

Torque command/output torque torque

5 V/rated inverter current

5 V/100 %

－ 155 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Analog output and 6F output selected in the Analog_output(1)_characteristic_selection

Selecting items Output voltage/6F output

3

4

Frequency/speed

Frequency/speed command

(after acceleration and deceleration)

10 V/Maximum_frequency and Maximum_speed <A-00>

10 V/Maximum_frequency and Maximum_speed <A-00>

7

-1

5

6

-2

-3

Internal PLC output

Calibration

Monitor for adjustment

6F frequency

6F speed

6F calibration

5 V/20000 (100 %)

Output 5 V

―

Output a sixfold frequency signal of the output frequency

Output a sixfold frequency signal of the value where speed is converted to frequency

Output a sixfold frequency signal of the value equivalent to the Maximum_frequency and Maximum_speed <A-00>

(Note) For details of PLC output, refer to "Control Block Editor Function Manual."

◆ When 6F output is set in Analog_output(1)_characteristic_selection

You need to change the setting of the parameter and also the switch [SW2] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

Follow the instructions below.

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. Turn the switch [SW2] to 1 (console board side).

・ Use the tip of a pair of tweezers or a tool with a narrow tip

(about 0.8 mm).

4. Close the front cover.

・ When "-2" (motor speed) is selected in <b-21>

The terminals [AOT1] - [GND] output a sixfold frequency signal (6F signal) of the frequency conversion value F shown in the figure below.

The frequency conversion value F is calculated as follows:

F = (Motor speed)/60 x (Number of motor poles)/2 (Hz)

・ When "-3" (calibration) is selected in <b-21>

A sixfold frequency signal is output. It is equivalent to the Maximum_frequency and Maximum_speed

<A-00>.

When using the digital counter type frequency/speed meter, turn the pulse count 1/6.

When using the direct current voltage meter, the average of 6F signal output is shown in the figure below

[right] "Frequency - voltage characteristic." Adjust the meter for this characteristic.

－ 156 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

However, when the frequency conversion value F of the maximum speed exceeds 120 Hz, 1/2 of this characteristic is applied. When it exceeds 240 Hz, 1/4 is applied.

6F signal output waveform (maximum output current 5 mA) [left] and frequency - voltage characteristic (when the frequency conversion value F of the maximum speed is 120 Hz or less) [right]

T1 and T2 in the figure are described below.

T1 = 1 ms (when the frequency conversion value F of the maximum speed is 120 Hz or less)

= 0.5 ms (when the frequency conversion value F of the maximum speed is 240 Hz or less)

= 0.25 ms (when the frequency conversion value F of the maximum speed exceeds 240 Hz)

T2 = 1/(6 x F) where F is output frequency or a frequency conversion value

Safety notice

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before connecting terminals.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before changing the switch.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Close the front cover before turning on the power.

Otherwise, it may result in a risk of electric shock.

－ 157 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.3.4 Area c (setting area for parameters related to multifunction input)

In the area c, you can set parameters related to the multifunction input on the terminal block of the inverter.

■ <c-00> through <c-17>

Display Setting item c-00 c-01 c-02 c-03 c-04 c-05 c-06 c-07 c-08 c-09 c-10 c-11 c-12

Multifunction_ input_place_ selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(1)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(2)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(3)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(4)_ function_selection *3

Multifunction_ input_terminal(5)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(6)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(7)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(8)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(9)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(10)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(11)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(12)_ function_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: Terminal block

1: Digital communication option

0: Preset frequency/Preset speed selection 1

1: Preset frequency/Preset speed selection 2

2: Preset frequency/Preset speed selection 3

3: Acceleration or deceleration time selection 1

4: Acceleration or deceleration time selection 2

5: Frequency/speed UP command

(MRH mode)

6: Frequency/speed DOWN command (MRH mode)

7: Frequency/speed hold

8: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration prohibition

9: Maximum frequency/Maximum speed reduction

10: Droop control disabled

11: [V/f] *1

[IM] [EDM]

Speed/torque control selection

Initialized data

0

29

30

31

32

33

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

Unit

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

－ 158 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Display Setting item c-13 c-14 c-15 c-16 c-17

Multifunction_ input_terminal(13)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(14)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(15)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(16)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ input_terminal(17)_ function_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

12: Forward/reverse operation command selection

13: DC brake command

14: [V/f] -

[IM] [EDM]

Initial excitation command

15: External failure signal 1

(Protection relay [86A] operation)

16: External failure signal 2

(Protection relay [86A] operation)

17: External failure signal 3

(Protection relay [86A] operation)

18: External failure signal 4

(Protection relay [86A] operation)

19: External failure signal 1

(Protection relay [86A] not operated)

20: External failure signal 2

(Protection relay [86A] not operated)

21: External failure signal 3

(Protection relay [86A] not operated)

22: External failure signal 4

(Protection relay [86A] not operated)

23: Traceback external trigger

24: Second setting block selection

25: Emergency stop (Normally close)

26: ― *1

27: Frequency/speed command terminal block selection

28: Start command (forward) *2

29: Start command (reverse) (STARTR)

30: JOG command (forward) (JOGF)

31: JOG command (reverse) (JOGR)

32: Emergency stop （ Normally open)

33: Protection reset (RESET)

34: External signal input 1

35: External signal input 2

36: External signal input 3

Initialized data

7

8

9

10

11

Unit

―

―

―

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

×

×

×

－ 159 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

37: External signal input 4

Initialized data

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

＊ 1: Do not select this item.

＊ 2: Do not select Start command [forward] because it is typically allocated to the control input terminal

[ST-F].

＊ 3: Even when the selecting item (24: Second setting block selection) is set to the Multifunction_input_ terminal(4)_function_selection, the function will not be available.

Multifunction_input_place_selection <c-00>

With "1" (Digital communication option) set to the Multifunction_input_place_selection <c-00>, when values of the Multifunction_input_terminal(1)_function_selection <c-01> through the Multifunction_input_terminal(17)_ function_selection <c-17> are set to "0" (Preset frequency selection 1) through "27" (Frequency command terminal block selection), these functions are controlled by signals from the digital communication option.

Accordingly, the functions of "29" (Start command [reverse]) through "33" (Protection reset) from the terminal block will not be available.

Multifunction_input_terminal(1)_function_selection through Multifunction_input_terminal(5)_function_ selection (<c-01> through <c-05>)

These parameters set the terminals [MI1] through [MI5] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

Multifunction_input_terminal(6)_function_selection through Multifunction_input_terminal(17)_function_ selection (<c-06> through <c-17>)

These parameters set the terminals [MI6] through [MI17] on the optional board.

Priority of digital communication option and internal PLC function

● When the PLCL_function_usage_selection is set to "ON," any setting of the Multifunction_input_place_ selection is ignored.

The multifunction input terminals (1) through (5) ([MI1] through [MI5]) on the control board <VFC66-Z> and the multifunction input terminals (6) through (17) ([MI6] through [MI17]) on the optional board become an input relay terminal of the internal PLC function.

Each function of the multifunction input terminals is controlled by the internal PLC function.

● When the PLCL_function_usage_selection <i-00> is set to "OFF" and the PLCH_function_usage_ selection <i-01> is set to "ON," the multifunction input terminal (4) [MI4] is set to "32" (Emergency stop

（ Normally open)), regardless of the setting of the Multifunction_input_terminal(4)_function_selection <c-04>.

Examples of connection of multifunction input terminals (1) through (5)

－ 160 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

The above figures show typical connection examples of the multifunction input signals. The maximum permitted voltage is 24 V, and the maximum permitted current per terminal is 3 mA.

You can select source mode or sync mode for the multifunction input signals. Also, you can select internal or external power supply of the inverter for each mode.

・ In the initial state, the source mode is selected.

・ You can switch from the source mode to the sync mode (and vice versa) by changing the position of the jumper socket [CN-SO] and [CN-SI] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

Safety notice

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before connecting terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Close the front cover before turning on the power.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before handling the jumper.

It may result in a risk of electric shock, injury, failure, or malfunction.

－ 161 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ To use internal power supply when the jumper socket is positioned at [CN-SO]

Install a switch, etc. between the multifunction input terminals (1) through (5) ([MI1] through [MI5]) and the terminal [PS], and switch it on/off.

Use a Phillips screwdriver (M3) to install it.

・ To use internal power supply when the jumper socket is positioned at [CN-SI]

Install a switch, etc. between the multifunction input terminals (1) through (5) ([MI1] through [MI5]) and the terminal [GND], and switch it on/off.

Use a Phillips screwdriver (M3) to install it.

Details of multifunction input settings

Details of each selecting item for the multifunction input terminals are described below.

・ Selecting item: 0 to 2

Preset frequency/Preset speed selection

The combination of Preset frequency/speed selections 1 through 3 turned on/off enables you to select a setting of the Preset_frequency/speed(1) through the Preset_frequency/speed(7) (<d-15> through <d-21>) and operate the inverter.

Preset frequency/

Preset speed selection 3

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

Preset frequency/

Preset speed selection 2

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Preset frequency/

Preset speed selection 1

Frequency/speed command

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

As normally specified (preset function will not be used)

<d-15> (Preset_frequency(1)/Preset_ speed(1))

<d-16> (Preset_frequency(2)/Preset_ speed(2))

<d-17> (Preset_frequency(3)/Preset_ speed(3))

<d-18> (Preset_frequency(4)/Preset_ speed(4))

<d-19> (Preset_frequency(5)/Preset_ speed(5))

<d-20> (Preset_frequency(6)/Preset_ speed(6))

<d-21> (Preset_frequency(7)/Preset_ speed(7))

・ Selecting item: 3, 4

Acceleration or deceleration time selection

You can use Acceleration or deceleration time selection 1 and 2 to change acceleration or deceleration time while the inverter is running.

To use S-pattern acceleration or deceleration, you should set the S-pattern_acceleration/deceleration_ usage_selection <d-06> to "ON."

－ 162 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Acceleration or deceleration time selection 2

OFF

Acceleration or deceleration time selection 1

OFF

Selected acceleration or deceleration time (including S-pattern acceleration or deceleration)

OFF

ON

ON

ON:

OFF

ON

Normal (acceleration or deceleration time selected in <d-00>)

Acceleration_time(2) and Deceleration_time(2) (<5.Acc2>,

<6.dEc2>, and <d-11> through <d-14>)

Acceleration_time(3) and Deceleration_time(3) (<d-02> and

<d-03> (without S-pattern acceleration or deceleration))

Acceleration_time(4) and Deceleration_time(4) (<d-04> <d-05>

(without S-pattern acceleration or deceleration)

・ Selecting item: 5, 6

Frequency UP and DOWN command (MRH mode)

Speed UP and DOWN command (MRH mode)

When the MRH_function_usage_selection <d-27> is set to

"ON" and "1" (Terminal block) is selected to the Frequency/

Speed_command_input_selection <b-10>, acceleration or deceleration can be controlled through an UP or DOWN command.

When frequency/speed exceeds its upper or lower limit, the inverter automatically accelerates or decelerates until it reaches the upper or lower limit without an UP or DOWN command.

Specifying a negative value to the lower limit speed enables the inverter to operate in the opposite direction.

・ Selecting item: 7

Frequency/speed hold

When this signal is set to "ON" while the inverter is accelerating or decelerating, it temporarily stops acceleration or deceleration and holds the frequency/speed at that time.

When it is changed to "OFF," the inverter will accelerate or decelerate again.

However, this hold function is not available while the inverter is decelerating to stop with a stop command.

・ Selecting item: 8

S-pattern acceleration or deceleration prohibition

Even when the inverter executes S-pattern_acceleration or deceleration with the S-pattern_acceleration/ deceleration_usage_selection set to "ON," setting this signal to "ON" will forcibly prohibit the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration and return the inverter to normal acceleration or deceleration.

－ 163 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Selecting item: 9

Maximum frequency/Maximum speed reduction

When "1" (Terminal block) is selected to the Frequency/

Speed_command_input_selection <b-10>, setting this signal to "ON" will cause Maximum frequency/speed to be reduced, based on a setting of the Maximum_frequency/ speed_reduction_rate <H-12>, as shown in the figure.

Change it to "ON"/"OFF" while the inverter stops. Even when it is changed while the inverter is running, the change will not take effect until the inverter stops.

This function is enabled only for analog input from the terminal block.

・ Selecting item: 10

Droop control disabled

Even when the Droop_control_usage_selection <i-02> is set to "ON," setting this signal to "ON" will cause the droop function not to be operated.

・ Selecting item: 11

[IM] [EDM] Speed/torque control selection

When "4" (Speed/torque control contact change) is set to the Operation_mode_selection <i-07>, using this signal enables you to switch speed control to torque control and vice versa.

"OFF" enables the speed control, and "ON" enables the torque control.

・ Selecting item: 12

Forward/reverse operation command selection

When "1" (Terminal block) is set to the Operation_command_input_selection <b-11> or JOG-command_ input_selection <b-12>, setting this signal to "ON" will switch between forward and reverse of the operation/JOG command.

・ Forward operation will be changed to reverse, and reverse to forward.

When "1" is set to the Operation_command_input_selection <b-11>, you should install a switch between the control input terminal [ST-F] and the terminal [PS] on the control board <VFC66-Z> and then set the operation signal to "ON"/OFF."

・ For details of how to install it, refer to {4.5 Start and Stop through External Contact in V/f Control}.

・ Selecting item: 13

DC brake command

Setting this signal to "ON" will cause a DC brake which applies direct current to the motor.

You can adjust the current at this time with the following settings:

・ [V/f]: DC_brake_voltage <8.dcbr>

・ [IM] [EDM] DC_brake_gain <b-04>

When this signal is set to "OFF," the motor will stop after the time specified in the DC_brake_operation_ time <b-03> has elapsed.

When an operation/JOG command is input together with the DC brake, the operation/JOG command is prioritized.

・ Selecting item: 14

[IM] Initial excitation command

Setting this signal to "ON" will cause an initial excitation operation which applies exciting current to the motor.

Use this function when exciting the motor for fast response time at start.

－ 164 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Initial excitation operation mode

For initial excitation operation, an "AC initial excitation mode" and "DC initial excitation mode" are provided.

It can be selected in the Initial_excitation_selection <i-18>.

・ Selecting item: 15 through 18

External failure signal (Protection relay [86A] operation)

Use failure signals from peripherals as an input of this signal to protect and stop the inverter.

When External failure signals 1 through 4 are set to "ON," the inverter blocks output to turn on the protection relay [86A]. At the same time, "EF1" through "EF4" are displayed on the console, and traceback is also triggered.

To release the protection operation, reset it. To reset the protection operation, use the [STOP/RESET] key or set one of multifunction input terminals to protection reset and then turn it on.

・ Selecting item: 19 through 22

External failure signal (Protection relay [86A] not operated)

These are similar to the setting items 15 through 18 except that the protection relay [86A] does not operate.

Also, traceback is not triggered for these signals.

Setting each command of operation/JOG/DC brake of the inverter to "OFF" will automatically release the protection operation.

・ Selecting item: 23

Traceback external trigger

Typically, traceback is triggered when a failure or protection operation occurs. Input of this signal can forcibly trigger it. For traceback, refer to {5.3.7 Area F}.

・ Selecting item: 24

Second setting block selection

Setting this signal to "ON" will cause each parameter specified in the second setting block to be used.

This setting is not available for the terminal [MI4].

・ Selecting item: 25

Emergency stop (Normally close)

This is an emergency stop signal through B contact input. When the contact is opened, the inverter urgently stops.

Emergency stop setting

When this function is set to one of terminal blocks, the contact should be typically short circuited.

When the contact is opened, the inverter urgently stops and cannot operate.

・ Selecting item: 27

Frequency/speed command terminal block selection

When this signal is set to "ON," a frequency/speed command input will be forcibly set to the terminal block

(terminal [AIN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z>), regardless of a setting of the Frequency/Speed_ command_input_selection <b-10>.

When this signal is input together with that of Preset frequency/Preset speed selection, this will be prioritized.

When <IO66-Z> or a digital communication option is installed, it will be forcibly changed from the terminal

[AIN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z> to the terminal [AIN2] on <IO66-Z> or the digital communication

－ 165 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters optional board, regardless of a setting of the Digital_communication_option_selection <J-00>.

Please note that a protection function of <IO66-Z> or a digital communication option does not work, when

"0" (OFF) is set to the Digital_communication_option_selection <J-00>.

・ Selecting item: 28

Start command (forward) (STARTF)

When "1" (Terminal block) is set to the Operation_command_input_selection <b-11> and this signal is set to "ON," the motor starts running.

Do not set this function because it is allocated to the control input terminal [ST-F].

・ Selecting item: 29

Start command (reverse) (STARTF)

When "1" (Terminal block) is set to the Operation_command_input_selection <b-11> and this signal is set to "ON," the motor starts running in reverse.

・ Selecting item: 30

JOG command (forward) (JOGF)

When "1" (Terminal block) is set to the JOG_command_input_selection <b-12> and this signal is set to

"ON," the motor jogs forward.

・ Selecting item: 31

JOG command (reverse) (JOGR)

When "1" (Terminal block) is set to the JOG_command_input_selection <b-12> and this signal is set to

"ON," the motor jogs in reverse.

・ Selecting item: 32

Emergency stop （ Normally open)

This is an emergency stop signal through A contact input. When the contact is short circuited, the inverter urgently stops.

・ Selecting item: 33

Protection reset (RESET)

Setting this signal to "ON" during the protection operation will release the protection operation.

・ Selecting item: 34 through 37

External signal input

These items send "ON" signals from peripherals to an optional board.

For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of the optional board.

Safety notice

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before connecting terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Close the front cover before turning on the power.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Using the start command (forward) of the control input terminal [ST-F] and multifunction input terminals

● When you turn on the power or perform protection reset with signals input in a start command (forward) of the terminal [ST-F] or multifunction input terminals, the motor suddenly restarts. After checking that no signal is input in a start command (forward) of the terminal [ST-F] or multifunction input terminals, turn on the power or perform protection reset.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

－ 166 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.3.5 Area d (setting area for acceleration or deceleration time, frequency/speed jump functions, and MRH functions)

In the area d, you can set parameters related to acceleration or deceleration time, frequency/speed preset or jump functions, and MRH functions (acceleration/deceleration function by contact input) of the inverter.

■ <d-00> through <d-14>

Selection and setting of acceleration or deceleration time

Display Contents d-00 d-01 d-02 d-03 d-04 d-05 d-06 d-07 d-08 d-09 d-10 d-11 d-12 d-13

Acceleration/

Deceleration_time_ selection

JOG_acceleration/ deceleration_time_ selection

Acceleration_time

(3)

Deceleration_time

(3)

Acceleration_time

(4)

Deceleration_time

(4)

S-pattern_ acceleration/ deceleration_ usage_selection

S-pattern_rise_ time(1)

S-pattern_ acceleration_ reach_time(1)

S-pattern_fall_time

(1)

S-pattern_ deceleration_ reach_time(1)

S-pattern_rise_ time(2)

S-pattern_ acceleration_ reach_time(2)

S-pattern_fall_time

(2)

SettingBand or selecting item

0: Acceleration/Deceleration time (1)

1: Acceleration/Deceleration time (2)

2: Acceleration/Deceleration time (3)

3: Acceleration/Deceleration time (4)

0.0 to 3600.0

0.0 to 3600.0

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

0.0 to 60.0

0.0 to 60.0

Initialized data

0

1

30.0

30.0

OFF

0.1

0.1

Unit

―

― sec sec

― sec sec

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

○

○

×

○

○

－ 167 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Selection and setting of acceleration or deceleration time

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item d-14 S-pattern_ deceleration_ reach_time(2)

Initialized data

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

Acceleration/Deceleration_time_selection <d-00>

JOG_acceleration/deceleration_time_selection <d-01>

Select a setting of acceleration/deceleration time used for normal or JOG operation.

A setting of acceleration/deceleration time for normal operation can be changed through multifunction input.

Items selected in <d-00>,

<d-01>, or multifunction input

Acceleration time

Deceleration time

0: Acceleration/deceleration time (1)

1: Acceleration/deceleration time (2)

2: Acceleration/deceleration time (3)

3: Acceleration/deceleration time (4)

3.Acc1

5.Acc2

d-02 d-04

4.dEc1

6.dEc2

d-03 d-05

S-pattern rise time d-07

S-pattern acceleration reach time d-08 d-11

0.0

0.0

d-12

0.0

0.0

S-pattern fall time d-09

S-pattern deceleration reach time d-10 d-13

0.0

0.0

d-14

0.0

0.0

The Acceleration_time(1) <3.Acc1>, Deceleration_time(1) <4.dEc1>, Acceleration_time(2) <5.Acc2>, and

Deceleration_time(2) <6.dEc2> are items of the basic setting area.

When the Acceleration/Deceleration time (3) or (4) is selected, the amount of time related to S-pattern acceleration/deceleration will all become "0.0."

As shown in the figure below, these acceleration/deceleration time settings consist of the acceleration/ deceleration time and the amount of time represented as S-pattern curves from "0" to the setting of the

Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed.

・ To use the S-pattern acceleration or deceleration function, you should set the S-pattern_acceleration/ deceleration_usage_selection <d-06> to "ON."

・ When it is set to "OFF," S-pattern acceleration/deceleration is not executed even if each S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time is specified.

－ 168 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Time chart of acceleration/deceleration (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration)

－ 169 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <d-15> through <d-21>

[V/f] Setting of preset operation frequency command

Display Contents d-15 d-16 d-17 d-18 d-19 d-20 d-21

SettingBand or selecting item

Preset_frequency(1) -Maximum_frequency <A-00> to

Preset_frequency(2)

Preset_frequency(3)

Preset_frequency(4)

Preset_frequency(5)

Preset_frequency(6)

Preset_frequency(7)

+Maximum_frequency <A-00>

Initialized data

0.0

Unit

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

○

[IM] [EDM] Setting of preset operation speed command

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item d-15 d-16 d-17 d-18 d-19 d-20 d-21

Preset_speed(1)

Preset_speed(2)

Preset_speed(3)

Preset_speed(4)

Preset_speed(5)

Preset_speed(6)

Preset_speed(7)

-Maximum_speed <A-00> to

+Maximum_speed <A-00>

Initialized data

0

Unit r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○

These are frequency/speed command settings of preset operation functions selected by multifunction input signals.

For preset operations selected by multifunction input signals, refer to {5.3.4 Area c}.

[V/f] Frequency command jump function setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item d-22 d-23 d-24 d-25 d-26

Jump_frequency(1) 0.0 to Maximum_frequency <A-00>

Jump_frequency(2)

Jump_frequency(3)

Jump_frequency(4)

Jump_frequency_ width

0.0 to 10.0

Initialized data

0.0

0.0

Unit

Hz

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

－ 170 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[IM] [EDM] Speed command jump function setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item d-22 d-23 d-24 d-25 d-26

Jump_speed(1)

Jump_speed(2)

Jump_speed(3)

Jump_speed(4)

0 to Maximum_speed <A-00>

Jump_speed_width 0 to 300

Initialized data

0

Unit r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○

0 r/min

To avoid resonance point speed caused by load machines, use these functions to jump frequency/speed commands.

As shown in the figure below, they are jumped at each point with hysteresis characteristics.

Frequency/speed commands, which are input to the acceleration/deceleration control, will be jumped.

Therefore, while the inverter is accelerating or decelerating, they pass within the jump width at a slope depending on acceleration or deceleration time settings.

○

Frequency/speed command jump function [left], Multiple jumped areas are overlapped [right]

－ 171 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <d-27> through <d-29>

[V/f] MRH mode setting

Display Contents d-27 d-28 d-29

MRH_function_ usage_selection

MRH_upper_limit_ frequency

MRH_lower_limit_ frequency

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

MRH_lower_limit_frequency <d-29> to

Maximum_frequency <A-00>

-Maximum_frequency <A-00> to

MRH_upper_limit_frequency <d-28>

Initialized data

OFF

5.0

0.0

Unit

―

Hz

Hz

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

○

[IM] [EDM] MRH mode setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

× d-27 d-28 d-29

MRH_function_ usage_selection

MRH_upper_limit_ speed

MRH_lower_limit_ speed

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

MRH_lower_limit_speed <d-29> to

Maximum_speed <A-00>

-Maximum_speed <A-00> to

MRH_upper_limit_speed <d-28>

300

0

― r/min r/min

○

○

When the MRH_function_usage_selection is set to "ON," acceleration or deceleration can be controlled through contacts. This is called the MRH mode.

When "1" (Terminal block) is set to the Frequency/Speed_command_input_selection <b-10>, speed can be increased or decreased through multifunction input contacts.

For multifunction input, refer to {5.3.4 Area c}.

When an UP command is input, speed is increased to a setting value of the MRH_upper_limit_frequency/ speed <d-28>. When a DOWN command is input, speed is decreased to a setting value of the MRH_lower_ limit_frequency/speed <d-29>.

When UP and DOWN commands are not input or both are input, the inverter will keep the speed at that time.

However, when the current frequency/speed is not between the setting values of the MRH_upper_limit_ frequency/speed <d-28> and of the MRH_lower_limit_frequency/speed <d-29>, the inverter automatically accelerates or decelerates until it reaches that value.

By setting a negative value to the MRH_lower_limit_frequency/speed <d-29>, you can operate the inverter in the opposite direction through contacts.

Motor speed when a positive value [left] or a negative value [right] is specified to the MRH_lower_limit_frequency/speed

While the MRH mode is selected, when a multifunction input preset frequency/speed selection signal is input, a frequency/speed command of multifunction input preset frequency/speed will be prioritized, and when a

－ 172 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters frequency/speed command terminal block selection signal is input, a frequency/speed command of frequency/speed command terminal block will be prioritized.

For the MRH mode selected by multifunction input signals, refer to {5.3.4 Area c}.

■ [IM] [EDM] <d-30> through <d-32>

[IM] [EDM] Setting of speed deviation limiting function during acceleration/deceleration

Display d-30

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Without limiting command

ON: With limiting command

Initialized data

OFF d-31 d-32

Speed_deviation_ limiting_command_ selection

Maximum_ deviation(positive)

Maximum_ deviation(negative)

0.0 to 100.0

-100.0 to 0.0

5.0

-5.0

Unit

―

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

Speed_deviation_limiting_command_selection <d-30>

Maximum_deviation(positive) <d-31>

Maximum_deviation(negative) <d-32>

When the Speed_deviation_limiting_command_selection <d-30> is set to "ON," output of motor speed and acceleration/deceleration control is limited to the deviation specified in the Maximum_deviation(positive)

<d-31> or Maximum_deviation(negative) <d-32>.

These functions can prevent sudden acceleration caused by rapid change of load and power supply voltage and also restore speed at a slope specified in acceleration or deceleration time settings, for example, when the speed is decreased due to torque limit and the load is suddenly reduced while speed control operation.

However, lowering deviation too much will cause acceleration or deceleration to be limited.

5.3.6 Area E (setting area for frequency characteristics, torque limit, torque command characteristics, and speed control)

In the area E, you can set parameters related to frequency characteristics, speed control, and torque of the inverter.

■ <E-00>, <E-01>

Regeneration stall prevention function setting

Display Contents

E-00

E-01

Regeneration_ stall_prevention_ function_usage_ selection

Regeneration_ stall_prevention_ voltage

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

[200 V class] 320 to 360

[400 V class] 640 to 720

Initialized data

OFF

340

680

Unit

―

V

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

If direct-current voltage rises exceeding the setting value of the Regeneration_stall_prevention_voltage, the torque command of regeneration (negative direction for forward and positive direction for reverse) is limited to

0. During deceleration, these functions can temporarily stop the deceleration to prevent the inverter from tripping due to an overvoltage (oV) protection operation.

－ 173 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

When using these functions with the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit <VFDB2009>, it should set up in

200V class and more than 5V should set regeneration_stall_prevention_voltage as the high level in 400V class more than 10V from the level of the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit <VFDB2009> operation level.

■ [V/f] <E-02>, <E-06>

[V/f] Start mode selection

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

1

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

× E-02 Start_mode_ selection

0: Free start

1: Minimum frequency start

Restart_delay_time 0.100 to 10.000

―

E-06 0.100

sec ×

Start_mode_selection <E-02>

Select "Free start" or "Minimum frequency start" as a start mode.

Restart_delay_time <E-06>

Specify a time lapse after stopping the inverter and before restarting it. Before the specified time has elapsed, the inverter will not restart even when the operation signal is set to "ON."

When you restart a motor with larger capacity immediately after stopping it, the inverter may fail to free-start due to magnetic flux remaining in the motor. In this case, set a larger value to the Restart_delay_time <E-06> for adjustment.

When the inverter is turned off at a frequency of 1/10 or less of the maximum frequency, it will start at the minimum frequency even if free start is selected.

A difference between "Free start" and "Minimum frequency start" is described below.

Free start

When an operation command is turned on while the motor rotates separately, the inverter starts at a frequency synchronized with the motor speed.

Minimum frequency start

The inverter starts at a frequency specified in the Minimum_ frequency <A-01> regardless of the motor rotation.

After instantaneous power interruption, it restarts at the same operation frequency as immediately before the power interruption is detected.

－ 174 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ [IM] [EDM] <E-02>

[IM] [EDM] High-efficient operation mode selection

Display Contents

E-02 High-efficient_ mode_usage_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

Initialized data

[IM]

OFF

[EDM]

ON

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

High-efficient_mode_usage_selection <E-02>

[IM]

When running with small loads, the inverter adjust an excitation current command to achieve high-efficient operation.

Since the response of the inverter will be impaired by this function, you should set it to "OFF" when high-speed response is required.

[EDM]

When you set it to "OFF," output voltage has V/f constant characteristics. Typically, keep it "ON."

■ <E-03>

Motor rotation direction change setting

Display Contents

E-03 Forward_direction_ change

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Forward

ON: Reverse

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Forward_direction_change <E-03>

Setting <E-03> to "ON" enables you to reverse the rotation direction of the motor without rewiring the inverter output terminals [U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3].

When "2" (Reverse prohibition) is set to the Reverse_prohibition_mode_selection <b-08> with <E-03> set to

"ON," forward rotation is prohibited.

■ <E-04>

Simulation mode setting

Display

E-04

Contents

Simulation_mode

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Without simulation operation

ON: Simulation operation

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Simulation_mode <E-04>

When <E-04> is set to "ON," the inverter can enter a simulation mode. In the simulation mode, the inverter virtually enters the operation mode without voltage output. Since voltage is not output in a simulation, a sequence check can be done with the inverter connected and without operating the motor.

－ 175 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <E-05>

[V/f] Boost mode selection

Display Contents

E-05 Autoboost_mode

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Manual boost

ON: Auto boost

Initialized data

OFF

[V/f] Autoboost_mode <E-05>

In [V/f], output from the inverter can be boosted depending on the motor or load characteristics.

You can select the following two boost modes:

Unit

―

Manual boost

Adjust the amount of boost with the Torque_boost_amount

<7.tbSt> to suit motor load characteristics.

When driving multiple motors, select Manual boost.

Driving

ReWrite

×

Auto boost

Automatically adjust the amount of boost depending on load. A setting of the Torque_boost_amount <7.tbSt> is not available.

Since deadtime compensation or primary resistance should be set with good accuracy, you should perform Autotuning when using it. For deadtime compensation or primary resistance, refer to {5.3.2 Area A}.

This cannot be used when multiple motors are driven.

[IM] [EDM] Torque command mode selection

Display Contents

E-05 Torque_command_ mode_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: % torque command

1: Absolute value torque command

Initialized data

0

Unit

―

In [IM] and [EDM], select a torque command characteristic in the constant output (power constant) area.

A difference between two types of torque commands is described below.

Driving

ReWrite

×

－ 176 －

% torque command

Even when a torque command is constant, to keep output constant in the constant output (power constant) area, output torque is decreased inversely proportional to speed.

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Absolute value torque command

When a command is constant even in the constant output

(power constant) area, output torque is also constant. A value of torque limit is decreased to keep constant output.

■ [V/f] <E-06>

Refer to the section of <E-02> in [V/f].

■ [IM] <E-06>

Refer to the section of <E-11> in [IM].

■ [EDM] <E-06>

[EDM] Restart prohibition time

Display Contents

E-06 Restart_ prohibition_time

SettingBand or selecting item

100 to 999

Initialized data

100

Unit msec

Driving

ReWrite

○

Restart_prohibition_time <E-06>

Select the amount of time the inverter is prohibited from restarting. Normally, do not change its Initialized data.

－ 177 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <E-07> through <E-09>

[V/f] V/f pattern selection

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

E-07

E-08

E-09

V/f_pattern_ selection

Voltage_at_turnoff_ point

Frequency_at_ turnoff_point

0: V/f constant straight line

1: Square reduction

2: Polygonal line

[200 V class] 0 to 230

[400 V class] 0 to 460

0.0 to Maximum_frequency <A-00>

Select a V/f pattern to suit load characteristics.

A difference among three types of patterns is described below.

V/f pattern: Straight line

This is used when load has constant torque characteristics.

Initialized data

0

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

0

0.0

V

Hz

×

×

V/f pattern: Square reduction

This is effective when load has square reduction torque characteristics (for such as a fan and a pump).

V/f pattern: Polygonal line

This is effective when load has two-step torque characteristics.

－ 178 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[IM] [EDM] Current control gain adjustment

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

100.0

E-07

E-08

E-09

Current_control_ proportion_gain

Current_control_ integral_gain(1)

Current_control_ integral_gain(2)

40.0 to 200.0

20.0 to 500.0

100.0

These functions adjust current control gain. Normally, do not change its Initialized data.

■ [IM] [EDM] <E-10>

[IM] [EDM] Motor temperature detection option usage selection

Display Contents

E-10 Motor_ temperature_ compensation

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Without compensation

ON: With compensation

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

%

%

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

Driving

ReWrite

×

Motor_temperature_compensation <E-10>

Set it to "ON" when temperature compensation is required, depending on motor temperature detected by a temperature sensor embedded in the motor.

The inverter control calculation function includes a motor temperature compensation calculation function, but it cannot calculate temperature before operation. Especially when start torque is required in a place where the motor becomes low temperatures while the inverter stops, this temperature detection option should be used to compensate start torque.

Using this function requires the temperature detection optional board for a PT100 internal motor <TVPT66-Z> or the temperature detection optional board for a thermistor internal motor <TVTH66-Z> and also the motor temperature sensor.

■ [IM] <E-11>, <E-06>

[IM] Magnetic flux command adjustment

Display Contents

E-11

E-06

Flux_command

Flux_reinforcing_ rate_at_start

SettingBand or selecting item

20.0 to 150.0

100.0 to 150.0

Initialized data

100.0

100.0

Unit

%

%

Flux_command <E-11>

This is a command value which indicates a size of magnetic flux used for vector control. Typically, set it to

100.0 %.

Flux_reinforcing_rate_at_start <E-06>

This is used when magnetic flux is reinforced only at start to enlarge start torque.

Typically, set it to 100.0 % (without reinforcing) because it may be instable depending on the motor.

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

－ 179 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ [EDM] <E-11>

[EDM] Free start maximum speed setting

Display Contents

E-11 Free_start_ maximum_speed

SettingBand or selecting item

100 to 150

Initialized data

100

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

Free_start_maximum_speed <E-11>

Specify the maximum speed, at which the inverter can start from free run, as a ratio to the Rated_motor_ speed <A-05>.

This item cannot be set when it operates with the control without speed sensor.

■ [IM] [EDM] <E-12>

[IM] Motor cooling fan (drive without speed sensor) selection

Display Contents

E-12 Motor_cooling_fan

(sensor-less_drive)

SettingBand or selecting item

0: Self cooling fan

1: Forced air cooling fan

Initialized data

0

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Motor_cooling_fan(sensor-less_drive) <E-12>

Select "1" (Forced air cooling fan) when the motor cooling fan is driven by other motors. Select "0" (Self cooling fan) when it is directly connected to the motor shaft and the motor is cooled by rotation of the motor itself.

[EDM] Inverter maximum output voltage setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

E-12 Inverter_output_ maximum_voltage

80 to 300

Initialized data

100

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

[EDM] Inverter_output_maximum_voltage <E-12>

This is used to limit inverter output voltage. Specify a ratio to the Rated_motor_voltage <A-03>.

When rotation speed of the motor rises and output voltage exceeds a setting of the Inverter_output_ maximum_voltage <E-12> due to electromotive force caused by the permanent magnet embedded in the ED motor, this function executes magnetic flux weakening and limits output voltage.

5.3.7 Area F (setting area for built-in dynamic brake (DB) operation, protection functions, and traceback)

In the area F, you can set parameters related to dynamic brake operation, various protection functions, and traceback functions.

■ <F-00>

Built-in DB(DynamicBrake) operation level setting

Display Contents

F-00 Built-in_DB

SettingBand or selecting item

[200 V class] 320.0 to 360.0

Initialized data

340.0

Unit

V

Driving

ReWrite

○

－ 180 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Built-in DB(DynamicBrake) operation level setting

Display Contents

(DynamicBrake)_ operation_level

SettingBand or selecting item

[400 V class] 640.0 to 720.0

Initialized data

680.0

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

Built-in_DB(DynamicBrake)_operation_level

VF66B-2R222 through 2222 [200 V class] and VF66B-2R244 through 2244 [400 V class] have a built-in dynamic brake (DB) transistor.

In <F-00>, set the operation level of this built-in dynamic brake (DB) transistor. When direct-current voltage becomes higher than a specified value, the built-in dynamic brake (DB) transistor turns on, and when lower, it turns off.

Normally, do not change its Initialized data. However, when power supply voltage is higher and it turns on even if it is not in the brake mode, you should set a larger value. When using it in combination with the sine wave converter, specify 360 V [200 V class] or 720 V [400 V class] to this setting item.

・ When dynamic brake (DB) resistance and a thermal relay are connected between the direct-current terminals [+2] and [B] on the main circuit terminal block, dynamic brake will become effective. For the place and others of the terminal block, refer to {3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use a Phillips screwdriver or a hexagon box wrench (M4 through M12).

Safety notice

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before connecting parts to terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Close the front cover before turning on the power.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

■ <F-01> and <F-02>

Overfrequency/overspeed protection setting

Display Contents

F-01

F-02

Forward_ overfrequency_ protection_setting/

Forward_ overspeed_ protection_setting

Reverse_ overfrequency_ protection_setting/

Reverse_ overspeed_ protection_setting

SettingBand or selecting item

0.0 to 150.0

-150.0 to 0.0

Initialized data

105.0

-105.0

Unit

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

When output frequency/speed exceeds the settings of the Forward_overfrequency/overspeed_protection_ setting <F-01> and of Reverse_overfrequency/overspeed_protection_setting <F-02> relative to the maximum frequency/speed, the overfrequency/overspeed protection function is activated to cause the inverter to trip.

Set a value for forward and reverse each.

－ 181 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

When changing a setting of the Maximum_frequency/Maximum_speed <A-00>, you should also review this setting.

Overfrequency/overspeed protection setting

● In the Forward_overfrequency/overspeed_protection_setting <F-01> and Reverse_overfrequency/ overspeed_protection_setting <F-02>, do not set a value significantly exceeding the rated motor speed.

It may result in a risk of serious accidents.

■ <F-03>

Overload protection setting

Display Contents

F-03 Overload_ protection_setting

SettingBand or selecting item

20 to 110

Initialized data

100

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

Overload_protection_setting <F-03>

Set a reference current value of overload protection as a ratio to the Rated_motor_current <A-04>.

When an effective value of inverter output current exceeds 105

% of this reference current, this is considered as an overload situation, and an overload protection counter starts. As shown in the figure, an overload protection (oL) will be activated according to the 150 % - 60 sec characteristic curve.

The overload protection counter can be displayed on the console. Compared to an overtorque protection counter, the larger value is displayed.

A value of the overload protection counter is increased in the overload situation over time. When it reaches 100 %, an overload protection is activated to cause the inverter to trip.

Overload protection (oL) operation time

OL pre-alarm function

You can use an oL pre-alarm function to output signals when the overload counter exceeds a specified point. For details, refer to {5.3.9 Area H}.

■ <F-04>, <F-05>

Cumulative operation timer setting

Display Contents

F-04

F-05

Cumulative_ operation_timer(1)

(Main circuit capacitor life)

Cumulative_ operation_timer(2)

SettingBand or selecting item

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

Initialized data

43800

21900

Unit

Hr

Driving

ReWrite

×

Hr ×

－ 182 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Cumulative operation timer setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

(Cooling fan life)

Initialized data

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

For changing monitor items and replacing the cooling fan, refer to {7.2 When [ALM] LED on Console Turns

On} and {7.3 How to Replace Cooling Fan}.

■ <F-06>

Motor overheat protection

Display Contents

F-06 Motor_overheat_ protection_ operation_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Without protection operation

ON: With protection operation

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Motor_overheat_protection_operation_selection <F-06>

Select whether motor overheat protection is enabled or not.

Using this function requires <TVPT66-Z> or <TVTH66-Z> and the motor temperature sensor.

When <F-06> is set to "ON," the inverter trips in the following conditions:

・ Motor temperature exceeds a setting of the Motor_protect_temperature <G-17>.

■ <F-07>

Protection relay [86A] operation setting upon power failure

Display Contents

F-07 Protection_relay

(86A)_operation_ selection_upon_ power_failure

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Without protection operation

ON: With protection operation

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Protection_relay(86A)_operation_selection_upon_power_failure <F-07>

Select a protection relay [86A] operation when the inverter detects power failure.

・ When <F-07> is set to "OFF"

Even if the inverter detects power failure, a protection relay [86A] will not be activated. An operation command

(or JOG command, DC brake command) is only set to "OFF" after the power is restored, and power failure is reset.

When the Instantaneous_power_interruption_restart <b-07> is set to "ON," after the power is restored, power failure is automatically reset to restart the inverter.

・ When <F-07> is set to "ON"

When the inverter detects power failure, the protection relay [86A] will be activated and the inverter will trip. In this case, like other protection operations, you should perform protection reset using reset terminals or the

[STOP/RESET] key.

Even when the Instantaneous_power_interruption_restart <b-07> is set to "ON," the inverter does not automatically restart.

－ 183 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

About instantaneous power interruption restart

● If the Instantaneous_power_interruption_restart <b-07> is set to "ON," the motor automatically restarts when the power is restored after instantaneous power interruption is detected. Therefore, do not come close to the motor while instantaneous power interruption is being detected.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

■ <F-08>

Protection retry function setting

Display Contents

F-08 Protection_retry_ count_setting

SettingBand or selecting item

0 to 5

Initialized data

0

Unit

Times

Driving

ReWrite

○

Protection_retry_count_setting <F-08>

When a protection operation occurs, this function executes "auto protection reset" and "auto restart" the number of times which is specified in the Protection_retry_count_setting <F-08>.

It executes auto reset in one second after the protection operation occurs, and then it executes auto restart.

When another protection operation occurs within ten seconds after restart, the inverter increases a value of the retry counter by one. When the value is below a setting value of the Protection_retry_count_setting

<F-08>, the inverter resets the protection operation again to restart.

When a protection operation does not occur in ten seconds after auto restart, the inverter considers it as a successful retry and clears the retry counter.

For only the following protection operations, the protection retry can be performed: The retry against other protections is prohibited for safety reasons.

・ Overvoltage protection

・ Overspeed protection

・ Overfrequency protection

・ Power failure ([86A] is set to "ON")

・ Optional error

・ External failure (protection relay [86A] operation)

■ <F-09> through <F-12>

External failure detection delay time setting

Display Contents

F-09

F-10

F-11

F-12

External_failure(1)_ detection_delay_ time

External_failure(2)_ detection_delay_ time

External_failure(3)_ detection_delay_ time

External_failure(4)_ detection_delay_

SettingBand or selecting item

0.0 to 30.0

Initialized data

0.0

Unit sec

Driving

ReWrite

○

－ 184 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

External failure detection delay time setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item time

Initialized data

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

Time required to detect external failure signals can be delayed during the amount of time specified in the

External_failure(1) through (4)_detection_delay_time (<F-09> through <F-12>).

These are used to adjust detection sensitivity of external failure signals.

■ <F-13> through <F-26>

The inverter incorporates a traceback function which can store, read out, and analyze control data such as current and voltage of protection operations to rapidly restore it.

For data stored by the traceback function, you can specify current and voltage defined as Initialized data as well as output from each internal PLC when the PLCH function is used.

With a separately sold "VF66 Series PC Tool," you can read out traceback data on your personal computer.

For details, refer to the "VF66PCTool Operating Manual."

Traceback function setting

Display Contents

F-13

F-14

F-15

F-16

F-17

F-18

F-19

F-20

F-21

F-22

F-23

F-24

F-25

Traceback_pitch

Traceback_trigger_ point

Traceback_CH1_ selection

Traceback_CH2_ selection

Traceback_CH3_ selection

Traceback_CH4_ selection

Traceback_CH5_ selection

Traceback_CH6_ selection

Traceback_CH7_ selection

Traceback_CH8_ selection

Traceback_CH9_ selection

Traceback_CH10_ selection

Traceback_CH11_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0 to 100

1 to 99

0 to 12

Initialized data

1

80

0

Unit msec

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

－ 185 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Traceback function setting

Display Contents

F-26 Traceback_CH12_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

Traceback_pitch <F-13>

Set an interval of traceback.

Traceback_trigger_point <F-14>

Set a traceback trigger point.

Traceback_CH1 through CH12_selection (<F-15> through

<F-26>)

Select whether each channel of traceback should be data within the inverter or a variable of the internal PLCc function.

The table below lists details of setting values.

Initialized data

Traceback point setting

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

Traceback pitch and traceback point settings

The traceback pitch and traceback point should be set before traceback data of protection operations and others is captured.

－ 186 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

<F-15> to

<F-26> settings ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 ch5 ch6 ch7 ch8 ch9 ch10 ch11 ch12

0

Recorded data Dimension

1 to 12

Recorded data Dimension

U/T1 phase current

V/T2 phase current

W/T3 phase current

Direct-current voltage

Output voltage

[V/f] Unused

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed

[V/f] Frequency command

(After acceleration and deceleration control)

[IM] [EDM] Speed control

(After acceleration and deceleration control)

[V/f] Calculation torque

[IM] [EDM] Torque command

Output frequency

(3536/rated inverter current value)

[200 V class] 10/1 V

[400 V class] 5/1 V

―

20000/maximum speed

20000/maximum frequency

20000/maximum speed

5000/100 %

5000/100 %

20000/maximum frequency

(Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed)

[V/f] Unused

[IM] Slip frequency

[EDM] Motor d-axis current command

[V/f] Unused

[IM] Magnetic flux

[EDM] Motor q-axis current command

―

20000/frequency corresponding to the maximum speed

10000/100 %

―

1024/rated magnetic flux

10000/100 %

[V/f] [IM] Motor temperature 10/1 ℃

[EDM] Motor d-axis position 65536/360 degrees

PLC output RAM

(1 through 12)

・ Settings of

<F-15> through

<F-26> become an output RAM selection.

20000/100 %

－ 187 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ [IM] [EDM] <F-27> through <F-29>

[IM] [EDM] Overtorque protection setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

ON

Unit

F-27

F-28

F-29

Overtorque_ protection_ function_selection

Overtorque_ protect_level_ setting

Overtorque_ protection_ operation_ standard_torque

OFF: Without protection function

ON: With protection function

110 to 205

50 to 105

150

105

―

%

%

In <F-27> through <F-29>, set overtorque protections.

In the Overtorque_protection_function_selection <F-27>, you can select whether protection operation is enabled or not.

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

○

When <F-27> is set to "ON," if a torque command exceeds a standard torque value specified in the Overtorque_protection_ operation_standard_torque <F-29>, the inverter considers it as an overtorque condition and activate the overtorque protection counter.

As shown in the figure, when the torque command reaches a value specified in the Overtorque_protect_level_setting <F-28>, an overtorque protection (oT) is activated at a curve of 60 seconds.

Like the overload protection (oL) counter, the overtorque protection counter can be displayed on the console. Compared with the overload protection counter, the larger value is displayed.

A value of the overtorque protection counter is increased in the overtorque condition over time. When it reaches 100 %, an overload protection is activated to cause the inverter to trip.

Overtorque protection (OT) operation time

Overtorque protection compensation

For a torque command used for overtorque protection (oT), machine loss can be subtracted from an actual torque command for compensation.

For details, refer to {5.3.10 Area i}.

－ 188 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ [IM] [EDM] <F-30> through <F-32>

[IM] [EDM] Speed control error protection setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

× F-30

F-31

F-32

Speed_control_ error_function_ usage_selection

Speed_control_ error_detection_ speed_width

(positive)

Speed_control_ error_detection_ speed_width

(negative)

OFF: Without protection function

ON: With protection function

2.0 to 30.0

-30.0 to -2.0

5.0

-5.0

―

%

%

○

○

In the Speed_control_error_function_usage_selection <F-30>, you can select whether speed control error protection is enabled or not.

When <F-30> is set to "ON," if motor speed exceeds a range of

<0.SrEF> + <F-32> through <0.SrEF> + <F-31> (in this case, a negative value is specified in <F-32>) relative to the Speed_ command <0.SrEF>, a speed control error occurs to cause the inverter to trip.

This protection is activated if the speed control part or PG has an abnormality or if speed is decreased when load torque exceeds a torque limit.

When "0" is set to the Operation_mode_selection <i-07>, a speed command selected in the Frequency/Speed_command_ input_selection <b-10> becomes a standard speed command.

Operating range of speed control error protection function

－ 189 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.3.8 Area G (setting area for analog input and output)

In the area G, you can set parameters related to analog input and output, including inverter temperature and others.

■ <G-00>

Temperature detection selection (When <TVTH66-Z> and <TVPT66-Z> are used)

Display

G-00

Contents

Temperature_ detection_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: None

1: Thermistor <TVTH66-Z>

2: PT100 <TVPT66-Z>

Initialized data

0

Temperature_detection_selection <G-00>

Select a motor temperature detector installed on the motor.

・ When "0" is selected to <G-00>: Temperature is not detected.

・ When "1" is selected to <G-00>: <TVTH66-Z> is used.

・ When "2" is selected to <G-00>: <TVPT66-Z> is used.

For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of each option.

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

■ <G-01> and <G-02>

Motor temperature detection adjustment (When <TVTH66-Z> and <TVPT66-Z> are used)

Display

G-01

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

-20.0 to 20.0

Initialized data

0.0

G-02

Temperature_ detection_offset_ adjustment

Temperature_ detection_gain_ adjustment

50.0 to 150.0

100.0

Unit

%

%

Adjust offset and gain of temperature detected by the motor temperature compensation optional board

<TVTH66-Z> or <TVPT66-Z>.

For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of each option.

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

■ <G-03>

Analog input (2) characteristics selection (When <IO66-Z> and the digital communication option are used)

Display

G-03

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

1

Unit

― Analog_input(2)

_characteristics_ selection

0: 0 to ±10 V

1: 0 to 10 V

2: 4 to 20 mA

Driving

ReWrite

×

Select a type of input characteristics of the analog input (2) terminal [AIN2] on <IO66-Z> and the digital communication option.

When "2" is selected to the Analog_input(2)_characteristics_selection <G-03>, switch operation will be required on <IO66-Z> and the digital communication option.

For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of each option.

－ 190 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <G-04> and <G-05>

Analog input (2) limit setting (When <IO66-Z> and the digital communication option are used)

Display

G-04

G-05

Contents

Analog_input(2)

_upper_limit_ frequency/speed

Analog_input(2)

_lower_limit_ frequency/speed

SettingBand or selecting item

Absolute value of Analog_input(2)_lower_ limit_frequency/speed <G-05> to 100.0

-Analog_input(2)_upper_limit_frequency/ speed <G-04> to

+Analog_input(2)_upper_limit_frequency/ speed <G-04>

Initialized data

100.0

0.0

Unit

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

These settings are enabled when <IO66-Z> and the digital communication option are used.

Set an upper limit or lower limit value of frequency/speed (as a ratio to the maximum frequency/speed) when analog input specified in the Analog_input(2)_characteristics_selection <G-03> is input to the analog input terminal [AIN2] as a speed command.

・ For forward direction, even when a speed command exceeding the frequency/speed specified in the

Analog_input(2)_upper_limit_frequency/speed <G-04> is input to the terminal [AIN2], the frequency/speed is limited not to exceed that specified value.

・ For reverse direction, the frequency/speed is limited so that it may not drop below the value specified in the

Analog_input(2)_lower_limit_frequency/speed <G-05>.

For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of each option.

■ <G-06>

Analog input (3) characteristics selection (When <IO66-Z> is used)

Display Contents

G-06 Analog_input(3)

_characteristics_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: 0 to ±10 V

1: 0 to 10 V

2: None

3: Pulse train

(0 to 150 kHz)

Initialized data

1

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Select a type of input characteristics of the analog input terminal [AIN3] on <IO66-Z>.

For details, refer to the optional "Instruction Manual."

For details of characteristics of analog input voltage (0 to ±10 V, 0 to 10 V) and current (4 to 20 mA), refer to the sections of the Analog_frequency_command_characteristic_selection <b-17>, Analog_frequency_ command_upper_limit_frequency <b-18>, and Analog_frequency_command_lower_limit_frequency <b-19>.

Pulse train input: When selecting "3" to <G-06>, move the position of the SW3 on <IO66-Z> to side 1, and input pulse signals with a duty ratio of 1:1 at a voltage of 0 to 15 V between the terminals [AIN3] and [G-IN].

Its setting characteristics are the same as those of voltage input (0 to 10 V). Refer to the descriptions related to (0 to 10 V) replacing 0 to 10 V with 0 to 150 kHz.

Safety notice

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before connecting terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

－ 191 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

● Close the front cover before turning on the power.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

■ <G-07> and <G-08>

Analog input (3) limit setting (When <IO66-Z> is used)

Display Contents

G-07

G-08

Analog_input(3)

_upper_limit_ frequency/speed

Analog_input(3)

_lower_limit_ frequency/speed

SettingBand or selecting item

Absolute value of Analog_input(3)_lower_ limit_frequency/speed <G-08> to 100.0

-Analog_input(3)_upper_limit_frequency/ speed <G-07> to +Analog_input(3)_upper_ limit_frequency/speed <G-07>

Initialized data

100.0

0.0

Unit

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

These settings are enabled when <IO66-Z> is used.

Set an upper limit or lower limit value of frequency/speed (as a ratio to the maximum frequency/speed) when analog input specified in the Analog_input(3)_characteristics_selection <G-06> is input to the analog input terminal (3) [AIN3] as a speed command.

For details, refer to the optional "Instruction Manual."

■ <G-09>

Analog output (2) characteristics selection (When <IO66-Z> and the digital communication option are used)

Display

G-09

Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

1

Unit

― Analog_output(2)

_characteristics_ selection

0: Output voltage

1: Output current

2: [V/f] Output torque

[IM] [EDM] Torque command

Driving

ReWrite

×

3: [V/f] Frequency

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed

4: [V/f] Frequency command

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed command

5: Internal PLC output

6: Calibration

7: Monitor for adjustment

For details, refer to the optional "Instruction Manual."

■ <G-10>

Analog output (3) characteristics selection (When <IO66-Z> is used)

Display Contents

G-10 Analog_output(3)_ characteristics_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: Output voltage

1: Output current

2: [V/f] Output torque

Initialized data

0

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

－ 192 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Analog output (3) characteristics selection (When <IO66-Z> is used)

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

[IM] [EDM] Torque command

3: [V/f] Frequency

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed

4: [V/f] Frequency command

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed command

5: Internal PLC output

6: Calibration

7: Monitor for adjustment

8: Output voltage (4 to 20 mA)

9: Output current (4 to 20 mA)

10: [V/f] Output torque (4 to 20 mA)

[IM] [EDM] Torque command (4 to

20 mA)

11: [V/f] Frequency (4 to 20 mA)

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed (4 to 20 mA)

12: [V/f] Frequency command (4 to 20 mA)

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed command

(4 to 20 mA)

13: Internal PLC output (4 to 20 mA)

14: Calibration (12 mA output)

For details, refer to the optional "Instruction Manual."

Analog output selected in <G-09> (Selecting item 0 to 7)

Analog output selected in <G-10> (Selecting item 0 to 14)

Initialized data

Unit

Selecting items

0

1

2

3

4

5

Output voltage

Output current

[V/f] Output torque

[IM] [EDM] Torque command

[V/f] Frequency

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed

[V/f] Frequency command (After acceleration and deceleration control)

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed command (After acceleration and deceleration control)

Internal PLC output

Output voltage

[200 V class] 7.5 V/200 V

[400 V class] 7.5 V/400 V

5 V/Rated inverter current

5 V/100 %

10 V/Maximum_frequency <A-00>

10 V/Maximum_speed <A-00>

10 V/Maximum_frequency <A-00>

10 V/Maximum_speed <A-00>

5 V/20000 (100 %)

Driving

ReWrite

－ 193 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Selecting items

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Calibration

Monitor for adjustment

Output voltage

Output voltage

Output 5 V

―

[200 V class] 16 mA/200 V

[400 V class] 16 mA/400 V

12 mA/Rated inverter current

12 mA/100 %

Output current

[V/f] Output torque

[IM] [EDM] Torque command

[V/f] Frequency

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed

[V/f] Frequency command (After acceleration and deceleration control)

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed command (After acceleration and deceleration control)

Internal PLC output

Calibration

20 mA/Maximum_frequency <A-00>

20 mA/Maximum_speed <A-00>

20 mA/Maximum_frequency <A-00>

20 mA/Maximum_speed <A-00>

12 mA/20000 (100 %)

Output 12 mA

For details, refer to the "Control Block Editor Function Manual" of the VF66PC tool.

For 4 to 20 mA output, refer to the optional "Instruction Manual."

■ <G-15>

Line speed setting

Display Contents

G-15 Line_speed_ monitor_adjustment

SettingBand or selecting item

0.0 to 2000.0

Initialized data

0.0

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

Line_speed_monitor_adjustment <G-15>

Adjust the amount of gain of the monitor item (Line speed <L_SP>) displayed on the console.

Set the line speed at the time when a value of the Maximum_frequency/speed <A-00> is reached.

A value displayed in the line speed monitor is calculated in the following formula:

Monitor speed x Line_speed_monitor_adjustment <G-15>/Maximum_frequency/speed <A-00>

－ 194 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <G-16>

Analog input monitor display selection

Display Contents

G-16 Analog_input_ monitor_display_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

1: Analog input (1) [AIN1]

2: Analog input (2) [AIN2]

3: Analog input (3) [AIN3]

4: Analog input (4) [AIN4]

5: Analog input (5) [AIN5]

Initialized data

1

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

Analog_input_monitor_display_selection <G-16>

Set an analog input channel in the monitor item (Analog input voltage <Vin>) displayed on the console.

・ When "1" is selected to <G-16>: A value of voltage input into the analog input (1) terminal [AIN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z>

・ When "2" is selected to <G-16>: A value of voltage input into the analog input (2) terminal [AIN2] on

<IO66-Z> and the digital communication option

For changing monitor items and a list of them, refer to {4.1.6 Checking Operating State} and {4.1.7 List of

Monitor Items}.

■ <G-17>

Motor protect temperature (When <TVPT66-Z> or <TVTH66-Z> is used)

Display Contents

G-17 Motor_protect_ temperature

SettingBand or selecting item

150 to 180

Initialized data

150

Unit

℃

Driving

ReWrite

○

Motor_protect_temperature <G-17>

This setting is enabled when the temperature detection option <TVPT66-Z> or <TVTH66-Z> is installed.

When the Motor_overheat_protection_operation_selection <F-06> is set to "ON" , set a temperature for activating the motor overheat protection.

Normally, do not change its Initialized data of 150 ℃ .

－ 195 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.3.9 Area H (setting area for multifunction output)

In the area H, you can set parameters of inverter multifunction output.

■ <H-00> through <H-12>

Multifunction output setting item

Display Setting item

H-00

H-01

H-02

H-03

H-04

H-05

Multifunction_ output_terminal(1)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ output_terminal(2)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ output_terminal(3)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ output_terminal(4)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ output_terminal(5)_ function_selection

Multifunction_ output_terminal(6)_ function_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: ―

1: Frequency/speed detection (1)

(Frequency/speed equal to detection setting)

2: Frequency/speed detection (1)

(Frequency/speed more than or equal to the detection setting)

3: Frequency/speed detection (1)

(Frequency/speed less than or equal to the detection setting)

4: Frequency/speed detection (2)

(Frequency/speed equal to detection setting)

5: Frequency/speed detection (2)

(Frequency/speed more than or equal to the detection setting)

6: Frequency/speed detection (2)

(Frequency/speed less than or equal to the detection setting)

7: Setting reached

8: Torque detection

9: Torque detection (absolute value)

10: During power failure

11: Overload protection pre-alarm

12: During retry

13: In reverse operation

14: Protection operation code

15: ―

16: In operation

17: (For expanded options)

18: Timer 1 elapsed

19: Timer 2 elapsed

20: Second setting block being selected

21: Cooling fan failed

Initialized data

7

1

0

8

2

3

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

―

―

―

―

―

×

×

×

×

×

－ 196 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Multifunction output setting item

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

H-06 [V/f] Frequency_ detection(1)

[IM] [EDM]

Speed_detection(1)

22: DB abnormal state

-Maximum_frequency <A-00> to

+Maximum_frequency <A-00>

-Maximum_speed <A-00> to

+Maximum_speed <A-00>

Initialized data

0.0

0

Unit

Hz r/min

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

H-07

H-08

H-09

H-10

H-11

H-12

[V/f] Frequency_ detection(2)

[IM] [EDM]

Speed_detection(2)

[V/f] Frequency_ detection_width

[IM] [EDM]

Speed_detection_ width

Torque_detection

(with_polarity)

Torque_detection

(absolute_value)

Overload_ protection_prealarm_operation_ level_setting

Maximum_ frequency_ reduction_rate

-Maximum_frequency <A-00> to

+Maximum_frequency <A-00>

-Maximum_speed <A-00> to

+Maximum_speed <A-00>

0.0 to 10.0

0 to 600

-205 to 205

0 to 205

0 to 100

50.0 to 100.0

0.0

0

0.0

0

0

0

50

90.0

Hz r/min

Hz r/min

%

%

%

%

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

The multifunction output terminals (1) and (2) ([MO1] and [MO2]) on the control board <VFC66-Z> are set as output terminals of multifunction output functions specified in the Multifunction_output_terminal(1) through

(6)_function_selection (<H-00> through <H-05>).

・ [MO1] through [MO6] are open collector output terminals.

The multifunction output terminals (3) through (6) ([MO3] through [MO6]) are terminals on the optional board.

When the PLCL_function_usage_selection <i-00> is set to "ON"

When the PLCL_function_usage_selection <i-00> is set to "ON," the above setting items are ignored, and the multifunction output terminals ([MO1] through [MO6]) on the control board <VFC66-Z> and the optional board are used as output terminals from the PLC function.

Also, the multifunction output terminals described below can be used as input terminals to the PLC function.

－ 197 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

◆ Connection of multifunction output terminals (1) through (2)

The figures below show typical connection examples of the multifunction output signals.

For the multifunction output, open collector transistor output is used. To use this, an external direct-current power supply is required. The maximum permitted voltage is 24 V, and the maximum permitted current per terminal is 20 mA.

1.Connection with PLC (Source mode) 2.Connection with PLC (Sink mode)

3.Connection with a relay

Details of multifunction output settings

・ Selecting item: 1, 4

Frequency/speed detection (1) (2) (Frequency/speed equal to detection setting)

When the frequency/speed becomes equal to the setting values of the Frequency/Speed_detection(1)

<H-06> and Frequency/Speed_detection(2) <H-07> within the range from -Frequency/Speed_detection_ width <H-08> to a +Frequency/Speed_detection_width <H-08>, output is enabled.

For output, a hysteresis width corresponding to 0.2 % of the setting of Maximum_frequency/speed <A-00> is provided.

"Top" in the following figure indicates a value of the Maximum_frequency/speed <A-00>.

－ 198 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Selecting item: 2, 5

Frequency/speed detection (1) (2) (Frequency/speed more than or equal to the detection setting)

When frequency/speed becomes larger than settings of the Frequency/Speed_detection(1) <H-06> and

Frequency/Speed_detection(2) <H-07>, output is enabled.

Frequency/speed is detected as a signed number, not an absolute value.

－ 199 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Selecting item: 3, 6

Frequency/Speed_detection(1)(2) (Frequency/speed less than or equal to the detection setting)

When frequency/speed becomes smaller than settings of the Frequency/Speed_detection(1) <H-06> and

Frequency/Speed_detection(2) <H-07>, output is enabled.

Frequency/speed is detected as a signed number, not an absolute value.

・ Selecting item: 7

Setting reached

When frequency/speed reaches around a frequency/speed command value (within ±0.1 %), output is enabled.

・ Selecting item: 8

Torque detection

When a calculated torque/torque command becomes larger than a setting of the Torque_detection(with_polarity)

<H-09>, output is enabled.

[V/f] does not assure the accuracy of calculated torque.

When accuracy assurance of torque is required, the vector mode should be used.

・ Selecting item: 9

Torque detection (absolute value)

When an absolute value of a calculated torque/torque command becomes larger than a setting of the Torque_ detection(absolute_value) <H-10>, output is enabled.

[V/f] does not assure the accuracy of calculated torque.

When accuracy assurance of torque is required, the vector control should be used.

－ 200 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Selecting item: 10

During power failure

When voltage of the direct-current part is in the following conditions, output is enabled:

・ [200 V class]: 180 V or less

・ [400 V class]: 360 V or less

When voltage of the direct-current part is in the following conditions, output is not available:

・ [200 V class]: 200 V or higher

・ [400 V class]: 400 V or higher

However, when power is no longer supplied from the control board <VFC66-Z>, output is not available.

・ Selecting item: 11

Overload pre-alarm

When an overload condition described in the section of the

Overload_protection_setting <F-03> occurs and a value of the overload counter exceeds a level specified in the

Overload_protection_pre-alarm_operation_level_setting

<H-11>, output is enabled.

A count value for activating overload protection (overtorque protection) shall be 100 %.

Suppose that the overload protection is set to be activated in a condition where 150 % of current is output for 60 seconds and that 50 % is set to the Overload_protection_pre-alarm_ operation_level_setting <H-11>. In this case, when 150 % of current is output for 30 seconds (i.e., 50 % of 60 seconds of the overload protection activation time), output is enabled.

・ Selecting item: 12

During retry

For ten seconds after the protection retry operation, output is enabled. For the protection retry operation, refer to the section of the area F.

・ Selecting item: 13

In reverse operation

・ [V/f]

When the output frequency is a negative value, output is enabled.

・ [IM] [EDM]

When the motor is running in reverse, output is enabled. To prevent chattering, a hysteresis characteristic of 12 r/min (control without speed sensor or control with speed sensor) is provided around a speed of 0.

・ Selecting item: 14

Protection operation code

When a failure occurs or a protection operation is activated, this function uses four multifunction output terminals to output a code corresponding to the activated protection.

Unlike other functions, this function requires four multifunction output terminals and you should set

"Protection operation code" to all of them.

－ 201 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

List of output code

Contents

Overcurrent protection

IGBT protection operation

MO1

ON

OFF

Inverter overheat protection OFF

Parallel slave unit abnormality

Charging resistance overheat protection

OFF

OFF

Direct-current part overvoltage protection

Overload protection

FCL protection operation

Overtorque protection

Motor overheat protection

Current sensor abnormality

Open phase

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

Start delay protection

Overspeed protection

[V/f] Overfrequency protection

Speed control error

Start error without sensor

Sensor error

PG error

ON

CPU abnormality

Memory abnormality

Optional error

Communication timeout error

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

Insufficient voltage (power failure)

Setting error

External failure 1

External failure 2

External failure 3

External failure 4

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

・ Selecting item: 16

In operation

While the motor is running, output is enabled.

・ Selecting item: 18

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

MO2

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

－ 202 －

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

MO3

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

MO4

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Timer 1 elapsed

When cumulative operation time exceeds a value specified in the Cumulative_operation_timer(1) <F-04>, output is enabled.

・ Selecting item: 19

Timer 2 elapsed

When cumulative operation time exceeds a value specified in the Cumulative_operation_timer(2) <F-05>, output is enabled.

・ Selecting item: 20

Second setting block selection

When the second setting block is selected as the active setting block , output is enabled.

・ Selecting item: 21

Cooling fan failed

When the cooling fan failed, output is enabled.

・ Selecting item: 22

DB abnormal state

When the dynamic brake (DB) optional unit <VFDB2009> has an abnormality, output is enabled.

5.3.10 Area i (setting area for internal PLC, droop control, and mechanical loss compensation)

In the area i, you can set parameters related to the internal PLC function, droop control, and functions specific to the vector mode.

■ <i-00> and <i-01>

PLC function selection

Display i-00 i-01

Contents

PLCL_function_ usage_selection

PLCH_function_ usage_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

0: Unused

1: PLCH ON

2: PLCH ON

(PLCH output is considered as frequency/speed command input)

Initialized data

OFF

0

Unit

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

×

PLCL_function_usage_selection <i-00>

When using the PLCL function, select "ON." Typically, set it to "OFF."

PLCH_function_usage_selection <i-01>

When using the PLCH function, select "1" or "2." Typically, set it to "0."

・ When "1" is selected to <i-01>

Output "o00001" from the internal PLC function becomes a frequency/speed command value via the internal change rate limits (basic setting items <3.Acc1>, <4.dEc1>, and others).

When using this function with basic setting items, select "1."

・ When "2" is selected to <i-01>

Output "o00001" from the internal PLC function becomes a frequency/speed command value.

To ensure that a frequency/speed command generated in the internal PLC function is not affected by the change rate limits, select "2."

For details, refer to another manual "Control Block Editor Function Manual."

－ 203 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

PLCH speed control selection

■ <i-02> through <i-06>

Droop control setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

OFF

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

× i-02 i-03 i-04 i-05 i-06

Droop_control_ usage_selection

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

0.0 to 100.0

Droop_start_ frequency/ speed

Droop_rate_ changeover_ frequency/ speed

0.0 to 100.0

Droop_rate 0.0 to 50.0

Droop_start_torque 0.0 to 90.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

―

%

%

%

%

○

○

○

○

Set values of the Droop_start_frequency/speed <i-03> and the Droop_rate_changeover_frequency/speed

<i-04>, as a ratio to the Maximum_frequency/speed <A-00>.

Specify each droop control. For example, these settings are used to keep a balance of torque from two motors.

Droop_control_usage_selection <i-02>

Select whether droop control is enabled or not.

Droop_start_frequency/speed <i-03>

When frequency/speed becomes more than or equal to a value of the Droop_start_frequency/speed <i-03>, droop control starts.

When it becomes below a value specified in <i-03> as a result of the droop control, it is limited to the value.

Droop_rate_changeover_frequency/speed <i-04>

When a frequency/speed command becomes more than or equal to a setting of the Droop_rate_changeover_ frequency/speed <i-04>, a setting of the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/Speed_command <0.SrEF> becomes a standard amount of droop.

When it is lower than or equal to a setting of the Droop_rate_changeover_frequency/speed <i-04>, a value specified in <i-04> becomes a standard.

When all areas are to be drooped at a rate to the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/Speed_command

<0.SrEF>, "0.0" should be set to the Droop_rate_changeover_frequency/speed <i-04>.

Conversely, when they are to be drooped at a rate of the Maximum_frequency/speed <A-00>, "100.0" should

－ 204 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters be set to the Droop_rate_changeover_frequency/speed <i-04>.

Droop_rate <i-05>

Set the amount of droop when a torque command reaches 100 %, as a ratio of droop amount to the standard frequency/speed. The standard becomes a setting of the Frequency_command <0.FrEF>/Speed_command

<0.SrEF> when frequency/speed is more than or equal to a setting of the Droop_rate_changeover_frequency/ speed <i-04>, and it becomes a setting of <i-04> when frequency/speed is lower than or equal to <i-04>.

Droop_start_torque <i-06>

When torque is below a setting of <i-06>, droop control is not activated.

Droop control characteristics

Droop control

[V/f] provides droop control as a simple way, but it does not assure accuracy of droop amount. When accuracy assurance of droop amount is required, [V/f] should be changed to [IM].

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-07>

[IM] [EDM] Operation mode (speed control/torque control) selection

SettingBand or selecting item Display Contents i-07 Operation_mode_ selection

0: Speed control (ASR) mode

1: Torque command is prioritized to negative direction

2: Torque command is prioritized to positive direction

3: Torque control (ATR) mode

4: Speed/torque control contact change

Initialized data

0

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Select an operation mode (speed control/torque control/priority). These functions can be switched through external contacts in combination with multifunction input.

－ 205 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Operation mode selection

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-08>

[IM] [EDM] Torque command input place selection

Display Contents i-08 Torque_command_ input_place_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: Analog input (1) control board

<VFC66-Z> terminal [AIN1]

1: Analog input (2) <IO66-Z>, digital communication option terminal

[AIN2]

2: Digital communication option

3: Internal PLC output

Initialized data

1

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Set a torque command input place in the torque control mode.

・ AIN1: Input from the terminal [AIN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ AIN2: Input from the terminal [AIN2] on <IO66-Z> and the digital communication optional board.

・ Digital communication option: Input from the digital communication option.

・ Internal PLC output: Torque command from the PLC. For details, refer to the "VF66PCTool Operating

Manual."

When the analog input (1) and analog input (2) are selected to the Torque_command_input_place_selection, analog input characteristics should be 0 to ±10 V.

For torque command characteristics when a torque command is input from the terminal block and the analog option, refer to the figure in the following descriptions of <i-09>.

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-09>

[IM] [EDM] Analog input torque command gain

Display Contents i-09 Analog_input_ torque_command_ gain

SettingBand or selecting item

50.0 to 200.0

Initialized data

150.0

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

－ 206 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Set torque command gain to analog input. The figure to the right shows its characteristics.

When a torque command is input with analog voltage, positive torque is developed by negative voltage.

When the analog input (1) and analog input (2) are selected to the Torque_command_input_place_selection, analog input characteristics should be 0 to ±10 V.

When "100.0" is set to the Analog_input_torque_command_ gain <i-09>, input voltage of -10 V causes a torque command to reach 100 %.

Analog input torque comma nd gain

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-10> through <i-12>

[IM] [EDM] Changing JOG speed control gain

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

15

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

○ i-10 i-11 i-12

Speed_control_ proportion_gain(2)

Speed_control_ integral_time_ constant(2)

System_inertia_ moment(2)

1 to 100

20 to 10000

0 to 65535

40

10

― msec gm 2

○

○

Set speed control proportion gain used for JOG operation when "1" is selected to the JOG_proportion_gain_ selection <i-13>.

For speed control proportion gain, refer to the speed control proportion gain setting described in {5.3.1 Basic

Setting Area}.

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-13>

[IM] [EDM] JOG proportion gain selection

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

データ

0

Unit

Driving

ReWrite i-13 JOG-proportion_ gain_selection

0: Use <7.ASrP> through <9.ASrJ> of the basic setting area

1: Use the Speed_control_ proportion_gain(2) <i-10> through

System_inertia_moment(2) <i-12>

2: Special mode

― ○

Set proportion gain, time constant, and inertia moment used for JOG operation.

・ When "0" is selected to <i-13>: The setting values of the Speed_control_proportion_gain(1) <7.ASrP>,

Speed_control_integral_time_constant(1) <8.ASrI>, and System_inertia_moment(1) <9.ASrJ> are used.

・ When "1" is selected to <i-13>: The setting values of <i-10> through <i-12> are used.

・ When "2" is selected to <i-13>: Special mode. The setting values of <i-10> through <i-12> are used for JOG

－ 207 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters operation. The setting values of <i-10> through <i-12> are used even when a speed command is 5.56 % or less.

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-14> and <i-15>

[IM] [EDM] Speed control (ASR) selection

Display Contents i-14 i-15

ASR_cancelation_ usage_selection

ASR_feed-forward_ usage_selection

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

Initialized data

ON

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

The inverter <VF66B> has a robust speed control (MFC control) which combines feed forward with cancellation using a disturbance observer.

The cancellation and feed forward can be turned off separately. When both are turned off, a control function equal to the typical PI control will be provided. Refer to the section of the speed control proportion gain in

{5.3.1 Basic Setting Area}.

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-16> and <i-17>

[IM] [EDM] Variable structure proportion gain adjustment

Display Contents i-16 i-17

Variable_structure_ proportion_gain_ start_speed

Variable_structure_ proportion_gain_ minimun_gain_ percentage

SettingBand or selecting item

0.01 to 100.00

0 to 500

When "0" (S mode without Sensor) is set to the PG_selection

<A-10>, a setting value of the Variable_structure_proportion_ gain_minimun_gain_percentage <i-17> is 0.2 times a specified value.

Adjust variable structure proportion gain which changes proportion gain depending on a deviation between a speed command and motor speed.

Initialized data

5.00

100

Unit

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

Variable structure proportion gain

－ 208 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ [IM] <i-18>

[IM] Initial excitation mode selection (vector control with speed sensor)

Display Contents i-18 Initial_excitation_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

0: AC initial excitation

1: DC initial excitation

Initialized data

1

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Select an initial excitation mode.

・ When "0" is selected to <i-18>: For AC initial excitation, when the motor is rotated during initial excitation, the frequency is changed to suit the motor speed to ensure that torque is not developed.

・ When "1" is selected to <i-18>: For DC initial excitation, even when the motor is rotated during initial excitation, direct-current for excitation current is kept.

In the vector control without speed sensor, the AC initial excitation mode cannot be selected.

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-19> through <i-21>

For the overtorque protection (oT) and droop control, you can apply mechanical loss compensation to the torque command from which mechanical loss is subtracted.

When torque is controlled, no compensation to torque command input is provided. Also, no compensation to torque command monitor display is provided.

[IM] [EDM] Mechanical loss compensation setting

Display Contents i-19 i-20 i-21

Mechanical_loss_ compensation_ usage_selection

Mechanical_loss_ offset_amount

Gradient_of_ mechanical_loss

SettingBand or selecting item

OFF: Unused

ON: Used

0 to 100

0 to 100

Initialized data

OFF

0

0

Unit

―

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

○

Mechanical_loss_compensation_usage_selection <i-19>

Select whether mechanical loss compensation is used or not. When it is not used, overtorque protection (oT) and droop control are performed with a value not including mechanical loss compensation.

－ 209 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Mechanical_loss_offset_amount <i-20>

Set mechanical loss offset amount when speed is 0, where the rated torque shall be 100 %.

Gradient_of_mechanical_loss <i-21>

Set a torque at the maximum speed that accounts for the motor speed proportion out of the mechanical loss.

Mechanical loss compensation

■ [IM] [EDM] <i-22> through <i-32>

[IM] [EDM] Position control setting

Display Contents i-22 i-23 i-24 i-25 i-26 i-27 i-28 i-29 i-30 i-31

Positioning_speed

(0)

Positioning_speed

(1)

Positioning_ acceleration_time

Positioning_ deceleration_time

Creep_speed

Number_of_ moving_pulse_ within_a_creep_ period

Number_of_stop_ pulse

Positioning_ emergency_stop_ selection

Proportion_gain_ for_positioning

Integral_time_ constant_for_

SettingBand or selecting item

16 to 200

0.1 to 10.0

2 to 16

40 to 400

-50 to 50

OFF: Without positioning emergency stop

ON: With positioning emergency stop

1 to 100

20 to 10000

Initialized data

100

100

0.5

0.5

2

40

0

OFF

15

40

Unit r/min r/min sec sec r/min

―

―

―

― msec

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

－ 210 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

[IM] [EDM] Position control setting

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item i-32 positioning

System_moment_ of_inertia_for_ positioning

0 to 65535

Initialized data

10

Unit gm 2

<i-22> through <i-32> are positioning control settings when <ASYC66-Z> is used in the special mode.

Normally, do not change its Initialized data.

Driving

ReWrite

○

5.3.11 Area J (setting area for digital communication options)

In the area J, you can set parameters of inverter digital communication options.

■ <J-00> through <J-15>

Display Setting item

J-00

J-01

J-02

J-03

J-04

Digital_ communication_ option_selection

ASYC66-Z/

CC66-Z

_option_baud_rate

OPCN66-Z

_option_baud_rate

SettingBand or selecting item

0: OFF

1: OPCN66-Z

2: ASYC66-Z

3: DNET66-Z

4: PBUS66-Z

5: IO66-Z

6: BCD66-Z

7: CC66-Z

8: EIP66-Z

ASYC66-Z

0: 1200 bps

1: 2400 bps

2: 4800 bps

3: 9600 bps

4: 19200 bps

5: 38400 bps

0: 125 kbps

1: 250 kbps

CC66-Z

0: 156 kbps

1: 625 kbps

2: 2.5 Mbps

3: 5 Mbps

4: 10 Mbps

5: 10 Mbps

2: 500 kbps

3: 1 Mbps

4: (For special adjustment)

0 to 126 PBUS66-Z

_slave_address

OPCN66-Z_option_ input

3 to 19

Initialized data

0

4

3

2

14

Unit

―

―

―

―

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

○

×

×

×

－ 211 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Display

J-05

J-06

J-07

J-08

J-09

J-10

J-11

J-12

J-13

J-14

Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

OPCN66-Z_option_ output

Reading_set_ mode_selection

ASYC66-Z ,

OPCN66-Z

_transmission_ selection

CC66-Z

_CC-Link_version

_number_of_ occupied_stations_ selection

EIP66-Z

_IP_address_ setting (upper_2_ bytes)

ASYC66-Z ,

OPCN66-Z ,

PBUS66-Z ,

CC66-Z

Communication_ mode_selection

EIP66-Z

IP_address_setting

(lower_2_bytes)

DNET66-Z

_output_instance_ number_setting

2 to 12

0 to 2

.

Refer to each operation manual of

ASYC66-Z , OPCN66-Z , CC66-Z , EIP66-Z

Refer to each operation manual of

ASYC66-Z , OPCN66-Z , PBUS66-Z ,

CC66-Z , EIP66-Z .

DNET66-Z

_input_instance_ number_setting

0: Instance No.20

1: Instance No.21

2 through 10: TOYO original communication mode

0: Instance No.70

1: Instance No.71

2 through 15: TOYO original communication mode

-126 to 127 DNET66-Z

_speed_scale_ setting

DNET66-Z

_monitor_data_ number_setting

HighSpeed_ response_input_ selection

Date/Time_data_

0 to 119

0 to 1

0: Without date/time data

Initialized data

6

0

0

0

0

0

3

3

0

0

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

×

－ 212 －

Display Setting item

J-15

J-16

J-17

J-18

J-19 selection_from_ communication

Connected_ number_of_ outside_DB

(Dynamic_Brake)_ units_VFDB2009

EIP66-Z_subnet_ mask_setting

(upper_2_bytes)

EIP66-Z_subnet_ mask_setting

(lower_2_bytes)

EIP66-Z_default_ gate_way_setting

(upper_2_bytes)

EIP66-Z_default_ gate_way_setting

(lower_2_bytes)

SettingBand or selecting item

1: With date/time data

-6 to 6

Subnet mask setting in hexadecimal .

Default gate way setting in hexadecimal .

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Initialized data

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

0

0

0

0

0

―

―

―

―

―

○

×

×

×

×

Digital_communication_option_selection <J-00>

Even when this function is set to "OFF," the digital communication option can be selected for a speed command or operation command input, and multifunction input can be also used. However, optional errors are not checked.

To check optional errors, select a value supporting an installed option.

When a value other than "0" is selected without an option connected, an optional error occurs to cause the inverter to trip.

< J-01> through <J-08>

These settings are enabled when <ASYC66-Z>, <OPCN66-Z>, <PBUS66-Z>, <CC66-Z> and <EIP66-Z> are used. For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of each option. Normally, do not change its Initialized data.

< J-09> through <J-12>

These settings are enabled when <DNET66-Z> is used. For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of

<DNET66-Z>.

[IM] [EDM] HighSpeed_response_input_selection <J-13>

When "1" (Analog input (2) <IO66-Z>, digital communication option terminal [AIN2]) is set to the Torque_ command_input_place_selection <i-08>, it is recommended that "1" be selected to the HighSpeed_ response_input_selection <J-13>. When "2" (Digital communication option) is set to <i-08>, it is recommended that "0" be selected to <J-13>.

With these settings, a torque command value can be input more quickly.

In [V/f], <J-13> is not used.

Date/Time_data_selection_from_communication <J-14>

Select whether date/time data from the digital communication option exists or not.

Connected_number_of_outside_DB(Dynamic_Brake)_units_VFDB2009 <J-15>

Select the number of connections of <VFDB2009> as an absolute value.

When a negative value is set, if a communication with <VFDB2009> cannot be established or if it is protected, this function can stop the inverter to activate the [86A] relay.

For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of VFDB2009.

－ 213 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Subnet_mask_setting <J-16><J-17>

Default_gate_way_setting <J-18><J-19>

These settings are enabled when <EIP66-Z> are used.For details, refer to the "Instruction Manual" of option.

5.3.12 Area L (setting area for input and output gain)

In the area L, you can set parameters such as analog input/output gain and offset of the inverter.

■ <L-00>

Vdc detection gain setting

Display Contents

L-00

SettingBand or selecting item

Vdc_detection_gain 80.0 to 120.0

Initialized data

100.0

Unit

%

Driving

ReWrite

×

Vdc_detection_gain <L-00>

This parameter indicates detection adjustment gain of direct-current voltage detected by the inverter.

By inputting voltage between the direct-current terminals [+2] and [-] during memory initialization, this Vdc detection gain is back calculated and the resulted value is set to this parameter. Normally, use it without changing the initialized value.

When the main circuit board <MAC66> or the gate board <GAC66> is replaced, an error may occur between

"Vdc" display on the console and the actual voltage between direct-current terminals [+2] and [-]. In this case, to adjust direct-current voltage detection gain without initializing memory, refer to the descriptions of auto adjustment of direct-current voltage detection gain in {5.3.16 Area S}.

■ <L-01> through <L-20>

Display Setting item

L-01

L-02

L-03

L-04

L-05

L-06

L-07

L-08

L-09

L-10

Analog_input(1)_ gain

Analog_input(1)_ offset

Analog_output(1)_ gain

Analog_output(1)_ offset

Analog_input(2)_ gain

Analog_input(2)_ offset

Analog_input(3)_ gain

Analog_input(3)_ offset

Analog_output(2)_ gain

Analog_output(2)_ offset

SettingBand or selecting item

50.00 to 150.00

-50.00 to 50.00

50.0 to 150.0

-50.0 to 50.0

50.00 to 150.00

-50.00 to 50.00

50.00 to 150.00

-50.00 to 50.00

50.0 to 150.0

-50.0 to 50.0

Initialized data

Adjusted

Adjusted

Adjusted

Adjusted

100.00

0.00

100.00

0.00

100.0

0.0

Unit

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

－ 214 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Display Setting item

L-11

L-12

L-13

L-14

L-15

L-16

L-17

L-18

L-19

L-20

Analog_output(3)_ gain

Analog_output(3)_ offset

Analog_input(4)_ gain

Analog_input(4)_ offset

Analog_input(5)_ gain

Analog_input(5)_ offset

Analog_output(4)_ gain

Analog_output(4)_ offset

Analog_output(5)_ gain

Analog_output(5)_ offset

SettingBand or selecting item

50.0 to 150.0

-50.0 to 50.0

50.00 to 150.00

-50.00 to 50.00

50.00 to 150.00

-50.00 to 50.00

50.0 to 150.0

-50.0 to 50.0

50.0 to 150.0

-50.0 to 50.0

Initialized data

100.0

0.0

100.00

0.00

100.00

0.00

100.0

0.0

100.0

0.0

Unit

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

<L-01> through <L-20> are setting areas for adjusting analog input/output gain and offset.

These values are automatically set by analog output adjustment and analog input adjustment of the area S.

Therefore, normally you do not have to set them manually.

■ <L-21>

Inverter operation mode monitor setting

Display Contents

L-21 Inverter_operation_ mode_monitor (for read-out only)

SettingBand or selecting item

SnPL (simple mode)

FuLL (full mode)

Initialized data

SnPL

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Inverter_operation_mode_monitor <L-21>

This parameter only displays the operation mode. When the inverter operation mode is the full mode, "FuLL" is displayed.

For how to change to the "full mode," refer to {4.1.4 Changing Parameter Simple Mode and Full Mode}.

5.3.13 Area n (monitor adjustment area)

In the area n, you can read out parameters of inverter capacity and mode setting.

－ 215 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <n-00>

Inverter control method check

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data o n-00 Inverter_control_ mode (for read-out only) o: V/f control

V: Induction motor vector control

E: ED motor vector control

Inverter_control_mode <n-00>

By reading out this setting, you can check the inverter control method.

This parameter is for read-out only. You cannot use it for writing. Writing is always prohibited.

To change the inverter control method, refer to {4.1.5 Changing Inverter Control Methods}.

Unit

―

■ <n-01>

Inverter capacity and voltage class check

Display Contents n-01 Inverter Capacity/

Voltage_class (for read-out only)

SettingBand or selecting item

2r222 to 18022

2r244 to 100044

Initialized data

Value correspo nding to the inverter rating

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

Driving

ReWrite

×

Capacity/Voltage_class <n-01>

By reading out this setting, you can check the inverter capacity and voltage class.

This parameter is for read-out only. You cannot use it for writing. Writing is always prohibited.

When changing the inverter capacity and voltage class specified for the control board <VFC66-Z> due to replacement of spare parts, you should first initialize memory.

For how to initialize memory, refer to {8.3 How to Initialize Inverter Main Unit}.

5.3.14 Area o (special adjustment area)

The area o is for special adjustment.

Setting of special adjustment analog output address and special adjustment console board output address

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

Unit

Driving

ReWrite o-00 0 to 65535 (H ’ FFFF) ― ― ○ o-01 o-02

Special_ adjustment_ analog_output_ address_H

Special_ adjustment_ analog_output_ address_L

Special_ adjustment_SET66-

0 to 65535 (H ’ FFFF) ― ― ○

－ 216 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Setting of special adjustment analog output address and special adjustment console board output address

Display Contents SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

Unit

Driving

ReWrite o-03

Z_output_address_

H

Special_ adjustment_SET66-

Z_output_address_

L o-04 to o-53

― These parameters are only for internal special adjustment. Normally, do not change its Initialized data.

― ― ―

The parameters of the area o are only for special adjustment and special applications. You cannot change them. Also, they do not appear in the seven-segment display on the console.

Each Initialized data should remain unchanged. Trying to write the data will result in an error.

5.3.15 Area P (setting area for internal PLC and P register)

In the area P, you can set constants of the inverter internal PLC function.

■ <P-00> through <P-99>

Setting area for internal PLC and P register

Display

P-00 to

P-99

Contents

P-register_setting

SettingBand or selecting item

Refer to the descriptions of the PLC function in another manual "VF66PCTool Operating

Manual."

Initialized data

―

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

―

The area P is used for constants setting of the internal PLC function.

For details of the internal PLC function, refer to the "VF66PCTool Operating Manual." When the internal PLC function is not used, these settings are not required. You cannot input a value below "-20000" on the console.

To input values below "-20000" for the PLC function, use <VF66 Series PC Tool>. For details, refer to the

"VF66PCTool Operating Manual."

5.3.16 Area S (setting area for mode selection and analog input/output adjustment)

In the area S, you can set parameters related to special functions such as initialization, mode change,

Autotuning, and data transfer as well as parameters of analog input/output gain and offset auto adjustment.

To use parameters of the area S, you should input a password.

■ <S-00>

Special mode selection

Display Setting item

S-00 Special_mode_ selection

SettingBand or selecting item

1: Initialize the inverter

2: Change the inverter mode

Initialized data

―

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

○

－ 217 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

1

Setting item

2

3

4

10 to 15

99

101

Special mode selection

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

3: Clear protections

4: Switch the simple mode and full mode

10: [IM] [EDM] Full Mode Autotuning

(forward)

11: [IM] [EDM] Full Mode Autotuning

(reverse)

12: Direct Current Mode Autotuning

(forward)

13: Direct Current Mode Autotuning

(reverse)

14: [EDM] Motor D-axis Measurement

Mode Autotuning (forward)

15: [EDM] Motor D-axis Measurement

Mode Autotuning (reverse)

99: Initialize the inverter (for special adjustment)

101: Data transfer to <SET66EX-Z>

102: Copy data from <SET66EX-Z>

(without area A)

103: Copy data from <SET66EX-Z>

(with area A)

104: Compare data with <SET66EX-Z>

Special_mode_selection <S-00>

Setting items of <S-00> are described below.

In these items, set or change various functions of the inverter.

◆ Setting items of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>

Initialized data

Descriptions

Unit

Driving

ReWrite

For details of initialization, refer to {8.3 How to Initialize Inverter Main Unit}.

For details of changing the inverter control method, refer to {4.1.5 Changing Inverter Control

Methods}.

For details of clearing protections, refer to {5.4.1 How to Clear Protections}.

For details of switching the simple mode and full mode, refer to {4.1.4 Changing Parameter

Simple Mode and Full Mode}.

For details of Autotuning, refer to {4.3 Autotuning of Parameters (Automatic Setting)}.

This is for special adjustment only. Do not use it usually.

For details of data transfer to <SET66EX-Z>, refer to {5.4.2 Data Transfer from/to External

Console Option}.

－ 218 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Setting

102

103

104 item

Descriptions

For details of copying data (without area A) from <SET66EX-Z>, refer to {5.4.2 Data Transfer from/to External Console Option}.

For details of copying data (with area A) from <SET66EX-Z>, refer to {5.4.2 Data Transfer from/to External Console Option}.

For details of comparing data with <SET66EX-Z>, refer to {5.4.2 Data Transfer from/to

External Console Option}.

When you input a different number from "1040" to <S-00> and press the [SET] key, "P-Err" (password error) is displayed.

■ <S-01> and <S-02>

Cumulative timer clear setting

Display Contents

S-01

S-02

Cumulative_ operation_timer(1)_ clear

Cumulative_ operation_timer(2)_ clear

SettingBand or selecting item

1: Clear the Cumulative_operation_ timer(1)

1: Clear the Cumulative_operation_ timer(2)

Initialized data

―

―

Unit

―

―

Before clearing the cumulative_operation_timer(1)<S-01> or (2)<S-02>, enter the password "1040" into

<S-01> or <S-02> respectively.

Otherwise, "P-Err" (password error) is displayed.

Driving

ReWrite

○

○

Cumulative_operation_timer(1)_clear <S-01>

Before clearing the cumulative_operation_timer(1)<S-01>, enter the password "1040".

When "1" is set to <S-01> after entering the password "1040", a count value of the cumulative operation timer

(1) can be cleared.

Cumulative_operation_timer(2)_clear <S-02>

Before clearing the cumulative_operation_timer(2)<S-02>, enter the password "1040".

When "1" is set to <S-02> after entering the password "1040", a count value of the cumulative operation timer

(2) can be cleared.

■ <S-04>

ROM rewrite switch

Display Contents

S-04 ROM_rewrite_ switch

SettingBand or selecting item

When "1040" is input after power-on, ROM can be rewritten.

Initialized data

―

Unit

―

Driving

ReWrite

×

ROM_rewrite_switch <S-04>

To transfer a program of the PLC function to ROM, you should specify "1040" to the ROM_rewrite_switch

<S-04>.

For details of the PLC function, refer to the "VF66PCTool Operating Manual."

－ 219 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ <S-03>, <S-05> through <S-17>

Direct-current voltage adjustment, speed control gain auto adjustment, and analog gain and offset auto adjustment

Display Setting item SettingBand or selecting item

Initialized data

Unit

S-03 Vdc_gain_ adjustment

Direct-current voltage detection value ― V

Driving

ReWrite

×

S-05

S-06

S-07

―

Analog_input(1)_ adjustment

Analog_output(1)_ adjustment

―

1: Offset adjustment

Input a value 1000 times voltage (V): Gain adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

2: Gain adjustment

―

―

―

―

―

―

×

×

×

S-08

S-09

S-10

S-11

Analog_input(2)_ adjustment

Analog_output(2)_ adjustment

Analog_input(3)_ adjustment

Analog_output(3)_ adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

Input a value 1000 times voltage (V): Gain adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

2: Gain adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

Input a value 1000 times voltage (V): Gain adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

2: Gain adjustment

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

×

×

×

×

S-12

S-13

S-14

S-15

S-16

S-17

Analog_input(4)_ adjustment

Analog_output(4)_ adjustment

Analog_input(5)_ adjustment

Analog_output(5)_ adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

Input a value 1000 times voltage (V): Gain adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

2: Gain adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

Input a value 1000 times voltage (V): Gain adjustment

1: Offset adjustment

2: Gain adjustment

Special adjustment ―

Changing_ parameter_upon_ power_suppply_ from_control_ power_terminal_

[MR]/[MT]

By inputting "1040" after power-on, the setting parameters become changeable.

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

×

×

×

×

○

×

With the software version No.02-A1 or higher, you can change setting parameters while the power is supplied from the control power terminals [MR] and [MT], regardless of a setting of <S-17>.

－ 220 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

For operating procedures listed below, refer to {5.4 Operation Using S Area Parameters}.

・ How to adjust direct-current voltage with <S-03>

・ How to automatically adjust analog input/output gain with <S-06> through <S-15>

－ 221 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5.4 Operation Using S Area Parameters

5.4.1 How to Clear Protections

To clear protections such as data displayed in the monitor item (Protection history display <trbLE>), perform the following steps on the console:

These steps can be performed even while the inverter is running.

Use "3" (Clear protections) of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

3.

Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

4. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-00" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 3.

Display indicating a password error

6. Press the [SET] key.

－ 222 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "3" (Clear protections).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that

.

of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

・ Clear of data such as protection histories is confirmed,

"cLEAr" is displayed for about 1.5 seconds, and then "S-00" is displayed again.

9. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

5.4.2 Data Transfer from/to External Console Option

This section describes how to exchange data between the main unit and external console option <SET66EX-

Z> which is connected to the inverter main unit.

Installation of the external console option

● Before installing <SET66EX-Z>, be sure to take any measures against static electricity.

Otherwise, circuits inside the inverter may be damaged.

When the external console option is connected

When <SET66EX-Z> has been connected to the inverter main unit, the console on the main unit cannot be used.

Also, when the main unit cannot communicate with <SET66EX-Z>, <SET66EX-Z> does not react. Check connections between them and others.

■ Transferring setting data to the external console option <SET66EX-Z>

To transfer setting data of the inverter main unit to the external console option <SET66EX-Z>, perform the following steps:

Use "101" of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

－ 223 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

1. Connect the console of the inverter main unit to

<SET66EX-Z>.

2. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

3. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

4. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

5. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-00" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 4.

Display indicating a password error

7. Press the [SET] key.

－ 224 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

8. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify "101."

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

9. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

.

・ The change is confirmed, and "VtoS" and "SurE" blink alternately.

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ The setting is confirmed, and "VtoS" is displayed.

Data is being transferred

・ Data is transferred from the inverter main unit to <SET66EX-

Z>. When it has been completed successfully, "End" is displayed.

・ When communication between the main unit and

<SET66EX-Z> is disconnected during transfer, transfer is interrupted.

(1) The inverter control method is displayed, and then it is interrupted.

(2) "rErr" blinks for ten seconds, then it is interrupted.

In either case, the inverter control method is displayed after it is interrupted, and then a monitor item is displayed.

Perform again the procedures from the first step.

Data transfer has been completed

Error indication

－ 225 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ In a few seconds, the inverter control method is displayed, and then a monitor item is displayed.

■ Copying setting data from <SET66EX-Z> to the inverter main unit (the area A is not copied)

To transfer setting data of <SET66EX-Z> to the inverter main unit, perform the following steps:

However, setting data of the area A is not copied.

To change an inverter model or motor model, use this way.

Use "102" of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of the Special_mode_selection, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

When the external console option is connected

When <SET66EX-Z> has been connected to the inverter main unit, the console on the main unit cannot be used.

Also, when the main unit cannot communicate with <SET66EX-Z>, <SET66EX-Z> does not react. Check connections between them and others.

1. Connect the console of the inverter main unit to

<SET66EX-Z>.

2. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

3. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

4. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

－ 226 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

5. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-00" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 4.

Display indicating a password error

7. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

8. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify "102."

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

9. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that

.

of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

・ The change is confirmed, and "StoV1" and "SurE" blink alternately.

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ The setting is confirmed, and "StoV1" is displayed.

Data is being transferred

－ 227 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ When the version of the inverter main unit is different from the software version number of <SET66EX-Z>, "VErr" blinks

.

・ Press the [STOP/RESET] key to interrupt copying data.

Press the [SET] key to continue to copy data.

・ Data is transferred from <SET66EX-Z> to the inverter main unit. When it has been completed successfully, "End" is displayed.

・ When communication between the main unit and

<SET66EX-Z> is disconnected during transfer, transfer is interrupted.

(1) The inverter control method is displayed, and then it is interrupted.

(2) "rErr" blinks for ten seconds, then it is interrupted.

In either case, the inverter control method is displayed after it is interrupted, and then a monitor item is displayed.

Perform again the procedures from the first step.

Data transfer has been completed

Error indication

・ Five seconds later, the inverter series name is displayed, and then contents similar to what are displayed at power-on are displayed. Refer to {4.1.2 What Are Displayed at

Power-on}.

■ Copying setting data from <SET66EX-Z> (the area A is also copied)

To transfer setting data of <SET66EX-Z> to the inverter main unit, perform the following steps:

Setting data of the area A is also copied.

When there is no change in both of the inverter model and the motor model, this way should be used.

Use "103" of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of the Special_mode_selection, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

When the external console option is connected

When <SET66EX-Z> has been connected to the inverter main unit, the console on the main unit cannot be used.

Also, when the main unit cannot communicate with <SET66EX-Z>, <SET66EX-Z> does not react. Check connections between them and others.

－ 228 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

1. Connect the console of the inverter main unit to

<SET66EX-Z>.

2. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

3. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

4. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

5. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-00" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 4.

Display indicating a password error

7. Press the [SET] key.

－ 229 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

8. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify "103."

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

9. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

.

・ The change is confirmed, and "StoV2" and "SurE" blink alternately.

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ The setting is confirmed, and "StoV2" is displayed.

・ When the version of the inverter main unit is different from

.

the software version number of <SET66EX-Z>, "VErr" blinks

・ Press the [STOP/RESET] key to interrupt copying data.

Press the [SET] key to continue to copy data.

Data is being transferred

Data transfer has been completed

－ 230 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Data is transferred from <SET66EX-Z> to the inverter main unit. When it has been completed successfully, "End" is displayed.

Setting data of the area A is also copied.

・ When communication between the main unit and

<SET66EX-Z> is disconnected during transfer, transfer is interrupted.

(1) The inverter control method is displayed, and then it is interrupted.

(2) "rErr" blinks for ten seconds, then it is interrupted.

In either case, the inverter control method is displayed after it is interrupted, and then a monitor item is displayed.

Perform again the procedures from the first step.

Error indication

・ Five seconds later, the inverter series name is displayed, and then contents similar to what are displayed at power-on are displayed. Refer to {4.1.2 What Are Displayed at

Power-on}.

－ 231 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

■ Comparing data between the inverter main unit and <SET66EX-Z>

To compare setting data between the inverter main unit and <SET66EX-Z>, perform the following steps:

This function is useful when setting data of <SET66EX-Z> shall be original data of multiple inverters.

Use "104" of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

When the external console option is connected

When <SET66EX-Z> has been connected to the inverter main unit, the console on the main unit cannot be used.

Also, when the main unit cannot communicate with <SET66EX-Z>, <SET66EX-Z> does not react. Check connections between them and others.

1. Connect the console of the inverter main unit to

<SET66EX-Z>.

2. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

3. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

4. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

5. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

6. Press the [SET] key.

－ 232 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-00" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 4.

Display indicating a password error

7. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

8. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify "104."

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

9. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is

.

pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

・ The change is confirmed, and "ComP" and "SurE" blink alternately.

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ The setting is confirmed, and "ComP" is displayed.

Data is being compared

・ Compare data of the inverter main unit with that of

<SET66EX-Z>.

When they match, "End" is displayed.

・ When only setting data of the first setting block does not match: "CErr1" blinks.

－ 233 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ When only setting data of the second setting block does not match: "CErr2" blinks.

・ Data of both blocks does not match: "CErrA" blinks.

・ When communication between the main unit and

<SET66EX-Z> is disconnected during transfer, transfer is interrupted.

(1) The inverter control method is displayed, and then it is interrupted.

(2) "rErr" blinks for ten seconds, then it is interrupted.

In either case, the inverter control method is displayed after it is interrupted, and then a monitor item is displayed.

Perform again the procedures from the first step.

Communication error indication

・ In a few seconds, the inverter control method is displayed, and then a monitor item is displayed.

5.4.3 Direct-current Voltage Detection Gain Adjustment

To change the Vdc_detection_gain <L-00> automatically, perform the following steps:

Use the Vdc_adjustment <S-03>.

For details of the Vdc_adjustment <S-03>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

Safety notice

● High voltage is applied to a direct-current voltage meter or a tester. Experts should measure voltage.

● Close the front cover before turning on the power.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Safety notice

● To measure direct-current voltage, use a direct-current voltage meter or a tester which can measure 500

－ 234 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

V or more for the 200 V class inverter and 1000 V or more for the 400 V class inverter.

Items to prepare

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Direct-current voltage meter or tester

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. Install a direct-current voltage meter or a tester between the direct-current terminals [+2] and [-] on the main circuit terminal block of the inverter.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to {3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

4. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

5. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

6. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "S-03."

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

9. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

10. Press the [SET] key.

－ 235 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-03" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-03." Follow the procedures again from the step 8.

Display indicating a password error

11. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

12. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change numbers to a value measured by the voltage meter or the tester.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

Specify "597" if the measured value is

597 V

13. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is

.

pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

・ The setting of the Vdc_detection_gain <L-00> is automatically changed, and then "S-03" is displayed again.

14. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

[V/f] Output frequency <Fout>

[IM] [EDM] Motor speed <SPd>

15. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

－ 236 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

16. Remove the installed direct-current voltage meter or tester.

17. Close the front cover.

5.4.4 Analog Input (1) Gain and Offset Adjustment

The sections {5.4.4} through {5.4.8} describe how to adjust analog input/output gain and offset automatically with area S parameters.

To change settings of the Analog_input(1)_gain <L-01> and Analog_input(1)_offset <L-02>, perform the following steps:

Use the Analog_frequency/speed_command_characteristic_selection <b-17> and the Analog_input(1)_ adjustment <S-06>.

Here, use the Analog_input(1)_adjustment <S-06> to adjust a voltage of 0 to 10 V.

For details of the Analog_frequency/speed_command_characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

Linearity of analog input command and output

When accuracy below ±0.2 % is required for linearity of analog input command and output, <IO66-Z> should be used.

Short-circuit of terminals

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before short-circuiting the terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Measuring voltage between terminals

● Great care must be taken not to touch wires and terminals when measuring voltage between terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Items to prepare

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Direct-current voltage meter or tester

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "b-00."

3. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a number, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to become

"b-17."

－ 237 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ For details of the Analog_frequency/speed_command_ characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

4. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "b-17" is confirmed, the current setting value (Initialized data is "1") is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

5. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "0" (0 to ± 10 V).

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-17" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

7. Turn off the inverter.

8. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

9. Short circuit the terminals [AIN1] and [GND] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to

{3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

10. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

11. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

－ 238 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

12. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

13. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "S-06."

・ For details of the Analog_input(1)_adjustment <S-06>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

14. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

15. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

16. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-06" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-06." Follow the procedures again from the step 14.

Display indicating a password error

17. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

18. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify "1."

－ 239 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

19. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "S-06" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed.

20. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

21. Remove the short-circuit wire between the terminals

[AIN1] and [GND].

22. Short circuit the terminals [AIN1] and [+10].

23. Install the direct-current voltage meter or tester between the terminals [AIN1] and [GND].

24. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

25. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and the first setting item of the basic setting area is displayed.

26. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

27. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "S-06."

28. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

－ 240 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

29. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

30. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-06" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-06." Follow the procedures again from the step 28.

Display indicating a password error

31. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

32. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify a value 1000 times a value measured by the voltage meter or the tester.

・ Inputting a value 1000 times a voltage value of the analog input (1) enables gain adjustment of the analog input (1).

・ When you cannot measure the voltage, specify "9930." In this case, however, accuracy will be decreased.

Specify "9983" if the measured value is

9.983 V

33. Press the [SET] key.

・ When "S-06" is displayed again, the settings of the

Analog_input(1)_gain <L-01> and Analog_input(1)_offset

<L-02> are automatically changed.

34. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

35. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

36. Remove the short-circuit wire between the terminals [AIN1] and [+10].

37. Remove the installed direct-current voltage meter or tester.

－ 241 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

38. Close the front cover.

5.4.5 Analog Input (1) Gain Adjustment (for 4 to 20 mA input characteristics)

The sections {5.4.4} through {5.4.8} describe how to adjust analog input/output gain and offset automatically with area S parameters.

For 4 to 20 mA input characteristics, perform the following steps to adjust a setting of the Analog_input(1)_ gain <L-01>:

Be sure to do this after adjusting a voltage of 0 to 10 V in the Analog_input(1)_gain <L-01> and Analog_input

(1)_offset <L-02>.

Use the Analog_frequency/speed_command_characteristic_selection <b-17> and the Analog_input(1)_gain

<L-01>.

For details of the Analog_frequency/speed_command_characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}. For details of the Analog_input(1)_gain <L-01>, refer to {5.3.12 Area L}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

Installation of current power supply

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before installing the current power supply.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before changing the switch.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Items to prepare

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Current power supply

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "b-00."

3. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a number, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to become

"b-17."

・ For details of the Analog_frequency/speed_command_ characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

4. Press the [SET] key.

－ 242 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The selection of "b-17" is confirmed, the current setting value (Initialized data is "1") is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

5. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "2" (4 to 20 mA).

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-17" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

7. Turn off the inverter.

8. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

9. Connect the current power supply between the terminals [AIN1] and [GND] on the control board

<VFC66-Z>.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to

{3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

－ 243 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

10. Move the position of the switch [SW1] to "ON" (terminal block side) using the tip of a pair of tweezers or a tool with a narrow tip (about 0.8 mm).

11. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

・ The same display as that of power-on appears on the console, and then it enters the monitor (MONI) mode.

12. Now, data of a monitor item is displayed. Press either of the [SET] key, [ ] key, or [ ] key to return to the display of the monitor item.

・ In the monitor (MONI) mode, a monitor item is displayed for one second, and then its data is displayed.

・ For details of the monitor (MONI) mode, refer to {4.1.6 Checking Operating State}. For details of monitor items, refer to {4.1.7 List of Monitor Items}.

13. Press either of the [SET] key, [ ] key, or [ ] key to display "Vin" (Analog input voltage).

・ Unless you press any key within one second while the monitor item is displayed, you cannot change it.

14. Turn on the current power supply, and input a current of 20 mA to the terminal [AIN1].

・ In the seven-segment display on the console, a voltage value of the terminal [AIN1] is displayed as data of "Vin."

・ Items displayed as "Vin" can be changed with a setting of the Analog_input_monitor_display_selection <G-16>.

Setting "1" displays Value from the analog input (1) terminal

[AIN1].

15. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, the console enters the function (FNC) mode, and then a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

16. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "L-00."

17. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to

－ 244 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters become "L-01."

・ For details of the Analog_input(1)_gain <L-01>, refer to

{5.3.12 Area L}.

18. Press the [SET] key.

・ The current setting value of <L-01> is displayed. Its

Initialized data is "100.0."

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

19. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change numbers.

・ When a numerical value of "Vin" is smaller than "10.00," set a larger value to "L-01."

・ When a numerical value of "Vin" is larger than "10.00," set a smaller value to "L-01."

20. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "L-01" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

21. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ "Vin" (Analog input voltage) is displayed.

・ About one second later, it automatically changes to the data display and a voltage value of the terminal [AIN1] is displayed.

22. When a numerical value of "Vin" is not "10.00," press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ "L-01" is displayed.

23. Repeat the steps 18 through 22 to adjust a value of <L-01> to ensure that a numerical value of "Vin" becomes "10.00."

・ Every time the [MONI/FNC] key is pressed, the setting item "L-01" and the monitor item "Vin" are displayed alternately.

－ 245 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

24. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

25. Remove the installed current power supply.

26. Close the front cover.

5.4.6 Analog Output (1) Gain and Offset Adjustment

The sections {5.4.4} through {5.4.8} describe how to adjust analog input/output gain and offset automatically with area S parameters.

To change settings of the Analog_output(1)_gain <L-03> and Analog_output(1)_offset <L-04>, perform the following steps:

Be sure to do this after adjusting offset and gain of the analog input (1).

Use the Analog_frequency/speed_command_characteristic_selection <b-17>, Analog_output(1)_ characteristics_selection <b-21>, and Analog_output(1)_adjustment <S-07>.

For details of the Analog_frequency/speed_command_characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}. For details of the Analog_output(1)_adjustment <S-07>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

Short-circuit of terminals

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before short-circuiting the terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Items to prepare

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. Short circuit the terminals [AOT1] and [AIN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to

{3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

4. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

5. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example,

－ 246 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

6. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "b-00."

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "b-17."

・ For details of the Analog_frequency/speed_command_ characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

8. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "b-17" is confirmed, the current setting value (Initialized data is "1") is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

9. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "0" (0 to ± 10 V).

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-17" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

11. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "b-21."

・ For details of the Analog_output(1)_characteristics_ selection <b-21>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

12. Press the [SET] key.

－ 247 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The selection of "b-21" is confirmed, the current setting value (Initialized data is "1") is displayed.

13. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "0"

(Output voltage).

14. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-21" is displayed again.

15. Press the [JOG/ ], [ ], and [ ] keys to specify "S-07."

・ For details of the Analog_output(1)_adjustment <S-07>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

16. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

17. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

18. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-07" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-07." Follow the procedures again from the step 16.

Display indicating a password error

－ 248 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

19. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

20. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "1" (Analog output(1) offset adjustment).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

21. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "S-07" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed.

22. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a number, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to become "b-21."

23. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "b-21" is confirmed, "0" is displayed as a current setting value.

24. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "6"

(Calibration).

25. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-21" is displayed again.

－ 249 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

26. Press the [JOG/ ], [ ], and [ ] keys to specify "S-07."

27. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

28. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

29. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-07" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-07." Follow the procedures again from the step 27.

Display indicating a password error

30. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

31. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "2" (Analog output(1) gain adjustment).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

32. Press the [SET] key.

－ 250 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is

.

pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

・ When "S-07" is displayed again, the settings of the

Analog_output(1)_gain <L-03> and Analog_output(1)_offset

<L-04> are automatically changed.

33. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

34. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

35. Remove the short-circuit wire between the terminals [AOT1] and [AIN1].

36. Close the front cover.

5.4.7 Analog Input (2) through (5) Gain and Offset Adjustment

The sections {5.4.4} through {5.4.8} describe how to adjust analog input/output gain and offset automatically with area S parameters.

Analog input (2) through (5) adjustment

Analog input (2) through (5) require <IO66-Z> and the digital communication option.

When these optional boards are not used, the settings and adjustment described below are not required.

This section describes the procedures for changing analog input (2) through (5) gain and analog input (2) through (5) offset, with the following example of the Analog_input(2)_gain <L-05> and Analog_input(2)_offset

<L-06> when <IO66-Z> is used.

Be sure to do this after adjusting offset and gain of the analog input (1).

Use the Analog_input(2)_characteristics_selection <G-03> and the Analog_input(2)_adjustment <S-08>.

For details of the Analog_input(2)_characteristics_selection <G-03>, refer to {5.3.8 Area G}. For details of the

Analog_input(2)_adjustment <S-08>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

Analog input (3) through (5) gain and offset adjustment

For analog input (3) through (5) gain and offset, refer to the area L.

Specify setting items of the area G and area S to meet analog input (3) through (5) gain and offset. Then, follow the procedures below.

Short-circuit of terminals

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before short-circuiting the terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

－ 251 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

Measuring voltage between terminals

● Great care must be taken not to touch electrical wires and terminals when measuring voltage between terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Items to prepare

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Direct-current voltage meter or tester

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "G-00."

3. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "G-03."

・ For details of the Analog_input(2)_characteristics_selection

<G-03>, refer to {5.3.8 Area G}.

4. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "G-03" is confirmed, the current setting value (Initialized data is "1") is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

5. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "0" (0 to ± 10 V).

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "G-03" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

－ 252 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

7. Turn off the inverter.

8. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

9. Short circuit the terminals [AIN2], [G], and [G-IN] on the terminal block of <IO66-Z>.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to

{3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

10. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

11. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

12. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

13. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "S-08."

・ For details of the Analog_input(2)_adjustment <S-08>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

14. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

15. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

－ 253 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

16. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-08" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-08." Follow the procedures again from the step 14.

Display indicating a password error

17. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

18. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify "1."

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

19. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "S-08" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed.

20. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

21. Remove the short-circuit wire between the terminals

[AIN2] and [GND] on <IO66-Z>.

22. Short circuit the terminal [AIN2] and the terminal [+10] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ Keep the terminals [G] and [G-IN] on <IO66-Z> short-circuited.

23. Install a direct-current voltage meter or a tester between the terminals [AIN2] and [GND].

24. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

25. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

－ 254 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and the first setting item of the basic setting area is displayed.

26. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

27. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "S-08."

28. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

29. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

30. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-08" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-08." Follow the procedures again from the step 28.

Display indicating a password error

31. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

32. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify a value 1000 times a value measured by the voltage meter or the tester.

－ 255 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ Inputting a value 1000 times a voltage value of the analog input (2) enables gain adjustment of the analog input (2).

・ When you cannot measure the voltage, specify "9930." In this case, however, accuracy will be decreased.

Specify "9983" if the measured value is

9.983 V

33. Press the [SET] key.

・ ・ When "S-08" is displayed again, the settings of the

Analog_input(2)_gain <L-05> and Analog_input(2)_offset

<L-06> are automatically changed.

34. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

35. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

36. Remove the wire between the terminal [AIN2] on <IO66-Z> and the terminal [+10] on the control board <VFC66-Z>, and the wire between the terminals [G] and [G-IN] on <IO66-Z>.

37. Remove the installed direct-current voltage meter or tester.

38. Close the front cover.

5.4.8 Analog Output (2) through (5) Gain and Offset Adjustment

The sections {5.4.4} through {5.4.8} describe how to adjust analog input/output gain and offset automatically with area S parameters.

Analog output (2) through (5) adjustment

Analog output (2) through (5) require <IO66-Z> and the digital communication option.

When these optional boards are not used, the settings and adjustment described below are not required.

This section describes the procedures for changing analog output (2) through (5) gain and analog output (2) through (5) offset, with the following example of the Analog_output(2)_gain <L-09> and Analog_output(2)_ offset <L-10> when <IO66-Z> is used.

Be sure to do this after adjusting offset and gain of the analog input (1).

Use the Analog_output(2)_characteristics_selection <G-09> and the Analog_output(2)_adjustment <S-09>.

For details of analog frequency/speed command characteristics selection, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}. For details of the analog output (2) characteristics selection, refer to {5.3.8 Area G}. For details of the analog output (2) adjustment, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}. For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing

Parameter Settings}.

Analog output (3) through (5) gain and offset adjustment

For analog output (3) through (5) gain and offset, refer to the area L.

Specify setting items of the area G and area S to meet analog output (3) through (5) gain and offset. Then,

－ 256 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters follow the procedures below.

Short-circuit of terminals

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before short-circuiting the terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Items to prepare

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

1. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

2. Short circuit the terminal [AOT2] on <IO66-Z> and the terminal [AIN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

3. Short circuit the terminals [G] and [G-OT] on <IO66-Z>.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

4. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

5. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

6. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "b-00."

7. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a number, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change it to become

"b-17."

・ For details of the Analog_frequency/speed_command_ characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

8. Press the [SET] key.

－ 257 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The selection of "b-17" is confirmed, the current setting value (Initialized data is "1") is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

9. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "0" (0 to ± 10 V).

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-17" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

11. Press the [JOG/ ], [ ], and [ ] keys to specify "G-09."

・ For details of the Analog_output(2)_characteristics_ selection <G-09>, refer to {5.3.8 Area G}.

12. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "G-09" is confirmed, the current setting value (Initialized data is "1") is displayed.

13. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "0"

(Output voltage).

14. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "G-09" is displayed again.

15. Press the [JOG/ ], [ ], and [ ] keys to specify "S-09."

－ 258 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ For details of the Analog_output(2)_adjustment <S-09>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

16. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

17. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

18. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-09" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-09." Follow the procedures again from the step 16.

Display indicating a password error

19. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

20. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "1" (Analog output(2) offset adjustment).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

21. Press the [SET] key.

－ 259 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The change is confirmed, and "S-09" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed.

22. Press the [JOG/ ], [ ], and [ ] keys to specify "G-09."

23. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "G-09" is confirmed, the current setting value "0" (Output voltage) is displayed.

24. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "6"

(Calibration).

25. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "G-09" is displayed again.

26. Press the [JOG/ ], [ ], and [ ] keys to specify "S-09."

27. Press the [SET] key.

・ "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

28. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

29. Press the [SET] key.

－ 260 －

Chapter 5 Explanation of Parameters

・ The password input is confirmed, and the screen returns to

"S-09" display.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-09." Follow the procedures again from the step 27.

Display indicating a password error

30. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

31. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "2" (Analog output(2) offset adjustment).

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

32. Press the [SET] key.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that

.

of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed

・ When "S-09" is displayed again, the settings of the

Analog_output(2)_gain <L-09> and Analog_output(2)_offset

<L-10> are automatically changed.

33. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

34. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

35. Remove the short-circuit wire between the terminal [AOT2] on <IO66-Z> and the terminal [AIN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

36. Remove the short-circuit wire between the terminals [G] and [G-OT] on <IO66-Z>.

37. Close the front cover.

－ 261 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6.1 Protection Messages and Actions

6.1.1 Displays and Behaviors in Protection Display Mode

When the inverter starts a protection operation due to an abnormality while it operates, it stops output, and the console enters the protection display mode to display the started protection.

For notification, the protection operation blinks in the seven-segment display.

For what are displayed, refer to {6.1.2 List of Protection Messages}.

Refer to this list and then take actions as described in {6.1.3 How to Handle Protection Messages}.

■ Displays in the protection display mode

When a single protection starts

The started protection operation blinks.

・ The protection message is prepended with "1."

When multiple protections start

The protection operations are numbered in the order in which they are detected, and they will blink.

・ They are displayed in turn every one second.

■ Behaviors of the inverter in the protection display mode

・ Stop output (with some exceptions)

・ Enable protection contact [86A] output

■ Operations in the protection display mode

(1) Even during a protection operation, you can press the [MONI/FNC] key to switch to the monitor (MONI) mode or the function setting (FNC) mode to operate the inverter.

・ To handle a protection operation, you should sometimes change parameter settings.

(2) Six types of protection operation data (such as output current) can be displayed, and a state when an abnormality occurs can be checked.

・ Refer to {6.2.1 How to Display Protection Operation Data}.

(3) Before performing reset, find a cause of a protection operation and take any measures.

・ For how to perform reset, refer to {6.3 How to Reset Protection Display Mode}.

－ 262 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6.1.2 List of Protection Messages

The table below lists what appear in the seven-segment display on the console when the inverter starts a protection operation due to an abnormality while it operates.

Common to all models

No. Display

1

2 ccEr1 cS2

Protection item

Memory abnormality

What are protected

Communication time error It starts when a communication time error occurs between the control board and the console board .

It starts when setting data stored in the internal memory cannot be obtained correctly.

3 CtEr [IM][EDM] It starts when the current sensor fails.

4

5

Cut

EF1

Current sensor abnormality

Open phase

External failure 1

[EDM] It starts when an output line is disconnected.

It starts when the multifunction input external failure 1 has been input.

6 EF2

7 EF3

External failure 2

External failure 3

It starts when the multifunction input external failure 2 has been input.

It starts when the multifunction input external failure 3 has been input.

8 EF4

9 EnGA

10 EnGb

11 FCL

12 FnF

13 iGbt

14 inoH

15 oc

16 oF

17 oH

18 oL

External failure 4

Emergency stop A input contact "ON"

Emergency stop B input contact "OFF"

FCL operation

It starts when the multifunction input external failure 4 has been input.

It starts when the multifunction input specified for the emergency stop A has been enabled.

It starts when the multifunction input specified for the emergency stop B has been unavailable.

Failed fan

It starts when the high-speed current limit protection (FCL) lasts for ten seconds and it lasts for two seconds around 0 Hz.

It starts when the cooling fan fails. However, it does not stop for protection.

IGBT protection operation It starts when IGBT is protected from overcurrent and the gate power supply is decreased.

Motor overheat protection It starts when the Motor_overheat_protection_operation_ selection is set to "ON" and motor temperature is over

Motor_protect_temperature < G-17 > while the temperature detection option is used.

Overcurrent protection It starts when an instantaneous value of output current becomes more than or equal to a value 3.58 times a value of the rated inverter current.

Overfrequency protection [V/f] It starts when output frequency exceeds a value of overfrequency protection setting.

Inverter overheat protection

Overload protection

It starts when temperature of IGBT becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when an effective value of output current exceeds a state where 150 % of the overload protection reference (rated

－ 263 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Common to all models

No. Display Protection item

19 oPEr

20 oS

21 ot

22 oV

23 PEr

24 PSL-

25 roH

26 SE--

27 SLSE

28 SnE

29 SPdE

30 StrF

31 tS

Optional error

Overspeed protection

Overtorque protection

Direct-current part overvoltage protection

PG error

What are protected motor current of × overload protection setting of ) is output for over 60 seconds.

However, the overload protection reference is limited to the rated output current.

It starts when a connected optional board malfunctions while the optional board is enabled.

[IM] [EDM] It starts when motor speed exceeds a value of overspeed setting.

[IM][EDM] It starts when the overtorque protection operation setting is set to ON and output torque exceeds a state where

150 % of the rated torque is developed for 60 seconds.

[200 V class] It starts when voltage of the direct-current part exceeds 400 V.

[400 V class] It starts when voltage of the direct-current part exceeds 800 V.

[EDM] It starts for no input to U, V, and W signals of the PG even after an electrical phase is repeated for two or more cycles. It starts for no input to Z signals of the PG even after a mechanical phase is repeated for two or more cycles.

CPU abnormality handling It starts when the CPU has an abnormal operation due to instantaneous reduction of control power supply 5 V. "-" in the last digit shows a number to distinguish errors.

Charging resistance overheat protection

Setting error

It starts when charging resistance is overheated for the model below 7.5 kW.

It starts when the inverter starts with incorrect settings of the rating and constants of the motor. "--" in the last two digits shows a number to represent a main cause of an incorrect setting. For details, refer to {6.1.4 Meaning of Setting Error

(SE--) Display}.

Start error without sensor [EDM] It starts when a phase detection fails at start in the control without speed sensor.

Sensor error [EDM] It starts for an abnormality of the current sensor, incorrect wiring of the PG, or an incorrect setting of motor d-axis positioning.

Speed control error

Start traffic

Communication timeout error

[IM] [EDM] It starts when a deviation between motor speed and a command value (speed control input) exceeds a setting value

(setting on the console) while the speed control abnormality detection is set to "ON."

It starts when the inverter cannot operate in ten seconds after an operation or JOG command is input.

It starts when a communication error (timeout) occurs between the optional board and the communication master while the network communication option is used.

－ 264 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Common to all models

No. Display

32 uV

Protection item

Insufficient voltage

(power failure)

What are protected

[200 V class] It starts when direct-current voltage becomes less than or equal to 180 V while the inverter is running.

[400V class] It starts when direct-current voltage becomes less than or equal to 360 V while the inverter is running.

For models over 30 kW and parallel models <15022>, <18022>, <40044> through <100044>, the protection items listed below are displayed in addition to the above list.

For models of 30 to 315 kW consisting of a single unit, the protection items (related to master units) listed in the next table are displayed.

Only models over 30 kW or parallel models

No. Display Protection item What are protected

33 GAc Gate board abnormality It starts when the protections No.34 through No.89 (except for

No.45, 58, 72, and 86) start and the protection operation relay operates.

34 Gnt

35 GnP

36 Gn1

Gate board communication abnormality (master unit)

Gate power supply abnormality (master unit)

IGBT (U/T1 phase) protection operation

(master unit)

It starts when an abnormality occurs in a communication with the gate board in the master unit.

It starts when the power supply of the gate in the master unit has an abnormality.

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the U/T1 phase IGBT in the master unit.

37 Gn2

38 Gn3

39 GnH1

40 GnH2

41 GnH3

42 GnFu

43 GFCL

IGBT (V/T2 phase) protection operation

(master unit)

IGBT (W/T3 phase) protection operation

(master unit)

Unit overheat (U/

T1phase) (master unit)

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the V/T2 phase IGBT in the master unit.

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the W/T3 phase IGBT in the master unit.

Unit overheat (V/T2 phase) (master unit)

It starts when heat sink temperature of the U/T1 phase IGBT in the master unit becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when heat sink temperature of the V/T2 phase IGBT in the master unit becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

Unit overheat (W/T3 phase) (master unit)

It starts when heat sink temperature of the W/T3 phase IGBT in the master unit becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

Blown fuse (master unit) For models over 75 kW and parallel models, it starts when the fuse of the main circuit direct-current part in the master unit is blown.

FCL operation It starts when current over 290 % of the rated inverter current is applied for two or more seconds in all units.

44 GPPE Power supply abnormality For parallel models, it starts when the power supply of the parallel control board has an abnormality.

－ 265 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Only models over 30 kW or parallel models

No. Display Protection item What are protected

45 GnFF Failed fan (master unit)

46 GnnC MC response abnormality (master unit)

For models over 75 kW and parallel models, it starts when the cooling fan in the master unit fails. However, it does not stop for protection.

For models over 75 kW and parallel models, it starts when the magnetic contactor (MC) in the master unit does not turn on.

47 GncH

48 G1t

49 G1P

50 G11

Converter overheat

(master unit)

Gate board communication abnormality (slave unit 1)

Gate power supply abnormality (slave unit 1)

IGBT (U/T1 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 1)

It starts when heat sink temperature of the converter in the master unit becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when an abnormality occurs in a communication with the gate board in the slave unit 1.

It starts when the gate power supply in the slave unit 1 has an abnormality.

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the U/T1 phase IGBT in the slave unit 1.

51 G12

52 G13

53 G1oV

IGBT (V/T2 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 1)

IGBT (W/T3 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 1)

Direct-current part overvoltage (slave unit 1)

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the V/T2 phase IGBT in the slave unit 1.

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the W/T3 phase IGBT in the slave unit 1.

54 G1H1

55 G1H2

Unit overheat (U/T1 phase) (slave unit 1)

Unit overheat (V/T2 phase) (slave unit 1)

It starts when a direct-current part is protected from overvoltage in the slave unit 1.

[200 V class] It starts when voltage of the direct-current part exceeds 400 V.

[400 V class] It starts when voltage of the direct-current part exceeds 800 V.

It starts when heat sink temperature of the U/T1 phase IGBT in the slave unit 1 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when heat sink temperature of the V/T2 phase IGBT in the slave unit 1 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

56 G1H3

57 G1Fu

58 G1FF

59 G1CE

60 G1nC

Unit overheat (W/T3 phase) (slave unit 1)

It starts when heat sink temperature of the W/T3 phase IGBT in the slave unit 1 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

Blown fuse (slave unit 1) It starts when the fuse of the main circuit direct-current part in the slave unit 1 is blown.

Failed fan (slave unit 1) It starts when the cooling fan in the slave unit 1 fails. However, it does not stop for protection.

Control power supply abnormality (slave unit 1)

MC response abnormality

(slave unit 1)

It starts when voltage of the control power supply in the slave unit 1 has an abnormality.

It starts when the magnetic contactor (MC) in the slave unit 1 does not turn on.

－ 266 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Only models over 30 kW or parallel models

No. Display Protection item What are protected

61 G1cH

62 G2t

Converter overheat

(slave unit 1)

Gate board communication abnormality (slave unit 2)

It starts when heat sink temperature of the converter in the slave unit 1 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when an abnormality occurs in a communication with the gate board in the slave unit 2.

63 G2P

64 G21

65 G22

66 G23

67 G2oV

Gate power supply abnormality (slave unit 2)

IGBT (U/T1 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 2)

IGBT (V/T2 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 2)

IGBT (W/T3 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 2)

Direct-current part overvoltage (slave unit 2)

It starts when the power supply of the gate in the slave unit 2 has an abnormality.

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the U/T1 phase IGBT in the slave unit 2.

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the V/T2 phase IGBT in the slave unit 2.

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the W/T3 phase IGBT in the slave unit 2.

68 G2H1

69 G2H2

Unit overheat (U/

T1phase) (slave unit 2)

Unit overheat (V/T2 phase) (slave unit 2)

It starts when a direct-current part is protected from overvoltage in the slave unit 2.

[200 V class] It starts when voltage of the direct-current part exceeds 400 V.

[400 V class] It starts when voltage of the direct-current part exceeds 800 V.

It starts when heat sink temperature of the U/T1 phase IGBT in the slave unit 2 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when heat sink temperature of the V/T2 phase IGBT in the slave unit 2 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

70 G2H3

71 G2Fu

72 G2FF

73 G2CE

74 G2nC

75 G2cH

76 G3t

77 G3P

Unit overheat (W/T3 phase) (slave unit 2)

It starts when heat sink temperature of the W/T3 phase IGBT in the slave unit 2 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

Blown fuse (slave unit 2) It starts when the fuse of the main circuit direct-current part in the slave unit 2 is blown.

Failed fan (slave unit 2) It starts when the cooling fan in the slave unit 2 fails. However, it does not stop for protection.

Control power supply abnormality (slave unit 2)

MC response abnormality

(slave unit 2)

Converter overheat

(slave unit 2)

Gate board communication abnormality (slave unit 3)

Gate power supply

It starts when voltage of the control power supply in the slave unit 2 is decreased.

It starts when the magnetic contactor (MC) in the slave unit 2 does not turn on.

It starts when heat sink temperature of the converter in the slave unit 2 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when an abnormality occurs in a communication with the gate board in the slave unit 3.

It starts when the power supply of the gate in the slave unit 3

－ 267 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Only models over 30 kW or parallel models

No. Display Protection item What are protected

78 G31

79 G32 abnormality (slave unit 3) has an abnormality.

IGBT (U/T1 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 3)

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the U/T1 phase IGBT in the slave unit 3.

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the V/T2 phase IGBT in the slave unit 3.

80 G33

81 G3oV

IGBT (V/T2 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 3)

IGBT (W/T3 phase) protection operation

(slave unit 3)

Direct-current part overvoltage (slave unit 3)

It starts when overcurrent is applied to the W/T3 phase IGBT in the slave unit 3.

It starts when a direct-current part is protected from overvoltage in the slave unit 3.

[200 V class] It starts when voltage of the direct-current part exceeds 400 V.

[400 V class] It starts when voltage of the direct-current part exceeds 800 V.

82 G3H1

83 G3H2

Unit overheat (U/T1 phase) (slave unit 3)

Unit overheat (V/T2 phase) (slave unit 3)

It starts when heat sink temperature of the U/T1 phase IGBT in the slave unit 3 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when heat sink temperature of the V/T2 phase IGBT in the slave unit 3 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

84 G3H3

85 G3Fu

86 G3FF

87 G3CE

88 G3nC

89 G3cH

90 db1

Unit overheat (W/T3 phase) (slave unit 3)

It starts when heat sink temperature of the W/T3 phase IGBT in the slave unit 3 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

Blown fuse (slave unit 3) It starts when the fuse of the main circuit direct-current part in the slave unit 3 is blown.

Failed fan (slave unit 3) It starts when the cooling fan in the slave unit 3 fails. However, it does not stop for protection.

Control power supply abnormality (slave unit 3)

MC response abnormality

(slave unit 3)

Converter overheat

(slave unit 3)

VFDB1 (dynamic braking unit 1) abnormality

It starts when voltage of the control power supply in the slave unit 3 is decreased.

It starts when the magnetic contactor (MC) in the slave unit 3 does not turn on.

It starts when heat sink temperature of the converter in the slave unit 3 becomes more than or equal to a specified value.

It starts when the VFDB1 (dynamic braking (DB) optional unit 1) is in the protection state or has a communication abnormality.

However, it does not stop for protection.

91 db2

92 db3

VFDB2 (dynamic braking unit 2) abnormality

VFDB3 (dynamic braking unit 3) abnormality

It starts when the VFDB2 (dynamic braking (DB) optional unit 2) is in the protection state or has a communication abnormality.

However, it does not stop for protection.

It starts when the VFDB3 (dynamic braking (DB) optional unit 3) is in the protection state or has a communication abnormality.

However, it does not stop for protection.

－ 268 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Only models over 30 kW or parallel models

No. Display Protection item What are protected

93 db4

94 db5

VFDB4 (dynamic braking unit 4) abnormality

VFDB5 (dynamic braking unit 5) abnormality

It starts when the VFDB4 (dynamic braking (DB) optional unit 4) is in the protection state or has a communication abnormality.

However, it does not stop for protection.

It starts when the VFDB5 (dynamic braking (DB) optional unit 5) is in the protection state or has a communication abnormality.

However, it does not stop for protection.

95 db6 VFDB6 (dynamic braking unit 6) abnormality

It starts when the VFDB6 (dynamic braking (DB) optional unit 6) is in the protection state or has a communication abnormality.

However, it does not stop for protection.

For No.90 through No.95, you can use <J-15> to set whether or not it stops for protection. For details, refer to

{5.3.11 Area J}.

6.1.3 How to Handle Protection Messages

When the inverter starts a protection operation due to an abnormality while it operates, you should follow instructions in the seven-segment display to take actions listed below.

■ Common to all models

Display Cause ccEr1 Connectors of the console are not inserted correctly.

The control board <VFC66-Z> is in the program rewrite mode.

The control board <VFC66-Z> malfunctions.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check that they are inserted correctly.

After rewriting of the program is completed, it is automatically restored.

Replace the control board

<VFC66-Z>.

Reference

8.2 How to Replace

Control Board

Display Cause cS2 Data was written incorrectly to the

EEPROM (internal memory) due to too much noise.

The uninitialized control board

<VFC66-Z> was implemented.

Faulty EEPROM (internal memory) parts.

Where to check and how to take actions

Take measures against noise for a wiring from the control board

<VFC66-Z>.

Reference

3.5.1 Notes for

Wiring

Initialize the control board <FC66-Z>. 8.3 How to Initialize

Inverter Main Unit

Replace the control board

<VFC66-Z>.

8.2 How to Replace

Control Board

Display Cause

CtEr The current sensor malfunctions or fails.

Where to check and how to take actions

・ Replace the current sensor.

・ Replace the main circuit board

<MAC66>.

Reference

Contact us.

－ 269 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

One of inverter output electrical wires is grounded.

Check whether it is grounded or not.

－ 270 －

Display Cause

Cut The output electrical wire is disconnected.

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Where to check and how to take actions

Turn off the inverter and check the wiring of the output electrical wire.

Reference

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

Display Cause

Where to check and how to take actions

The external failure signal was input. Check conditions where it is input.

EF1

EF2

EF3

EF4

Multifunction input settings are not correct.

Check multifunction input settings

<c-00> through <c-17>.

Reference

5.3.4 Area c

Display Cause

EnGA

EnGb

(It is not a protection message.)

(It is not a protection message.)

Where to check and how to take actions

Reference

Display

FCL

Cause

The output electrical wire is grounded or short circuited.

[V/f] Acceleration or deceleration time is too short.

Load capacity abnormally becomes large.

The setting value of Autotuning is not correct.

The combination of the inverter with the motor is incorrect.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the wiring of the output electrical wire.

Make it longer.

[IM] [EDM] The setting of current control gain is not correct.

When the rated voltage was directly applied to the motor to start the inverter (full voltage starting), it could not accelerate.

The motor with the phase advanced capacitor is used.

Remove the phase advanced capacitor.

Reference

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

4.4.2 Changing

Acceleration or

Deceleration Time

Reduce load, and check and review the capacity of the inverter and the motor.

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

Perform Full Mode Autotuning again. 4.3.3 How to

Perform

Autotuning

Use the correct combination of the inverter with the motor.

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

5.3.6 Area E Adjust settings of current control gain <E-07> through <E-09>.

Stop applying the rated voltage to the motor directly (direct applying), and change it to the normal start.

－ 271 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display

FnF

Cause

Where to check and how to take actions

The cooling fan of the inverter fails.

Check the cooling fan of the inverter.

Reference

Display iGbt

Cause Where to check and how to take actions

Ambient temperature becomes high.

・ Check the installation environment

.

・ Check whether temperature inside the control panel rises or not.

Keep enough cooling space.

Cooling space of the inverter is not enough.

The installation direction of the inverter is not correct.

Install it in the correct direction.

The output electrical wire is grounded or short circuited.

The direct-current reactor (DCL) is not connected.

IGBT is damaged.

The cooling fan fails.

Check the wiring of the output electrical wire.

Connect the direct-current reactor

(DCL).

Check whether IGBT works properly or not (continuity check).

Replace the cooling fan.

The wind of the cooling fan blows in the reverse direction.

The inverter continuously operated at low frequencies of 10 Hz or less.

The main circuit board <MAC66> or the gate board <GAC66> malfunctions.

Reference

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

Install it so that the wind blows in the correct direction.

Reduce the capacity according to the capacity curve when the inverter operates at low frequencies.

Replace the main circuit board

<MAC66> or the gate board

<GAC66>.

7.3 How to Replace

Cooling Fan

7.3 How to Replace

Cooling Fan

Display inoH

Cause

The cooling fan of the motor fails.

Ambient temperature of the motor is high.

The motor temperature detection electrical wire is disconnected, or noise is contaminated.

Settings of motor temperature detection gain <G-01> and <G-02> are not adjusted correctly.

Where to check and how to take actions

The cooling fan of the motor fails.

Check the installation environment of the motor.

・ Check the wiring of the motor temperature detection electrical wire.

・ Take any measures against noise.

Readjust the settings of motor temperature detection gain <G-01> and <G-02>.

Reference

5.3.8 Area G

－ 272 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display oc

Cause

The output electrical wire is grounded or short circuited.

[V/f] Acceleration or deceleration time is too short.

Load capacity abnormally becomes large.

The setting value of Autotuning is not correct.

The combination of the inverter with the motor is incorrect.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the wiring of the output electrical wire.

Make it longer.

[IM] [EDM] The setting of current control gain is not correct.

When the rated voltage was directly applied to the motor to start the inverter (direct applying start), it could not accelerate.

The motor with the phase advanced capacitor is used.

Remove the phase advanced capacitor.

Reference

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

4.4.2 Changing

Acceleration or

Deceleration Time

・ Reduce load.

・ Check and review the capacity of the inverter and the motor.

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

Perform Full Mode Autotuning again. 4.3.3 How to

Perform

Autotuning

Use the correct combination of the inverter with the motor.

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

5.3.6 Area E Adjust settings of current control gain <E-07> through <E-09>.

Stop applying the rated voltage to the motor directly (direct applying), and change it to the normal start.

Display oF

Cause

The external frequency setting device malfunctions.

Setting values of overfrequency protection <F-01> and <F-02> are not correct.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check behaviors of the external frequency setting device.

Review setting values of overfrequency protection <F-01> and <F-02>.

Reference

4.6 Changing

Speed through

Voltage Setting

Device/Variable

Resistor in V/f

Control

5.3.7 Area F

－ 273 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display oH

Cause

The cooling fan of the inverter fails or malfunctions.

Ambient temperature is high, or cooling space of the inverter is not enough.

The installation direction of the inverter is not correct.

A value over Initialized data is set to the PWM_carrier_frequency.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the cooling fan of the inverter.

Check the installation environment, and check that cooling space is enough.

Install it in the correct direction.

Set a value below Initialized data to the PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>, or reduce load capacity.

Reference

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

5.3.2 Area A

Display oL

Cause

The capacity of the inverter and the motor is too small.

Settings of rated motor values

<A-02> through <A-07> are not correct.

[V/f] Rotation of the motor stalls

(motor stall).

A value of the overload protection setting for overload protection is not correct.

Load capacity abnormally becomes large.

Where to check and how to take actions

・ Reduce load.

・ Check and review the capacity of the inverter and the motor.

Check and review settings of rated motor values <A-02> through

<A-07>.

Check and review settings of torque limit values <b-13> through <b-16>.

Check and review a setting value of the Overload_protection_setting

<F-03>.

Use the Overload_protection_prealarm_operation_level_setting

<H-11>.

Reference

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

4.3.2 Requirements for Performing

Autotuning

5.3.3 Area b

5.3.7 Area F

5.3.9 Area H

Display oPEr

Cause

The Digital_communication_option_ selection <J-00> is set to "ON" without the digital communication option connected.

The digital communication option malfunctions.

The digital communication option is not connected tightly.

Where to check and how to take actions

Set the Digital_communication_ option_selection <J-00> to "OFF."

Replace the digital communication option.

Check the connection with the digital communication option is correct and that the connector is inserted properly.

Reference

5.3.11 Area J

Optional Instruction

Manual

Optional Instruction

Manual

－ 274 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display oS

Cause

The external speed setting device malfunctions.

[IM][EDM] Incorrect settings of speed control gain <7.ASrP>,

<8.ASri>, and <9.ASrJ> cause overshoot.

Load is smaller than a torque command value in the torque control mode.

Setting values of overspeed protection <F-01> and <F-02> are not correct.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check behaviors of the external speed setting device.

Readjust the settings of speed control gain <7.ASrP>, <8.ASri>, and <9.ASrJ>.

Review the torque command value.

However, a torque command value depends on a setting of the

Torque_command_input_place_ selection <i-08>.

Review setting values of overspeed protection <F-01> and <F-02>.

Reference

5.3.1 Basic setting area

5.3.10 Area i

5.3.7 Area F

Display ot

Cause

The external torque command setting device malfunctions.

Setting values of overtorque protection functions <F-27> through

<F-29> are not correct.

Load capacity is abnormally large.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check behaviors of the external torque command setting device.

However, a torque command value depends on a setting of the

Torque_command_input_place_ selection <i-08>.

Review setting values of overtorque protection functions <F-27> through

<F-29>.

・ Reduce load.

・ Check and review the capacity of the inverter and the motor.

Reference

5.3.10 Area i

5.3.7 Area F

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

－ 275 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display oV

Cause

The output electrical wire is grounded or short circuited.

Deceleration time is too short.

The setting of the built-in dynamic braking (DB) operation voltage is not correct.

The dynamic braking (DB) optional unit does not work.

Load inertia becomes large.

Input power supply voltage abnormally rises.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the wiring of the output electrical wire.

・ Make it longer.

・ Use the Regeneration_stall_ prevention_function_usage_ selection <E-00>.

・ Connect the dynamic braking

(DB) optional unit.

Adjust the setting of the Built-in_DB

(DynamicBrake)_operation_level

<F-00>.

Replace the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit.

Use the sine wave converter or the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit.

Check input power supply voltage.

Reference

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

・ 4.4.2 Changing

Acceleration or

Deceleration

Time

・ 5.3.6 Area E

・ Optional

Instruction

Manual

5.3.7 Area F

Optional Instruction

Manual

Optional Instruction

Manual

Display Cause

PEr The speed sensor (PG) and the inverter are not wired.

U, V, and W signals of the speed sensor (PG) have an abnormality due to noise.

The setting of the Number_of_PGpulse <A-08> is incorrect.

The U, V, and W signal wires of the speed sensor (PG) or the Z signal wire are disconnected.

The power supply of the speed sensor (PG) has an abnormality.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the wiring.

Check the setting of the Number_ of_PG-pulse <A-08>.

Check the wiring.

Reference

3.3.2 How to

Connect Speed

Sensor and PG

Input Board

5.3.2 Area A

3.3.2 How to

Connect Speed

Sensor and PG

Input Board

－ 276 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display Cause

PSLIt is displayed due to instantaneous reduction of control power supply 5

V.

Where to check and how to take actions

・ Check the connection of [CN1] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ When the PG input board

<PG66-Z> and the optional board are connected, check the connections of [CN4] and [CN7] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

Replace the board.

Reference

8.2 How to Replace

Control Board

(Note) When this problem is not solved even after both actions are taken, you should contact us.

The control board <VFC66-Z> and the main circuit board <MAC66> malfunction.

Display roH

Cause

The inverter operated for over 0.5

second while temperature of charging resistance becomes higher.

Ambient temperature is high, or cooling space of the inverter is not enough.

Where to check and how to take actions

Turn off the inverter, and after a while turn it on again.

Check the installation environment, and check that cooling space is enough.

Reference

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

Display Cause

SE-Setting errors of the rating and constant of the motor.

For details, refer to {6.1.4 Meaning of Setting Error (SE--) Display}.

Where to check and how to take actions

Refer to {6.1.4 Meaning of Setting

Error (SE--) Display}.

Reference

6.1.4 Meaning of

Setting Error

(SE--) Display

Display

SLSE

Cause

Phase detection failed at start.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the combination of the motor with the inverter.

Reference

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

－ 277 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display Cause

SnE The speed sensor (PG) and the inverter are not wired or wired incorrectly.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the wiring.

The current sensor malfunctions or fails.

・ Replace the current sensor.

・ Replace the main circuit board

<MAC66>.

Perform D-axis Autotuning.

The setting of the motor_d-axis_ position <A-30> is not correct.

Settings of motor constants <A-16> through <A-33> are not correct.

Full Mode Autotuning

Reference

3.3.2 How to

Connect Speed

Sensor and PG

Input Board

Contact us.

4.3 Autotuning of

Parameters

(Automatic Setting)

Display

SPdE

Cause

Setting values of speed control error detection speed width <F-31> and

<F-32> are not correct.

Torque was limited due to heavy load.

Torque was limited due to short acceleration or deceleration time.

Where to check and how to take actions

Adjust setting values of speed control error detection speed width

<F-31> and <F-32>.

Reduce load.

Make it longer.

Reference

5.3.7 Area F

4.4.2 Changing

Acceleration or

Deceleration Time

The external speed setting device malfunctions.

The connection between the inverter output terminal and the motor is not correct.

Check behaviors of the external speed setting device.

Check the connection between the inverter and the motor.

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

Display

StrF

Cause

An operation or JOG command was input for over ten seconds after insufficient voltage (power failure) was detected.

An operation or JOG command was input for over ten seconds while an emergency stop signal was input.

Where to check and how to take actions

Set the Instantaneous_power_ interruption_restart <b-07> to "ON."

Turn off the operation or JOG signal while the emergency stop signal is input.

Reference

5.3.3 Area b

－ 278 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display Cause tS The communication master malfunctions.

The connection cable between the digital communication option and the communication master is disconnected, and the connector is not inserted correctly.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check behaviors of the communication master.

Check that the connector is inserted correctly, and replace the connection cable.

Reference

Optional Instruction

Manual

Display uV

Cause

The input power supply was interrupted (instantaneous power interruption) during operation.

Open phase occurred in the input power supply.

Where to check and how to take actions

Set the Instantaneous_power_ interruption_restart <b-07> to "ON."

Reference

5.3.3 Area b

Check the input power supply.

－ 279 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

■ Models over 30 kW and parallel models

For models of 30 to 315 kW consisting of a single unit, the items (related to master units) listed below are displayed.

Parallel models are <15022>, <18022>, and <40044> through <100044>.

Display

GAc

Cause

The protections No.34 through

No.89 listed in {6.1.2 List of

Protection Messages} started.

Where to check and how to take actions

Clear the protection operations

No.34 through No.89 in {6.1.2 List of

Protection Messages} which are displayed at that time.

Reference

6.1.2 List of

Protection

Messages

Gnt

G1t

G2t

G3t

Display Cause

The gate board <GAC66> malfunctions.

The connection cable between the gate board <GAC66> in the master unit and the gate board <GAC66-Z> in the slave unit or the gate board

<GAC66> in the slave unit is disconnected. The connector is not inserted correctly.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the gate board <GAC66>.

・ Check that the connector is inserted correctly.

・ Replace the connection cable.

Reference

＊ A character in the second digit from the right distinguishes a master unit (n) from slave units (1, 2, and 3).

Display

GnP

G1P

G2P

G3P

Cause

The gate power supply of the gate board <GAC66> was decreased.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the displayed gate board

<GAC66> of the inverter.

Reference

＊ A character in the second digit from the right distinguishes a master unit (n) from slave units (1, 2, and 3).

Gn1

G11

G21

G31

Gn2

G12

G22

G32

Gn3

G13

G23

G33

Display Cause

The output electrical wire was short circuited or grounded.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the wiring of the output electrical wire.

IGBT may be damaged.

Check whether IGBT of the inverter works properly or not (continuity check).

Autotuning has not been performed. Perform Autotuning.

Acceleration or deceleration time is too short.

Make it longer.

Reference

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

4.3 Autotuning of

Parameters

(Automatic Setting)

4.4.2 Changing

Acceleration or

Deceleration Time

－ 280 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display Cause

Load capacity is abnormally large.

The rated voltage was directly applied to the motor.

[V/f] Settings related to V/f are not correct.

The inverter continuously operated at low frequencies of 10 Hz or less.

The gate board <GAC66> malfunctions.

Where to check and how to take actions

Reduce load. Review the capacity of the inverter and the motor.

Reference

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

5.3.2 Area A Check the motor nameplate and review setting values of <A-02> through <A-07>.

Reduce the capacity according to the capacity degression curve when the inverter operates at low frequencies.

Replace the gate board <GAC66> of the inverter.

＊ A character in the second digit from the right distinguishes a master unit (n) from slave units (1, 2, and 3).

＊ A number in the rightmost digit shows the U/T1 phase (1), V/T2 phase (2), and W/T3 phase (3).

Display

GnH1

G1H1

G2H1

G3H1

GnH2

G1H2

G2H2

G3H2

GnH3

G1H3

G2H3

G3H3

Cause

Since the cooling fan of the inverter fails or malfunctions, it stops or its air volume is decreased.

The wind of the cooling fan of the inverter blows in the reverse direction.

Ambient temperature is high.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the cooling fan.

Install it so that the wind blows in the correct direction.

Reference

7.3 How to Replace

Cooling Fan

7.3 How to Replace

Cooling Fan

Cooling space of the inverter is not enough.

The installation direction of the inverter is not correct.

The heat sink temperature sensor malfunctions.

Check temperature in the installation environment (such as temperature inside the control panel) for ventilation.

Keep enough cooling space around the inverter.

Install it in the correct direction.

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

Measure resistance of the heat sink temperature sensor.

＊ A character in the third digit from the right distinguishes a master unit (n) from slave units (1, 2, and 3).

＊ A number in the rightmost digit shows the U/T1 phase (1), V/T2 phase (2), and W/T3 phase (3).

－ 281 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display

GnFu

G1Fu

G2Fu

G3Fu

Cause

The power supply was connected to the inverter output terminal.

IGBT may be damaged.

The output electrical wire was grounded or short circuited.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the wiring of input and output electrical wires. After correcting it, replace the fuse of the main circuit direct-current part.

Check whether IGBT works properly or not (continuity check), and then replace the fuse of the main circuit direct-current part.

Check input and output wires. After correcting them, replace the damaged parts and the fuse of the main circuit direct-current part.

Replace the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit.

Reference

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

The dynamic braking (DB) optional unit was damaged.

＊ A character in the third digit from the right distinguishes a master unit (n) from slave units (1, 2, and 3).

Display

GFCL

Cause

The output electrical wire is grounded or short circuited.

[V/f] Acceleration or deceleration time is too short.

Load capacity abnormally becomes large.

The setting value of Autotuning is not correct.

The combination of the inverter with the motor is incorrect.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check the wiring of the output electrical wire.

Make it longer.

[IM] [EDM] The setting of current control gain is not correct.

When the rated voltage was directly applied to the motor to start the inverter (direct applying start), it could not accelerate.

The motor with the phase advanced capacitor is used.

Remove the phase advanced capacitor.

Reference

3.3 How to Connect

Inverter

4.4.2 Changing

Acceleration or

Deceleration Time

・ Reduce load.

・ Check and review the capacity of the inverter and the motor.

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

Perform Full Mode Autotuning again. 4.3.3 How to

Perform

Autotuning

Use the correct combination of the inverter with the motor.

3.6 Inverter

Selection and List of Applied Motors

5.3.6 Area E Adjust settings of current control gain <E-07> through <E-09>.

Stop applying the rated voltage to the motor directly (direct applying), and change it to the normal start.

－ 282 －

Display

GPPE

Cause

The power supplies of the parallel control board <PRIM66-Z> in the master unit and the parallel control board <PRIS66-Z> in the slave unit failed.

<GAC66-Z-CN-PS24V> through

<PRIM66-Z-CN9> in the master unit and <GAC66-Z-CN-PS24V> through <PRIS66-Z-CN-PS> in the slave unit are not wired.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the parallel control board

<PRIM66-Z> or <PRIS66-Z>.

Wire them correctly.

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Reference

Display

GnFF

G1FF

G2FF

G3FF

Cause

The cooling fan fails.

The power supply for the cooling fan is decreased.

The wire between the gate board

<GAC66> and the power supply board <PSFM66> is disconnected or incorrect.

The relay for turning on/off the cooling fan is not enabled.

Where to check and how to take actions

Check and replace the cooling fan.

Replace the power supply board

<PSFM66>.

Correct it.

Replace the power supply board

<PSFM66>.

Reference

＊ A character in the third digit from the right distinguishes a master unit (n) from slave units (1, 2, and 3).

Display

G1CE

G2CE

G3CE

Cause

The gate board <GAC66> malfunctions.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the displayed gate board

<GAC66> in the slave unit.

＊ A number in the third digit from the right shows slave units (1, 2, and 3).

Reference

－ 283 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display

G1oV

G2oV

G3oV

Cause

Deceleration time is too short.

Where to check and how to take actions

・ Make it longer.

・ Use the Regeneration_stall_ prevention_function_usage_ selection <E-00>.

・ Connect the dynamic braking

(DB) optional unit.

Reference

・ 4.4.2 Changing

Acceleration or

Deceleration

Time

・ 5.3.6 Area E

・ Optional

Instruction

Manual

Optional Instruction

Manual

The setting of operation voltage of the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit is not correct.

The dynamic braking (DB) optional unit does not work.

Input power supply voltage abnormally rises.

Load inertia is large.

Adjust operation voltage.

Replace the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit.

Check input power supply voltage.

The output electrical wire was grounded or short circuited.

Optional Instruction

Manual

Use the sine wave converter or the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit.

Check the wiring of the output electrical wire.

Optional Instruction

Manual

＊ A number in the third digit from the right shows slave units (1, 2, and 3).

Display

GnnC

G1nC

G2nC

G3nC

Cause

The power supply board <PSFM66> malfunctions.

The connector between the gate board <GAC66> and the power supply board <PSFM66> is not connected correctly.

The magnetic contactor (MC) malfunctions.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the power supply board

<PSFM66>.

Check the connection of the connector.

Replace the magnetic contactor

(MC).

Reference

＊ A character in the third digit from the right distinguishes a master unit (n) from slave units (1, 2, and 3).

－ 284 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display

GncH

G1cH

G2cH

G3cH

Cause

The cooling fan of the converter unit fails.

Cooling space of the converter unit is not enough.

The installation direction of the inverter is not correct.

The direct-current reactor (DCL) is not installed.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the cooling fan.

Keep enough cooling space.

Install it correctly.

Connect the direct-current reactor

(DCL).

Reference

7.3 How to Replace

Cooling Fan

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

3.1.2 How to Install

Inverter

3.3.1 How to

Connect Inverter

Terminals

The heat sink temperature detection sensor malfunctions.

Check the heat sink temperature detection sensor for continuity.

＊ A character in the third digit from the right distinguishes a master unit (n) from slave units (1, 2, and 3).

db1 db2 db3 db4 db5 db6

Display Cause

The dynamic braking (DB) optional unit malfunctions.

The connection cable between the board <VFDB2009-Z> on the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit and the gate board <GAC66> of the inverter is disconnected. The connector is not inserted correctly.

Where to check and how to take actions

Replace the dynamic braking (DB) optional unit.

・ Check that the connector is inserted correctly.

・ Replace the connection cable.

Reference

＊ A number in the rightmost digit shows the dynamic braking (DB) optional units <VFDB2009> (1 through 6).

－ 285 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6.1.4 Meaning of Setting Error (SE--) Display

■ When a setting error is displayed

For setting values of the parameters <A-00> through <A-07>, check each rated value described in your motor nameplate or data sheet.

For details of each parameter, refer to {5.3.2 Area A}. For other settings, contact us.

■ List of setting errors

Display [V/f] [IM]

SE00 ・ A smaller value is set to the Rated_motor_current <A-04>.

[EDM]

・ A larger value is set to the Maximum_speed <A-00>.

SE01 ・ The value of the Rated_ motor_voltage <A-03> is set to "0."

SE02 ・ The value of the Rated_ motor_capacity <A-02> is set to "0."

SE03 ・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_current

<A-04>.

・

・

The value of the Rated_motor_voltage <A-03> is set to "0."

The value of the Rated_motor_capacity <A-02> is set to "0."

SE04 ・ The values of the

Rated_motor_speed <A-05> and the Rated_motor_ frequency <A-07> are set to

"0."

SE05 ―

・ The value of the Rated_ motor_speed <A-05> is set to "0."

・ Larger values are set to the

Maximum_speed <A-00> and the Number_of_motor_ pole <A-06>.

SE06 ・ A larger value is set to the

Maximum_frequency

<A-00>.

SE07 ・ A smaller value is set to the

Rated_motor_voltage

<A-03>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_frequency

<A-07>.

・ Larger values are set to the

Maximum_speed <A-00> and the Number_of_motor_ pole <A-06>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Rated_motor_frequency

<A-07>.

・ The value of the Rated_ motor_current <A-04> is set to "0."

・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_current

<A-04>.

・

―

A smaller value is set to the

Rated_motor_current

<A-04>.

SE08 ・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17> by Autotuning.

SE09 ・ Larger values are set to the

Rated_motor_current

<A-04> and the Rated_ motor_frequency <A-07>.

SE10 ・ Larger values are set to the

Rated_motor_voltage

<A-03>, the Rated_motor_

・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_current

<A-04>.

―

・ Smaller values are set to the

Maximum_speed <A-00> and the Number_of_motor_

―

・

・

A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_voltage

<A-03>.

A smaller value is set to the

Rated_motor_current

<A-04>.

－ 286 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display [V/f] speed <A-05>, and the

Number_of_motor_pole

<A-06>.

・ Smaller values are set to the

Rated_motor_capacity

<A-02> and the Rated_ motor_frequency <A-07>.

SE11 ・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_voltage

<A-03>.

SE12

・ Smaller values are set to the

Rated_motor_current

<A-04> and the Rated_ motor_frequency <A-07>.

[IM] pole <A-06>.

SE13

SE14

SE15

SE16

SE17

SE18

SE19

SE20

SE21

SE22

SE23

―

・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_capacity

<A-02>.

・ Smaller values are set to the

Rated_motor_speed <A-05> and the Number_of_motor_ pole <A-06>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_frequency

<A-07>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Rated_motor_voltage

<A-03>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_voltage

<A-03>.

・ Smaller values are set to the

Rated_motor_current

<A-04> and the Rated_ motor_frequency <A-07>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>.

・ Larger values are set to the

Maximum_speed <A-00> and the Number_of_motor_ pole <A-06>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>.

[EDM]

・ A larger value is set to the

Current_control_proportion_ gain <E-07>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Current_control_integral_ gain(2) <E-09>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Current_control_integral_ gain(1) <E-08>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_q-axis_inductance

<A-19>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_d-axis_inductance

<A-18>.

―

―

・ A smaller value is set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>.

・ Smaller values are set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09> and the Motor_daxis_inductance <A-18>.

－ 287 －

SE29

SE30

SE31

SE32

SE33

SE34

SE35

SE36

SE27

SE28

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display [V/f]

SE24

SE25

SE26

[IM] [EDM]

・ Smaller values are set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09> and the Rated_ motor_voltage <A-03>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Rated_motor_frequency

<A-07>.

・ Values of the Motor_ leakage_inductance <A-19> and the Motor_mutual_ inductance <A-20> are set to "0" by Autotuning.

・ The values of the

Rated_motor_speed <A-05> and the Rated_motor_ frequency <A-07> are set to

"0."

・ A smaller value is set to the

Rated_motor_frequency

<A-07>.

―

―

・

・

―

A larger value is set to the

Motor_secondary_ resistance <A-18>.

Smaller values are set to the

Motor_leakage_inductance

<A-19> and the Motor_ mutual_inductance <A-20>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>.

―

・ Larger values are set to the

Motor_magnetic_flux

<A-20> and the Motor_ core_loss_torque_ compensation <A-21>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Maximum_speed <A-00>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Rated_motor_speed <A-05>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17>.

― ・ Larger values are set to the

Motor_mutual_inductance

<A-20> and the Motor_ core_loss_torque_ compensation <A-23>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_core_loss_torque_ compensation <A-23>.

・ A larger value is set to the

・

―

―

The value of the Rated_ motor_speed <A-05> is set to 0.

－ 288 －

SE45

SE46

SE47

SE42

SE43

SE44

Display [V/f]

SE37

SE38

SE39

SE40

SE41

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

[IM]

Motor_secondary_ resistance <A-18>.

・ Smaller values are set to the

Motor_leakage_inductance

<A-19> and the Motor_ mutual_inductance <A-20>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_secondary_ resistance <A-18>.

[EDM]

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_d-axis_inductance

<A-18>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_q-axis_inductance

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_magnetic_flux

<A-20>.

―

<A-19>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_core_loss_torque_ compensation <A-23>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Motor_mutual_inductance

<A-20>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Maximum_speed <A-00>.

・ A value below "2" is set to the PG_selection <A-10> and "0" is set to the

Motor_d-axis_ measurement_pulse_width

<A-32>.

・ A value over "0" is set to the

PG_selection <A-10> and

"-1" is set to the Motor_daxis_position <A-30>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_q-axis_pulse_pole_ determination_current

<A-07>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Maximum_speed <A-00>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_mutual_inductance

<A-20>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Motor_secondary_ resistance <A-18>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Current_control_proportion_ gain <E-07>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Current_control_integral_

・

・

・

・

A larger value is set to the

Current_control_proportion_ gain <E-07>.

A larger value is set to the

Current_control_integral_ gain(1) <E-08>.

A larger value is set to the

Motor_d-axis_inductance

<A-18>.

A larger value is set to the

Motor_q-axis_inductance

－ 289 －

SE54

SE55

SE56

SE57

SE58

SE59

SE60

SE61

SE51

SE52

SE53

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display [V/f]

SE48

SE49

SE50

SE62

[IM] gain(2) <E-09>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Current_control_integral_ gain(1) <E-08>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_secondary_ resistance <A-18>.

―

[EDM]

―

―

<A-19>.

・

・

・

―

・

A larger value is set to the

Motor_secondary_ resistance <A-18>.

A larger value is set to the

Maximum_speed <A-00>.

A larger value is set to the

Motor_core_loss_torque_ compensation <A-23>.

A smaller value is set to the

Motor_secondary_ resistance <A-18>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Motor_d-axis_inductance

<A-18>.

・ A smaller value is set to the

Motor_q-axis_inductance

<A-19>.

・ Smaller values are set to the

Motor_d-axis_inductance

<A-18> and the Motor_qaxis_inductance <A-19>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_q-axis_inductance

<A-19>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_d-axis_inductance

<A-18>.

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17>.

― ―

―

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_secondary_ resistance <A-18>.

―

・ A larger value is set to the

Motor_magnetic_flux

<A-20>.

―

・ A smaller value is set to the

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17>.

・ Smaller values are set to the

Motor_d-axis_inductance

<A-18> and the Motor_qaxis_inductance <A-19>.

・ Smaller values are set to the

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17>, the Motor_d-axis_ inductance <A-18>, and the

Motor_q-axis_inductance

<A-19>.

・ Smaller values are set to the ―

－ 290 －

Display [V/f]

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

[IM]

Motor_primary_resistance

<A-17> and the Motor_ mutual_inductance <A-20>.

[EDM]

SE63

SE64

・ A smaller value is set to the

PWM_carrier_frequency

<A-09>.

―

―

6.1.5 Meaning of Error Displays during Autotuning

■ When an error is displayed during Autotuning

To clear an error during Autotuning, press the [STOP/RESET] key for about three seconds.

Like what are displayed at power-on, the inverter series name, capacity, and voltage are displayed.

For an error which occurs during Autotuning, contact us.

■ List of error displays during Autotuning

Display Contents of errors

Err01 It is displayed when contents of Autotuning (Full Mode, Direct Current Mode, Motor D-axis Mode) do not correspond to the inverter control method.

Err10 It is displayed when results of Autotuning are not correct.

Err06 [IM] It is displayed when an inductance value is abnormal.

Err09

Err07 [IM] It is displayed when a resistance value is abnormal.

Err08 [IM] It is displayed when a mutual inductance value is abnormal.

Err13

Err16

Err11 [IM] It is displayed when a leakage inductance value is abnormal.

Err12

Err17

Err14 [IM] It is displayed when a value of the Motor_inductance_saturation_coefficient(1) is abnormal.

Err15 [IM] It is displayed when a value of the Motor_inductance_saturation_coefficient(2) is abnormal.

Err18 [IM]It is displayed when "1" is set up to the PG selection and the hand of cut of the signal of PG differs from the hand of cut of the motor.

Err34 [EDM] It is displayed when a value of the pole determination pulse width exceeds a specified value.

Err40 [EDM] It is displayed when a setting value of the Motor_d-axis_measurement_pulse_width is abnormal.

Err50 [EDM] It is displayed when the inverter could not accelerate during Autotuning. The wiring of the inverter output terminals [U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3] or the wiring of the speed sensor (PG) may be incorrect. Alternately, mounted load may be heavy. Check them again.

Err51 [EDM] It is displayed when a setting value of the Motor_magnetic_flux is abnormal.

Err54 [EDM] It is displayed when a value over "1" is set to the PG_selection and the wiring of the PG is not correct. Check the wiring of the PG.

－ 291 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

Display Contents of errors

Err55 [EDM] It is displayed when "1" to "2" are set to the PG_selection and no origin signal is input from the PG even after current reaches a specified value.

The wiring of the inverter output terminals [U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3] or the wiring of the PG may be incorrect. Alternately, mounted load may be heavy. Check them again.

Err61 [EDM] It is displayed when a setting value of the Motor_d-axis_inductance is abnormal.

Err62 [EDM] It is displayed when a setting value of the Motor_q-axis_inductance is abnormal.

Err80 [EDM] It is displayed when setting values of inductance change rate through are abnormal.

Err99 It is displayed when a protection starts or the [STOP] key is pressed and then Autotuning is forcibly stopped.

ErrFF It is displayed when Autotuning is not able to be started by protected operation.

－ 292 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6.2 How to Check Data in Protection Display Mode

6.2.1 How to Display Protection Operation Data

While a protection operation blinks, six types of data (such as output current) of the protection operation can be read out. This is called "one-point traceback data."

For details of displayed data, refer to {6.2.2 List of Data of Protection Operation and Protection History

Display}.

1.The started protection operation blinks.

・ When multiple protection operations started, they are numbered and displayed in turn every one second.

2. While the desired protection operation blinks, press the [SET] key.

・ Data of the protection operation (one-point traceback) is displayed.

・ Six items and their data are repeatedly displayed in turn every one second.

3. Press the [SET] key.

・ The protection operation blinks again.

・ For how to reset a protection operation, refer to {6.3 How to Reset Protection Display Mode}.

－ 293 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6.2.2 List of Data of Protection Operation and Protection History Display

The tables below list data which can be checked as one-point traceback and protection history display during protection operation.

In the tables, output current shows a current value immediately before a protection operation occurs, out of sampled values every operation period. Therefore, when current changes at fast rise (such as output short-circuit), it may not show a correct current value when the protection occurs.

[V/f]

Data item

Frequency command value

Output frequency

Output current

Output voltage

Display

FrEF

Fout iout

Vout

Vdc

Unit

Hz

Hz

A

V

V

Contents

Display a value after acceleration or deceleration control.

Display inverter output frequency.

Display the maximum value out of absolute three-phase current instantaneous values.

Display an effective value of voltage between output lines.

Display direct-current voltage.

Remarks

It is different from the display of the monitor item.

It is different from the display of the monitor item. For the sine wave, it is divided by √ 2, resulting in almost equal to an effective value.

Direct-current voltage

Output torque

(Torque current) tout % Display a calculated value of output torque.

Accuracy is not guaranteed in the V/f control.

[IM] [EDM]

Data item

Speed command value

Motor speed

Output current

Output voltage

Direct-current voltage

Torque command

Display

SrEF

SPd iout

Vout

Vdc trEF

Unit Contents r/min Display a value after acceleration or deceleration control.

r/min Display motor speed.

A Display the maximum value out of absolute three-phase current instantaneous values.

Remarks

It is different from the display of the monitor item.

It is different from the display of the monitor item. For the sine wave, it is divided by √ 2, resulting in almost equal to an effective value.

V

V

Display an effective value of voltage between output lines.

Display direct-current voltage.

% Display a torque command after limit input into the torque control part is processed.

－ 294 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6.3 How to Reset Protection Display Mode

This section describes how to reset a protection operation and to return from the protection display mode.

Before performing reset, find a cause of a protection operation and take any measures.

Behaviors after reset are as follows:

・ One-point traceback data described in {6.2.1 How to Display Protection Operation Data} can be no longer checked.

・ Protection contact [86A] output is unavailable again.

1. While the protection operation blinks, press the [STOP/RESET] key.

・ The protection operation is reset.

・ The mode returns to the monitor (MONI) mode immediately before the protection operation starts.

When the monitor item "Fout" (output frequency) is displayed again

Even after it is reset, it may occur again.

・ When a cause of the protection operation has not been solved

・ When multiple protections occurred and some of them have not been solved

Check the contents of the protection message again and take any measures. If you cannot solve them, contact us.

－ 295 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6.4 How to Check Protection History

When the inverter stops due to a protection operation, it stores data such as output current and output voltage of the protection.

You can always see and check data of the last six protection histories by selecting the monitor item "trbLE."

For details of displayed items, refer to {6.2.2 List of Data of Protection Operation and Protection History

Display}.

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns on, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, and the console enters the monitor (MONI) mode.

・ The current monitor item is displayed for about one second, and then its data is automatically displayed.

・ For details of the monitor (MONI) mode, refer to {4.1.6 Checking Operating State}. For details of monitor items, refer to {4.1.7 List of Monitor Items}.

2. Press either of the [SET] key, [ ] key, or [ ] key to return to the display of the monitor item.

3. Press either of the [SET] key, [ ] key, or [ ] key to display "trbLE" (display protection history).

・ Unless a value is specified within one second while the monitor item is displayed, it cannot be changed.

・ About one second later, up to last six protection operations are displayed in turn every one second.

・ The protection history starting with the number "1." is the oldest.

・ When there is no protection history, "-----" is displayed. Press the [SET] key to return to the display of the monitor item "trbLE."

・ Press the [SET] key while the protection history is displayed to return to the display of the monitor item

"trbLE."

4. While the protection history to check data is displayed, press the [SET] key for over three seconds.

・ A data item of that protection operation is displayed.

・ Six items and their data are displayed in turn every one second.

－ 296 －

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

5. Press the [SET] key.

・ The protection history is displayed again.

6. Press the [SET] key.

The monitor item is displayed again.

Clearing protection history

You can clear the stored protection history with <S-00>. For details, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

－ 297 －

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

7.1 Periodic Inspection

To always keep the best condition of devices and to maximize their best performance, conduct a periodic inspection at least once every six months to check issues which cannot be found in a normal monitoring.

Persons with safety knowledge of electricity should conduct maintenance and inspection.

For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

Tasks of inspection

● Never open the front cover with the input power supply turned on.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Turn off the inverter, open the front cover, and then check that the LED for checking "CHG" on the main circuit board <MAC66> or the gate board <GAC66> turns off. After that, conduct an inspection.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Otherwise, you may be injured.

Tasks of inspection

● Note that temperature of the heat sink may be high depending on operating conditions.

You may get burned.

Maintenance and inspection

● Before conducting an inspection, turn off the input power supply and wait for ten or more minutes. Also, check voltage between the direct-current terminals [+2] and [-] on the main circuit terminal block to see if it is below 30 V.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Only qualified persons should conduct maintenance and inspection. Take off metals (such as a watch and bracelet) before maintenance and inspection. Use a tool for insulation.

Otherwise, electric shock or injury may occur.

■ Items and contents of periodic inspection

Inspection item and target

Descriptions of inspection

Appearance of the inverter

Cooling fan

Inside the inverter

Terminal block and terminal screw

Check that the vent hole or the heat sink does not get blocked with dust, and clean them.

When dust is attached to the cooling fan, you should clean it. Replace the cooling fan, considering a service life time of about 40,000 hours as a guide. For cumulative operation time of the cooling fan, refer to {7.2 When [ALM] LED on Console Turns

On}.

Inspect and check that dust is not attached to each board and electronic parts.

Inspect the terminal block and mounting screws for looseness, and retighten them.

－ 298 －

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

Inspection item and target

Connector

Wiring

Descriptions of inspection

Check connectors and terminals on the control board <VFC66-Z> for looseness.

Check the insulating coating of the wiring for abnormalities such as cracks and deformation.

Main circuit capacitor If it has any abnormalities such as electrolyte leakage or change of color, it should be replaced. For details, refer to {7.4 Inspecting and Replacing Main Circuit

Capacitor}.

7.2 When [ALM] LED on Console Turns On

When cumulative operation time of the inverter exceeds a specified time, the [ALM] LED on the console turns on.

It indicates that the main circuit capacitor or the cooling fan reaches the guide of its life. Turning on the [ALM]

LED will not limit operation of the inverter.

■ When to replace the main circuit capacitor and cooling fan

The inverter counts cumulative operation time in one hour.

You can check cumulative operation time by using the monitor item <tin>. At the same time, the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor and that of the cooling fan are displayed in the monitor items (timer remaining time 1 <tin1> and timer remaining time 2 <tin2>) as a guide.

When the [ALM] LED turns on, check these monitor items for remaining time.

For details of monitor items, refer to {4.1.6 Checking Operating State} and {4.1.7 List of Monitor Items}.

When a value of the timer remaining time 1 <tin1> becomes less than or equal to "0," this indicates that it is time to replace the main circuit capacitor and that replacement of the capacitor is recommended.

When a value of the timer remaining time 2 <tin2> becomes less than or equal to "0," this indicates that it is time to replace the cooling fan and that replacement of the fan is recommended.

For replacing the main circuit capacitor, refer to {7.4 Inspecting and Replacing Main Circuit Capacitor}. For replacing the cooling fan, refer to {7.3 How to Replace Cooling Fan}.

■ To turn off the [ALM] LED

To turn off the [ALM] LED which has been turned on, a setting of the cumulative operation timer should be cleared.

－ 299 －

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

Use <S-01> and <S-02>. For details, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

■ Default setting of the cumulative operation timer

You can change a setting of cumulative operation time with the Cumulative_operation_timer(1) <F-04> and the Cumulative_operation_timer(2) <F-05>. In the initial state, they are set as follows:

・ Cumulative_operation_timer(1) <F-04>: Guide of remaining life of the main circuit capacitor

・ Cumulative_operation_timer(2) <F-05>: Guide of remaining life of the cooling fan

Each amount of time indicates a guide of remaining life, and it does not assure their behaviors.

For details of <F-04> and <F-05>, refer to {5.3.7 Area F}.

Initialized data of Cumulative_operation_timer(1) and Cumulative_operation_timer(2)

Cumulative_operation_timer(1) <F-04> Cumulative_operation_timer(2) <F-05>

43800Hr 21900Hr

7.3 How to Replace Cooling Fan

This section describes how to replace the cooling fan.

The cooling fan is a component specific to each model of the inverter. For replacement, use a cooling fan the same as the one installed on the inverter.

For replaced parts of the cooling fan, contact us.

Replaced parts

● Before conducting an inspection, turn off the input power supply and wait for ten or more minutes. Also, check that voltage between the direct-current terminals [+1] and [-] as well as [+2] and [-] on the main circuit terminal block is below 30 V.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

● Only qualified persons should conduct maintenance and inspection. Take off metals (such as a watch and bracelet) before maintenance and inspection. Use a tool for insulation.

Otherwise, electric shock or injury may occur.

Precautions concerning handling

● Handle parts with care not to make a powerful impact.

Deformation will cause a failure of the inverter.

7.3.1 How to Remove Cooling Fan

This section describes how to typically remove the cooling fan.

For the cooling fan, its shape, number of pieces, the presence or absence of screws, and its position depend on your inverter model.

Refer to the product catalog section on our web site (https://www.toyodenki.co.jp/en/) or contact us.

Removing the cooling fan

● When removing the cooling fan, be careful not to put a strain on the electrical wire.

－ 300 －

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

1. Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen screws of the mounting plate of the cooling fan.

2. Slide the mounting plate of the cooling fan to the front side.

3. Incline and lift the plate.

・ For some models, the plate is only to be unlocked (with no screw).

－ 301 －

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

4. Pull out the connector of the electrical wire connected to the inverter main unit.

5. Remove the connector of the cooling fan from the connector mounting plate of the cooling fan.

6. Use the Phillips screwdriver to remove screws, and remove the cooling fan from the plate.

－ 302 －

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

7.3.2 How to Install Cooling Fan

This section describes how to typically install the cooling fan.

For the cooling fan, its shape, number of pieces, the presence or absence of screws, and its position depend on your inverter model.

Refer to the product catalog section on our web site (https://www.toyodenki.co.jp/en/) or contact us.

Installation of the cooling fan

● Care should be taken that the lead wire does not get struck between the cooling fan and the main unit.

● Do not bend the lead wire tightly. Push it softly.

● Incorrect directions of the wind and the wiring slot of the cooling fan will cause a failure. Check them carefully and then install it.

1. Follow the procedures described in {7.3.1 How to Remove Cooling Fan} in the reverse order to install each part.

2. Connect the connector of the cooling fan to the connector of the electrical wire on the main unit.

・ For the pathway of the electrical wire of the cooling fan, put it in the state before the fan is removed.

3. Insert the mounting plate of the cooling fan so that the hole on the plate fits the claw on the chassis.

4. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws of the mounting plate of the cooling fan.

・ For some model, the plate is only locked with no screw.

－ 303 －

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

7.4 Inspecting and Replacing Main Circuit Capacitor

If any abnormalities of the main circuit capacitor (such as electrolyte leakage or change of color) are found in a periodic inspection, etc., you should contact us.

Also, when the [ALM] LED on the console turns on in this inverter, it indicates that the main circuit capacitor reaches the guide of its life. When a value of the timer remaining time 1 <tin1> becomes less than or equal to

"0," the [ALM] LED turns on. It indicates that replacement of the main circuit capacitor is recommended.

When the main circuit capacitor operates for 12 hours per day at the average ambient temperature of below

35 ℃ , it should be replaced in ten years as a guide.

Main circuit capacitor

● Before using the inverter which has been stored for three or more years as a spare, conduct aging of the main circuit capacitor. For aging, apply the rated input voltage to the inverter for about eight hours with the inverter output electrical wire removed.

If the capacitor is used without aging, it may be damaged, resulting in a dangerous situation.

7.5 How to Perform Insulation Resistance Test

When the board and the terminal block have been cleaned in a periodic inspection, etc., before operating the inverter, you should perform the insulation resistance test of the main circuit and check it for short-circuit.

Use a megger with 500 VDC to perform the insulation resistance test.

Do not perform the insulation resistance test of the control circuit.

Prepared items

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Megger with 500 VDC

1. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

2. Remove all wires.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

－ 304 －

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

3. Short circuit all terminals on the main circuit terminal block.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to {3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

4. Measure insulation resistance between the terminals on the main circuit terminal block and the protective earth terminal.

・ Check that insulation resistance is more than or equal to 10 M&#937;.

・ If it is less than 10 M&#937;, contact us.

5. Remove all short-circuit wires.

6. Return the wires to the original state.

7. Close the front cover.

7.6 How to Discard Parts

To discard replaced parts or service parts, follow the instructions of each administrative agency.

－ 305 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

8.1 Tasks Required for Replacing Control Board

When the control board <VFC66-Z> has been replaced with a spare, the settings and adjustment below are required to adapt it to the inverter.

・ Settings of the inverter capacity, rated motor (a value on the nameplate), and Autotuning data

・ Gain adjustment of the analog circuit part

For settings of the rated motor (a value on the nameplate) and Autotuning data, refer to {4.3.2 Requirements for Performing Autotuning} and {5.3.2 Area A}.

8.2 How to Replace Control Board

Replacing the control board <VFC66-Z>

● Be sure to turn off the inverter when opening or closing the front cover, and then install the board.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Prepared items

・ Spare of the control board <VFC66-Z>

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Needle-nose plier

Open the front cover. The optional board is located in the front side, and the console board <SET66-Z> is located above the control board <VFC66-Z> in the back.

－ 306 －

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. Remove four screws on the console board <SET66-Z>.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

4. Remove the console board <SET66-Z>.

・ Pull out the console board from the control board <VFC66-Z> to remove it.

5. Remove the joint of two connectors between the control board <VFC66-Z> and the optional board.

・ Push up the knob to remove the joint of the connectors.

－ 307 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

6. Push four claws of the support holding the optional board into the support.

・ The support fixes the optional board to the chassis of the inverter.

・ When having a difficulty in pushing the claws, use a needle-nose plier.

7. Remove the optional board.

8. Remove the flat cable of the control board <VFC66-Z>.

9. Push four claws holding the control board <VFC66-Z> into the support.

・ The control board <VFC66-Z> is also fixed to the chassis of the inverter with the support.

・ When having a difficulty in pushing the claws, use a needle-nose plier.

10. Remove the console board <VFC66-Z>.

11. Align four holes on a new control board <VFC66-Z> to the support.

12. Push the control board <VFC66-Z> until the claws of the support hang on the upper portion of the board.

13. Align the four holes on the removed optional board to the support.

14. Push the optional board until the claws of the support hang on the upper portion of the board.

15.Connect the flat cable of the control board <VFC66-Z>.

16. Push up the knobs of the connectors [CN1] and [CN2] on the optional board.

17. Fix the knobs of connectors [CN1] and [CN2] into the connectors [CN7] and [CN4] on the control

－ 308 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board board <VFC66-Z>.

・ The moving part of the connector is elastic. If it is not installed tightly, it may be removed. Fix it tightly.

18. Install the console board <SET66-Z> and then tighten four screws.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

19. Close the front cover of the inverter.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

8.3 How to Initialize Inverter Main Unit

You can set the inverter capacity by initializing the inverter.

Use the Special_mode_selection <S-00>.

For details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

Initialization of the inverter main unit

Be sure to initialize the inverter main unit after replacing the control board <VFC66-Z>.

Safety notice

● High voltage is applied to a direct-current voltage meter or a tester. Experts should measure voltage.

● Close the front cover before turning on the power.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Safety notice

● To measure direct-current voltage, use a direct-current voltage meter or a tester which can measure 500

V or more for the 200 V class inverter and 1000 V or more for the 400 V class inverter.

Prepared items

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Direct-current voltage meter or tester

1. Turn off the inverter.

2. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

3. Install a direct-current voltage meter or a tester between the direct-current terminals [+2] and [-] on the main circuit terminal block of the inverter.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to {3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

4. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

5. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

－ 309 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

6. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

・ When the first item of the basic setting area is displayed, press the [ ] key once to display "S-00."

・ For details of the Special_mode_selection <S-00>, refer to

{5.3.16 Area S}.

7. Press the [SET] key.

・ On the extreme right, "0" is displayed.

・ The underscore blinks on the extreme left, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

8. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "1040."

・ "1040" is a password. It is required to use the Special_ mode_selection <S-00>.

9. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and "S-00" is displayed again.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-00." Follow the procedures again from the step 7.

・ Here, you can stop the initialization by pressing the

[STOP/RESET] key.

When an error occurs due to incorrect password input

10. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

11. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "1" (Initialize the inverter).

－ 310 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

・ The change is confirmed, and then a message of "rEturn to

FActory SEttinG" is displayed in turn.

・ Then, "SurE" blinks.

・ Here, you can stop the initialization by pressing the

[STOP/RESET] key.

12. Press the [SET] key.

・ The inverter series name is displayed.

When the inverter series name "VF66B" is displayed

13. Use the keys [ ] and [ ] to display a desired inverter model, and then press the [SET] key.

・ The inverter capacity is displayed.

"7r5" shows a capacity of 7.5 kW, and

"44" shows a 440 V class.

14. Use the keys [ ] and [ ] to display a desired inverter capacity, and then press the [SET] key.

・ The inverter control method of the first setting block is selected and displayed.

・ "o": [V/f control]

・ "V": [Induction motor vector control]

・ "E": [ED motor vector control] As the inverter control method of the first setting block, "o" ([V/f control]) is displayed.

15. Use the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the inverter control method of the first setting block, and press the [SET] key.

・ The inverter control method of the second setting block is selected and displayed.

16. Similarly, use the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the inverter control method of the second setting block, and press the [SET] key.

－ 311 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

・ Direct-current voltage is displayed.

17. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change numbers to a value measured by the voltage meter or the tester, and then press the [SET] key.

・

・ Since the software version No.02-A1, this is displayed.

・ "init" is displayed for a few seconds, and then "End" is displayed. Now the initialization of the inverter is completed.

・ About five seconds later, the inverter series name is displayed

.

・ Then, contents similar to what are displayed at power-on are displayed. Refer to {4.1.2 What Are Displayed at Power-on}.

・ Then, a monitor item is displayed for about one second, and its data is displayed.

18. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

19. Remove the installed direct-current voltage meter or tester.

20. Close the front cover.

－ 312 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

8.4 How to Adjust Analog Input Gain

Here, set the two parameters <L-01> and <L-02> to adjust analog input gain.

For details of the Analog_input(1)_gain <L-01> and the Analog_input(1)_offset <L-02>, refer to {5.3.12 Area

L}.

This section describes how to use an auto adjustment function provided by the inverter to specify values of

<L-01> and <L-02>, rather than manually and directly specifying them.

Use the Analog_frequency_command_characteristic_selection/Analog_speed_command_characteristic_ selection <b-17> and the Analog_input(1)_adjustment <S-06>.

For details of the Analog_frequency_command_characteristic_selection/Analog_speed_command_ characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}. For details of the Analog_intput(1)_adjustment

<S-06>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

Also, for details of how to change parameter settings, refer to {4.1.3 Changing Parameter Settings}.

Analog input gain adjustment

Be sure to adjust analog input gain after replacing the control board <VFC66-Z>.

Short-circuit of terminals

● Be sure to turn off the inverter before short-circuit of terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Measuring voltage between terminals

● Great care must be taken not to touch electrical wires and terminals when measuring voltage between terminals.

It may result in a risk of electric shock.

Prepared items

・ Phillips screwdriver (M3)

・ Phillips screwdriver (M4)

・ Direct-current voltage meter or tester

1. When the [FNC] LED on the console turns off, press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

2. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "b-00."

3. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "b-17."

－ 313 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

・ For details of the Analog_frequency_command_ characteristic_selection/Analog_speed_command_ characteristic_selection <b-17>, refer to {5.3.3 Area b}.

4. Press the [SET] key.

・ The selection of "b-17" is confirmed, a current setting value

(Initialized data is "1") is displayed.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

5. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "0" (0 to ± 10 V).

6. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "b-17" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, the change cannot be confirmed.

7. Turn off the inverter.

8. Open the front cover.

・ For how to open the front cover, refer to {3.2 How to Open and Close Front Cover}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M4).

9. Short circuit the terminals [AIN1] and [GND] on the control board <VFC66-Z>.

・ For the terminal block and the position of terminals, refer to

{3.3.1 How to Connect Inverter Terminals}.

・ Use the Phillips screwdriver (M3).

10. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

11. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

－ 314 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

12. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

13. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "S-06."

・ For details of the Analog_input(1)_adjustment <S-06>, refer to {5.3.16 Area S}.

14. Press the [SET] key.

・ On the extreme right, "0" is displayed.

・ The underscore blinks on the extreme left, which indicates that this becomes the operating digit.

15. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become "1040."

・ "1040" is a password. It is required to use <S-06>.

16. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and "S-06" is displayed again.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-06." Follow the procedures again from the step 14.

When an error occurs due to incorrect password input

17. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

18. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink a required digit, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change the number to "1."

－ 315 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless a setting value is specified while it is displayed, it cannot be changed.

19. Press the [SET] key.

・ The change is confirmed, and "S-06" is displayed again.

・ The display of the setting value automatically returns to that of the setting item in ten seconds. Unless the [SET] key is pressed while a setting value is displayed, it is not confirmed.

20. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

21. Remove the short-circuit wire between the terminals

[AIN1] and [GND].

22. Short circuit the terminals [AIN1] and [+10].

23. Install the direct-current voltage meter or the tester between the terminals [AIN1] and [GND].

24. Close the front cover and turn on the inverter.

25. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns on, and a setting item appears in the seven-segment display. For example, immediately after the inverter is turned on, the first item of the basic setting area is displayed.

26. Press the keys [ ] and [ ] to display "S-00."

27. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink numbers, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to change them to become "S-06."

28. Press the [SET] key.

・ On the extreme right, "0" is displayed, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

－ 316 －

Chapter 8 Replacing Control Board

29. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify numbers to become

"1040."

30. Press the [SET] key.

・ The password input is confirmed, and "S-06" is displayed again.

・ When a different number from "1040" is input, "P-Err" indicating an error is displayed. In this case, press the keys

[ ] and [ ] to return to "S-06." Follow the procedures again from the step 28.

When an error occurs due to incorrect password input

31. Press the [SET] key.

・ Again, "0" is displayed on the extreme right, and the underscore blinks on the extreme left.

32. Press the [JOG/ ] key to blink required digits, and then press the keys [ ] and [ ] to specify a value 1000 times a value measured by the voltage meter or the tester.

・ When it cannot be measured, "9930" should be specified. In this case, however, accuracy will be decreased.

33. Press the [SET] key.

・ When "S-06" is displayed again, the settings of the parameters <L-01> and <L-02> are automatically changed.

34. Press the [MONI/FNC] key.

・ The [FNC] LED turns off, after a monitor item is displayed for about one second, its data appears.

35. Turn off the inverter, and open the front cover.

36. Remove the short-circuit wire between the terminals [AIN1] and [+10].

37. Remove the installed direct-current voltage meter or tester.

38. Close the front cover.

－ 317 －

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

9.1 Common Specifications

The table below lists the common specifications of the inverter.

Capacity range 200 V class

400 V class

2.2 kW, 3.7 kW, 5.5 kW, 7.5 kW, 11 kW, 15 kW, 22 kW, 30 kW, 37 kW, 45 kW, 55 kW, 75 kW, 90 kW

(Parallel) 150 kW, 180 kW

2.2 kW, 3.7 kW, 5.5 kW, 7.5 kW, 11 kW, 15 kW, 22 kW, 30 kW, 37 kW, 45 kW, 55 kW, 75 kW, 110 kW, 160 kW, 200 kW, 250 kW, 315 kW

(Parallel) 400 kW, 500 kW, 600 kW, 750 kW, 1000 kW

200 to 220 V±10 %, 50/60 Hz

380 to 460 V±10 %, 50/60 Hz

Rated power supply and variation

200 V class

400 V class

Overload rated current

Control specifications

Control method

150 % (60 seconds), 200 % (three seconds). However, for models over 75 kW, it is limited to 150 % (60 seconds).

Induction motor ED motor

V/f control

Vector control without speed sensor (1)

Vector control with speed sensor

Vector control without position speed sensor

Vector control with position speed sensor

Output frequency range

Start torque

(When our motor is used at cool temperature)

Speed control range

(When our motor is used)

-

-

0.1 to 400.0 Hz

200 %

1:150

200 %

1:1000

0 to 400.0 Hz

150 %

1:100

200 %

1:1000

Torque limit

Powering/ regenerative range: 0 to

200 %

No

Forward powering/forward regenerative/reverse powering/reverse regenerative range: 0 to 200 % for each

Yes Torque control

PWM carrier frequency

Acceleration or deceleration time

1 to 6 kHz

0.1 to 3600.0 seconds (pitch 0.1 second)

－ 318 －

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

Input signal

Other operation functions

Analog input

Digital input

(option)

Speed/ frequency command

Function terminal

JOG, S-pattern acceleration or deceleration, speed/frequency jump, droop control, regeneration stall prevention, instantaneous power interruption restart, DC brake, rotation direction change, Autotuning, protection retry, cooling fan "ON"/"OFF" function, cumulative operation timer

For only [V/f]: Torque boost, stabilizer, V/f characteristics (V/f constant, square reduction, polygonal line)

For only [IM]: Initial excitation

Number of inputs: 1ch as a standard, up to 2ch as an option, 2ch as an external option. However, for a standard 1ch and optional 1ch, 4 to 20 mA can be input.

0 to 10 V, ±10 V, 4 to 20 mA

ProfiBus, CC-Link, DeviceNet, OPCN-1, RS-485 (Modbus RTU),

EtherNet/IP

0 to 10 V or ±10 V (Maximum speed/10 V, maximum frequency/10 V)

4 to 20 mA (Maximum speed/20 mA, maximum frequency/20 mA)

±20000 digit when the communication option is used (Maximum speed/20000 digit, maximum frequency/20000 digit)

0 to ±10 V (150 %/-10 V)

±10000 digit when the communication option is used (150 %/7500 digit)

The sync mode/source mode can be changed.

Torque command

Terminal block input

Fixed function terminal

Function terminal

Output signal Output for speed/ frequency meter

Analog monitor output

One contact: Forward operation command

Number of inputs: Five as a standard, six as an option, six as an external option

Input item: Preset speed/frequency command (seven), acceleration or deceleration time selection (four types), MRH mode operation, speed/ frequency hold, S-pattern acceleration or deceleration prohibition, maximum speed/maximum frequency reduction, droop control disabled, torque control selection, reverse operation command, DC brake command, initial excitation command, external failure signal (four contacts), traceback external trigger, second setting block selection, emergency stop (Normally close), speed/frequency command terminal block selection, reverse operation command, forward JOG command, reverse JOG command, emergency stop (Normally open), protection reset

PWM pulse six times the speed output frequency

The analog meter can be connected. However, it cannot be used with standard analog output at the same time.

Number of outputs: 1ch as a standard, 2ch as an option. However, for a standard 1ch and optional 1ch, 4 to 20 mA can be output.

0 to ±10 V, 4 to 20 mA

Output item: Output voltage, output current, output torque, speed/output frequency, speed command/frequency command, internal PLC output, and others

Number of outputs: Two as a standard, two as an option, two as an external option

－ 319 －

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

Internal PLC Program capacity

Sequence

Function

(superblock)

Open collector output

Output item: Speed/frequency detection (two), setting reached, torque detection (two types: with pole and absolute value), during power failure, overload pre-alarm, during retry, in reverse operation, protection operation code, in operation, timer 1 elapsed, timer 2 elapsed, second setting block being selected, failed fan motor, DB abnormal state

16 kB, about 1024 steps

・ However, to edit contents of the internal PLC, the personal computer tool is required.

Input: Five as a standard, 12 as an option, communication input from the superior CPU (option)

Output: Open collector (two as a standard, four as an option), contact output (1a, 1c), communication output to the superior CPU (option)

Types of internal relay: Input relay, output relay, on-timer relay, off-timer relay, and others

Command: A contact, B contact, C contact

Function: About 30 types including inversion, addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and remainder

About 15 types including PI control and speed control

Item displayed on the console Output frequency, speed, speed/frequency setting, output current, output torque, direct-current voltage, input/output terminal check, protection history, and others

Protection function Overcurrent, direct-current part overvoltage, insufficient voltage, overspeed/overfrequency, overtorque, inverter overheat, motor overheat, charging resistance overheat, overload, IGBT protection operation, memory abnormality, current sensor abnormality, start traffic, communication timeout error, speed control error, FCL operation, and others

Personal computer tool

Environmental condition

Console Dataset (parameter setting), Control Block Editor (internal PLC edition), VF Monitor (operation and protection monitor)

Operating temperature: 0 to 50 ℃

Humidity: 20 to 90 %RH (no condensation)

Altitude: 1000 m or less

Storage temperature: -20 to 60 ℃

Atmosphere: No plasticizer such as corrosive gas, metallic powder, oil, halogen, and DOP should be contained.

Vibration: 5.9 m/s 2 (0.6 G or less, 10 to 55 Hz). Comply with JIS C60068-2-6.

Under an environment below the overvoltage category III defined by

IEC60664-1 and below the pollution degree 2.

Unit protective structure

Compatible standards

IP00 (JIS C 0920): Open-type structure, not especially consider a protection against human bodies, a protection against invasion of solid objects, and a protection against invasion of water.

IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2007 (Low Voltage Directive), EN55011 Group1 ClassA

(EMC Directive), IEC/EN61800-3 C3 (EMC Directive)

－ 320 －

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

（１） In vector control without speed sensor, sufficient torque may not be obtained during regeneration.

－ 321 －

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

9.2 List of Capacity

The tables below list the capacity for each inverter model.

The applied motor capacity shows a typical motor capacity. The input power factor and input capacity show values when the applied rated motor is output, depending on power supply impedance.

For the models below, the direct-current reactor (DCL) is an option.

・ 200 V class: <2R222> through <5522>

・ 400 V class: <2R244> through <5544>

■ 200 V class

Inverter model

Applied motor capacity

[kW]

Rated output current [A]

Maximum output voltage [V]

Input voltage [V]

Input power factor

Input capacity

[kVA]

Rated input current [A]

Without

DCL

With DCL

Without

DCL

With DCL

DCL

Cooling method

2R222

2.2

10

4.95

3.54

14.3

3R722

3.7

17

5R522

5.5

24

8.74

34.9

7R522

7.5

32.5

11.7

47.9

1122

11

46

16.4

67.3

1522

200 to 220 V (corresponding to input voltage)

15

62.5

Three-phase three-wire 200 to 220 V±10 % 50/60 Hz

Delay about 0.7 (When DCL is connected: About 0.9)

8.4

5.85

24.2

12.1

16.6

23.3

31.8

22.4

91.8

2222

22

87

45.5

32.5

131

10.2

16.9

25.2

33.7

47.3

64.7

93.8

DCL3R722 DCL3R722 DCL7R522 DCL7R522 DCL1122 DCL1522 DCL2222

Forcible cooling

Inverter model

Applied motor capacity

[kW]

Rated output current [A]

Maximum output voltage [V]

Input voltage [V]

Input power factor

Input capacity

[kVA]

Without

DCL

Rated input current [A]

With DCL

Without

DCL

With DCL

DCL

Cooling method

3022

30

121

61.9

43.6

179

3722

37

146

53.7

221

4522

45

185

65.6

266

5522

55

222

80.1

323

7522

75

280

200 to 220 V (corresponding to input voltage)

Three-phase three-wire 200 to 220 V±10 % 50/60 Hz

Delay about 0.7 (When DCL is connected: About 0.9)

76.4

92 112 －

108

－

9022

90

340

－

130

－

126 155 189 231 312 375

DCL3022 DCL3722 DCL4522 DCL5522 DCL7522 DCL9022

Forcible cooling

－ 322 －

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

Parallel model

Inverter model

Applied motor capacity

[kW]

Rated output current [A]

15022

150

18022

180

Maximum output voltage [V]

Input voltage [V]

Input power factor

560 680

200 to 220 V

(corresponding to input voltage)

Three-phase three-wire 200 to 220

V±10 % 50/60 Hz

Delay about 0.7

(When DCL is connected: About 0.9)

Input capacity

[kVA]

Rated input current [A]

DCL

Without

DCL

With DCL

Without

DCL

With DCL

Cooling method

－

214

－

－

257

－

618

DCL7522 x 2

742

DCL9022 x 2

Forcible cooling

■ 400 V class

Inverter model

Applied motor capacity

[kW]

Rated output current [A]

Maximum output voltage [V]

Input voltage [V]

Input power factor

Input capacity

[kVA]

Rated input current [A]

Without

DCL

With DCL

Without

DCL

With DCL

DCL

Cooling method

2R244

2.2

5.5

4.95

3.55

7.14

3R744

3.7

9.2

Three-phase three-wire 380 to 460 V±10 % 50/60 Hz

Delay about 0.7 (When DCL is connected: About 0.9)

8.36

5.89

12.1

5R544

5.5

13

7R544

7.5

17

1144

11

24

1544

380 to 460 V (corresponding to input voltage)

11.9

8.61

17.2

16.3

11.5

23.5

23.2

16.8

33.5

15

32.5

31.7

22.5

45.8

2244

22

46

45.4

31.8

65.5

5.12

8.5

12.4

16.6

24.2

32.5

45.9

DCL3R744 DCL3R744 DCL7R544 DCL7R544 DCL1544 DCL1544 DCL2244

Forcible cooling

－ 323 －

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

Inverter model

Applied motor capacity

[kW]

Rated output current [A]

Maximum output voltage [V]

Input voltage [V]

Input power factor

Input capacity

[kVA]

Without

DCL

Rated input current [A]

With DCL

Without

DCL

With DCL

DCL

Cooling method

3044

30

62.5

61.8

43.9

89.2

3744

37

75.5

Three-phase three-wire 380 to 460 V±10 % 50/60 Hz

Delay about 0.7 (When DCL is connected: About 0.9)

76.2

54.1

110

4544

45

92.5

5544

55

111

7544

75

146

11044

380 to 460 V (corresponding to input voltage)

91.2

64.7

132

111

79

160

－

107

－

110

210

－

157

－

16044

160

300

－

225

－

63.4

78.1

93.4

114 154 227 324

DCL3044 DCL3744 DCL4544 DCL5544 DCL7544 DCL11044 DCL16044

Forcible cooling

Inverter model

Applied motor capacity

[kW]

Rated output current [A]

Maximum output voltage [V]

Input voltage [V]

Input power factor

20044

200

25044

250

31544

315

370 460 600

380 to 460 V (corresponding to input voltage)

Three-phase three-wire 380 to

460 V±10 % 50/60 Hz

Delay about 0.7 (When DCL is connected: About 0.9)

Input capacity

[kVA]

Rated input current [A]

Without

DCL

With DCL

Without

DCL

With DCL

DCL

Cooling method

－

281

－

－

348

－

－

439

－

406 502 634

DCL20044 DCL25044 DCL31544

Forcible cooling

－ 324 －

Chapter 9 Standard Specifications

Parallel model

Inverter model

Applied motor capacity

[kW]

Rated output current [A]

Maximum output voltage [V]

Input voltage [V]

Input power factor

Input capacity

[kVA]

Without

DCL

Rated input current [A]

With DCL

Without

DCL

With DCL

DCL

Cooling method

40044

400

740

－

557

－

380 to 460V (corresponding to input voltage)

804

DCL20044 x 2

50044

500

920

－

696

－

1005

DCL25044 x 2

60044

600

1110

－

836

－

1207

DCL20044 x 3

Forcible cooling

75044

750

1380

－

1046

－

100044

1000

1840

Three-phase three-wire 380 to 460 V±10 % 50/60 Hz

Delay about 0.7 (When DCL is connected: About 0.9)

1510

DCL25044 x 3

－

1394

－

2012

DCL25044 x 4

－ 325 －

Chapter 10 Outline Drawing of Inverter

Chapter 10 Outline Drawing of Inverter

10.1 Standard Type

For the outline, the standard type is divided into a small type and large type depending on the capacity.

■ Small type

Inverter model

200 V class 400 V class

2R222

3R722

2R244

3R744

5R522

7R522

1122

1522

5R544

7R544

1144

1544

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

2244

3044

3744

4544

5544

200

190

190

240

A

130

130

200

300

300

410

410

220

250

250

300

B

150

150

220

400

420

495

495

10

30

30

30

C

10

10

10

50

60

42.5

42.5

445

530

530

575

575

245

245

395

395

Dimension (Unit: mm)

D E F

250

250

265

265

7.5

7.5

260

260

410

410

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

460

550

550

600

600

7.5

10

10

12.5

12.5

205

245

245

270

G

195

195

205

265

265

270

270

-

-

-

-

-

-

H

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

I

-

-

-

-

－ 326 －

Inverter model

200 V class 400 V class

7522

9022

7544

―

―

―

11044

16044

A

410

530

530

410

■ Large type

B

500

623

623

503

C

45

46.5

46.5

46.5

Chapter 10 Outline Drawing of Inverter

Dimension (Unit: mm)

D E F

695

745

720

770

12.5

12.5

745

975

770

1000

12.5

12.5

G

350

350

350

350

H

145

145

145

145

I

205

205

205

205

Inverter model

400 V class

20044

25044

31544

Inverter model

400 V class

20044

25044

31544

A

445

445

520

B

525

525

660

C

40

40

70

J

975

Dimension (Unit: mm)

K L M

1000 12.5

386

975 1000

1100 1130

12.5

15

386

500

Dimension (Unit: mm)

D E F

70

70

100

160

160

200

42.5

42.5

49.5

G

47.5

47.5

50.5

H I

685 602.5

685 602.5

860 740.5

－ 327 －

Chapter 10 Outline Drawing of Inverter

10.2 Non-standard Type (Heat Generation Part Protruded Outside)

The heat generation part of the non-standard type inverter is protruded outside from the control panel and others. Its installation requires a through hole.

Inverter

200 V class 400 V class

2R222

3R722

2R244

3R744

5R522

7R522

1122

1522

5R544

7R544

1144

1544

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

2244

3044

3744

4544

5544

7544

―

―

―

11044

16044

410

530

530

410

300

300

410

410

200

190

190

240

A

100

100

200

500

623

623

503

400

420

495

495

220

250

250

300

B

150

150

220

45

46.5

46.5

46.5

50

60

42.5

42.5

10

30

30

30

C

25

25

10

575

695

745

745

975

445

530

530

575

285

285

395

395

Dimension (Unit: mm)

D E F

285

285

300

300

7.5

7.5

300

300

410

410

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

460

550

550

600

600

720

770

770

1000

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

7.5

10

10

12.5

350

305

305

350

265

265

270

270

205

245

245

270

G

195

195

205

H

103

I

92

103 92

112.6

92.4

112.6

92.4

90 155

90

115

155

155

105

105

160

160

105.5

164.5

105.5

164.5

145

145

145

145

205

205

205

205

－ 328 －

Chapter 10 Outline Drawing of Inverter

1522

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

The tables below list the dimensions of the through hole.

Inverter model

200 V class 400 V class

2R222 2R244

J

-

K

152

L

-

3R722

5R522

7R522

1122

3R744

5R544

7R544

1144

-

-

-

206

152

217

217

260

-

-

-

11

―

―

1544

2244

3044

3744

4544

5544

7544

―

11044

16044

206

264

349

369

442

442

-

-

-

-

260

310

409

424

510

510

515

635

635

515

-

-

12

12

-

-

11

-

11

-

-

-

22

-

-

23

19

27.5

22

16

16

-

-

Dimension (Unit: mm)

M N O

-

100

100

26

26

200

200

190

190

8.5

8.5

35

35

240

300

300

410

410

410

530

530

410

50

52.5

52.5

52.5

52.5

35

54.5

62

50

P

272

272

274

274

362

362

425

500

500

537

537

658

708

708

940 -

-

-

-

520

520

549

549

-

380

380

435

-

-

Q

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

10

10

9

5

-

9

-

-

R

-

Inverter model

200 V class 400 V class

2R222

3R722

2R244

3R744

5R522

7R522

1122

1522

5R544

7R544

1144

1544

2222

3022

3722

4522

5522

7522

9022

2244

3044

3744

4544

5544

7544

―

―

―

11044

16044

575

695

745

745

975

445

530

530

575

285

285

395

395

Dimension (Unit: mm)

S T U

285

285

6.5

6.5

6.5

6.5

5.5

5.5

11.7

11.7

5.5

5.5

21.3

21.3

5

10

10

12

12

11

11

11

11

26

26

26

26

24

10

20

20

26

－ 329 －

Chapter 11 Supporting Overseas Standards

Chapter 11 Supporting Overseas Standards

This inverter has been tested in accordance with European Low Voltage Directive, EMC (Electro Magnetic

Compatibility) Directive, Machinery Directive, and the North American standard UL508C. The test results demonstrate that the inverter conforms to each directive and standard listed in the table below. However, only incorporating our inverter and a supported option into a device does not mean that the entire device conforms to Low Voltage Directive, EMC Directive, Machinery Directive, and the UL standard. The customer who has assembled a final product will be liable for conformity with each directive and standard of the entire device.

The customer should check the conformity with each directive and standard of the final product.

For supporting overseas standards, refer to another manual "VF66B Overseas Standard Support Instruction

Manual."

Compatible standards

Low Voltage Directive

2006/95/EC

EMC Directive

2004/108/EC

EN61800-5-1:2007

Machinery Directive

2006/42/EC

UL Standard

Emission

Immunity

EN61800-3:2004 second environment category C3

EN55011:2009/A1:2010 Group1 ClassA

EN61800-3:2004 second environment category C3

EN61326-3-1:2008 SIL2 ＊ 1

EN61800-5-2:2007 STO

EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Category:3 PL:d

EN61508:2010 SIL:2

EN62061:2005 SIL:2

EN60204-1:2006/AC:2010 Stop Category 0

UL508C

－ 330 －

Chapter 12 Attentions for Contacting Us

Chapter 12 Attentions for Contacting Us

If you want to order a replacement for a failed part or have a technical question, let us or your supplier know the issues below.

(1) Model, capacity (kW), and input voltage (V) of your inverter

(2) Model, capacity (kW), rated speed (r/min), rated voltage (V), and number of poles of your motor

(3) Serial number and software version No. of your inverter

・ For the software version No., check a label attached to the control board <VFC66-Z> as shown in the figure to the right.

(4) Descriptions of a failure and a state when it occurs

(5) Operating state, load state, ambient condition, date of purchase, operation condition

(6) Distributor name, sales department name

■ Attentions to distributors

When delivering this inverter with your any product built in, consider that this manual can be distributed to end users.

Also, when changing our Initialized data for setting parameters of this inverter, consider that the changed value would be delivered to end users.

－ 331 －

Chapter 13 Industrial Product Warranty

Chapter 13 Industrial Product Warranty

13.1 No-charge warranty period

The no-charge warranty period shall be for one year from the date of delivery to you or your customer.

In the case of repair, overhaul or other maintenance by Toyo Denki or a company designated by Toyo Denki, the warranty period for the parts concerned shall be for one year from the date of acceptance inspection.

13.2 Warranty scope

13.2.1 Problem diagnosis

As a general rule, initial diagnosis in the event of product failure should be performed by your company.

However, if you request initial problem diagnosis, it can be performed on your behalf by Toyo Denki or a member of our service network.

Please note that if Toyo Denki is not responsible for the cause of the failure, a fee will be charged for the initial diagnosis.

13.2.2 Repair

Repair, part replacement, and onsite repair shall be provided free of charge.

However, this shall not apply in the following cases:

① When the problem is a result of improper product handling, conditions, environment, usage method, etc., by you or your customer

② When the problem was caused by a system designed by you or your customer

③ When the problem was caused by deficiencies in a program created by you or your customer

④ When the problem originated in something other than the delivered product

⑤ When the problem was caused by modification performed without the prior approval of Toyo Denki

⑥ When the problem was caused by repair or modification performed by someone other than Toyo Denki or a company designated by Toyo Denki

⑦ When the problem was caused by a force majeure such as a natural disaster, fire, or accident.

⑧ Other cases where Toyo Denki is not responsible for the cause of the problem

⑨ The no-charge warranty period has expired

13.3 Disclaimer

Irrespective of whether the no-charge warranty period is in effect, this warranty shall not compensate you or yourcustomer for any damages that are not the responsibility of Toyo Denki, or for any lost opportunity, lost profit, secondary damages, or accident due to the failure of the Toyo Denki product concerned.

Moreover, compensation shall not be provided relating to articles other than the Toyo Denki product concerned.

13.4 Repair period after product discontinuation

Once the product has gone out of production, Toyo Denki will continue to provide repair service for the product for a period of seven years.

However, please note that the procurement of electronic components for the product may become difficult during that time, and repair may not be possible.

－ 332 －

Chapter 13 Industrial Product Warranty

13.5 Delivery conditions

In the case of standard products ordered without test operation and adjustment, delivery shall take place upon product arrival at your company, and Toyo Denki shall not be responsible for onsite test operation and adjustments.

All Rights

The copyright of this manual belongs to Toyo Denki. Duplicating all or part of contents of this manual without obtaining permission from the right holder is prohibited under the Copyright Act.

All rights of company names and product names described in this manual belong to their respective owners.

－ 333 －

Chapter 13 Industrial Product Warranty

－ 334 －

INDEX

〔

alphabetical

〕

－ 335 －

%

% torque command …………………………… 177

4

Area L …………………………………………… 214

Area n …………………………………………… 215

Area o …………………………………………… 216

Area P …………………………………………… 217

Area S …………………………………………… 217

ASR ……………………………………………… 208

Auto boost ……………………………………… 176

Autotuning ……………………… 11 ， ， ， 291

4 to 20 mA input ………………………………… 242

B

5

Blown fuse ……………………………………… 265

52MA ………………………………………… 29 ，

C

6

6F ………………………………………………… 155

8

86A ………………………………… 29 ， ， ，

A

Calibration ……………………………………… 156 category ………………………………………… 330

Charging resistance overheat ………………… 264

Command_input_when_coupled ……………… 148

Communication time error …………………… 263

Communication timeout error ………………… 264

Console ……………………………………… 13 ，

Control board …………………………………… 14

Converter overheat …………………………… 266

CPU abnormality handling …………………… 264

Creep_speed …………………………………… 210

Cumulative operation time ……………………… 68

Cumulative operation timer ……………… 182 ，

Current sensor abnormality …………………… 263

Current_control_proportion_gain ……………… 179

Absolute value torque command ……………… 177

AC initial excitation …………………………… 209

Acceleration/Deceleration_time_selection …… 167

AIN1 ……………………………………………… 29

[AIN1] ……………………………………… 97 ，

[ ] key …………………………………………… 47

[ ] key …………………………………………… 47

[ALM] LED ………………………………… 299 ，

Analog input monitor display selection ……… 195

Analog input torque command gain …………… 206

Analog_input_ZeroLimit_voltage ……………… 155

AOT1 ……………………………………………… 29

Area A …………………………………………… 132

Area b …………………………………………… 145

Area c …………………………………………… 158

Area d …………………………………………… 167

Area E …………………………………………… 173

Area F …………………………………………… 180

Area G …………………………………………… 190

Area H …………………………………………… 196

Area i …………………………………………… 203

Area J …………………………………………… 211

D

D-axis Measurement Mode Autotuning ……… 73 d-axis pulse pole determination ……………… 143

DC initial excitation …………………………… 209

DC_brake_gain ………………………………… 145

DC_brake_operation_time …………………… 145

DC_brake_voltage ……………………………… 131

DCL ……………………………………… 17 ， 28

Deceleration stop ……………………………… 146

Deceleration stop with DC brake ……………… 146

Deceleration time ……………………………… 167

[DIR] LED ………………………………………… 70

Direct Current Mode Autotuning …………… 73 ，

Direct-current part overvoltage ……………… 264

Direct-current voltage ……………………… 66 ，

Droop control …………………………………… 204

－ 336 －

E

ED motor …………………………… 11 ， ， ，

EMC Directive …………………………………… 330

Emergency stop ………………………………… 263

Emission ………………………………………… 330

Exhaust amount ………………………………… 16

External contact ………………………………… 95

External failure ……………………… 184 ， 263

Induction motor …………………………………… 41

Initial_excitation_selection …………………… 209

Instantaneous_power_interruption_restart … 147

Inverter capacity and voltage class …………… 216

Inverter_operation_mode_monitor …………… 215

Inverter_output_maximum_voltage …………… 180

IO66-Z …………………………………………… 195

J

F

[JOG/ ] key ………………………………… 47 ，

JOG_acceleration/deceleration_time_selection

…………………………………………………… 167

JOG_stop_frequency ………………………… 145

JOG_stop_mode_selection …………………… 145

JOG_stop_speed ……………………………… 145

JOG-command_input_selection ……………… 148

Failed fan ………………………………… 263 ，

FCL operation …………………………… 263 ，

Flux_command ………………………………… 179

Flux_reinforcing_rate_at_start ………………… 179

Forward_direction_change …………………… 175

Forward_JOG_frequency ……………………… 129

Forward_JOG_speed ………………………… 129

Forward_powering_torque_limit ……………… 151

Forward_regenerative_torque_limit ………… 151

Free start ………………………………………… 174

Free stop ………………………………………… 146

Free_start_maximum_speed ………………… 180

Frequency ……………………………………… 148

Frequency command value …………………… 294

Front cover ……………………………………… 13

Full Mode Autotuning …………………………… 73

[FWD/REV] key ………………………………… 47

L

Line speed ………………………………………… 66

Line_speed_monitor_adjustment …………… 194

Low Voltage Directive ………………………… 330

M

G

Gain …………………………… 237 ， ， ，

Gate board abnormality ……………………… 265

Gate board communication abnormality ……… 265

Gate power supply abnormality ……………… 265

H

High-efficient_mode_usage_selection ……… 175

I

IGBT protection operation …………………… 263

Immunity ………………………………………… 330

Machinery Directive …………………………… 330

Main circuit board ………………………………… 14

Main unit version ………………………………… 68

Manual boost …………………………………… 176

Maximum_deviation(negative) ………………… 173

Maximum_deviation(positive) ………………… 173

Maximum_speed ……………………………… 133

MC ……………………………………………… 266

MC response abnormality ……………………… 266

Mechanical loss compensation ……………… 209

Memory abnormality …………………………… 263

MI1 ………………………………………………… 29

[MI1] through [MI5] ……………………………… 160

Minimum frequency start ……………………… 174

Minimum_frequency …………………………… 132

MO1 ……………………………………………… 29

[MO1] …………………………………………… 197

[MONI/FNC] key ………………………………… 47

Motor overheat ………………………………… 263

Motor speed ………………………………… 66 ，

Motor temperature ……………………………… 66

Motor_cooling_fan(sensor-less_drive) ……… 180

－ 337 －

Motor_core_loss_torque_compensation

……………………………………………… 140 ，

Motor_d-axis_inductance ……………………… 141

Motor_magnetic_flux …………………………… 141

Motor_mutual_inductance …………………… 140

Motor_overheat_protection_operation_selection

…………………………………………………… 183

Motor_primary_resistance ………… 138 ， 141

Motor_protect_temperature …………………… 195

Motor_q-axis_inductance ……………………… 141

Motor_secondary_resistance ………………… 140

Motor_temperature_compensation …………… 179

Multifunction input terminal ……………………… 29

Multifunction output terminal …………………… 29

N

PG66-Z …………………………………… 14 ， 40

PL ………………………………………………… 330

PLC function …………………………………… 217

Pole_determination_selection ………………… 143

Positioning ……………………………………… 210

Power supply abnormality …………………… 265

Powering_torque_limit ………………………… 150

Powering_torque_limit_usage_selection …… 151

P-register_setting ……………………………… 217

Protection contact ………………………… 29 ，

Protection history …………………………… 69 ，

Protection operation code ……………………… 201

Protection_retry_count_setting ……………… 184

PS ………………………………………………… 29

PS common input …………………………… 26 ，

Pulse train ……………………………………… 191

PWM_carrier_frequency ……………………… 136

Number_of_motor_pole ………………… 134 ，

Number_of_moving_pulse_within_a_creep_ period …………………………………………… 210

Number_of_stop_pulse ………………………… 210

Q q-axis pulse pole determination ……………… 143 q-axis pulse pole determination current ……… 135

O

R

Offset …………………………… 237 ， ， ，

Open phase …………………………………… 263

Operating digit ……………………………… 53 ，

Operation contact ………………………………… 29

Operation_command_input_selection ……… 148

Optional error …………………………………… 264

OT ……………………………………………… 188

Output current ……………………………… 66 ，

Output frequency …………………………… 66 ，

Output torque ……………………………… 66 ，

Output voltage ……………………………… 66 ，

Overcurrent protection ………………………… 263

Overfrequency protection ……………………… 263

Overload pre-alarm …………………………… 201

Overload protection ……………………… 182 ，

Overspeed protection ………………………… 264

Overtorque protection …………………… 188 ，

Regeneration_stall_prevention_function_usage_ selection ………………………………………… 173

Regeneration_stall_prevention_voltage ……… 173

Regenerative_torque_limit …………………… 150

Regenerative_torque_limit_usage_selection

…………………………………………………… 151

Reset ……………………………………… 262 ，

Restart_delay_time …………………………… 174

Restart_prohibition_time ……………………… 177

Reverse_JOG_frequency ……………………… 129

Reverse_JOG_speed ………………………… 129

Reverse_powering_torque_limit ……………… 151

Reverse_prohibition_mode_selection ……… 147

Reverse_regenerative_torque_limit ………… 151

S

P

Parameter ………………………… 56 ， ， ，

PG ………………………………………… 14 ， 30

PG error ………………………………………… 264

PG_selection …………………………………… 137

Second setting block selection ………………… 165

Sensor error …………………………………… 264

[SET] key ………………………………………… 47

SET66-Z …………………………………… 14 ，

Setting a negative value to a command ……… 89

Setting area ………………………………… 57 ，

－ 338 －

Setting block ……………………………………… 64

Setting error …………………………………… 264

Setting_data_rewrite_protection ……………… 145

SIL ……………………………………………… 330

Simple mode …………………………… 56 ， 58

Simulation_mode ……………………………… 175

Speed …………………………………… 84 ， 97

Speed command value …………………… 66 ，

Speed control error ……………………… 189 ，

Speed_command_input_selection …………… 148

Speed_deviation_limiting_command_selection

…………………………………………………… 173

Stabilizer_amount ……………………………… 131

Start error without sensor ……………………… 264

[START] key ……………………………………… 47

Start traffic ……………………………………… 264

Start_mode_selection ………………………… 174

ST-F ……………………………………… 26 ， 66

[ST-F] …………………………………………… 150

[STOP/RESET] key ……………………………… 47

Stop_frequency ………………………………… 145

Stop_mode_selection ………………………… 145

Stop_speed ……………………………………… 145

[SW1] ……………………………………… 152 ，

[SW2] …………………………………………… 156

Vector control without sensor …………………… 11

VFC66-Z …………………………… 14 ， ， ，

T

Temperature_detection_selection …………… 190

Torque command ………………………… 66 ，

Torque_boost_amount ………………………… 130

Torque_command_input_place_selection …… 206

Torque_command_mode_selection ………… 176

Traceback ………………………………… 185 ，

TVTH66-Z ……………………………………… 190

U

UL Standard …………………………………… 330

Unit overheat …………………………………… 265

V

V/f control ………………………………………… 11

V/f pattern ……………………………………… 178

V/f_pattern_selection ………………………… 178

Variable structure proportion gain …………… 208

Vector control with sensor ……………………… 11

－ 339 －

Blank Page

https://www.toyodenki.co.jp/en/

HEAD OFFICE： Tokyo Tatemono Yaesu Bldg, 1-4-16 Yaesu, Chuo-ku,

Tokyo, Japan ZIP CODE 103-0028

TEL ： +81-3-5202-8132 - 6

FAX ： +81-3-5202-8150

In addition, the contents of this the "operating manual" may be changed without a preliminary announcement by specification change of a product etc.

Please understand that it may differ from the contents of the "operating manual" enclosed by the model of purchase, and the contents of the "operating manual" posted on our homepage.

Please have a look from our homepage about the newest "operating manual."

Contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

TIM003[L]_20160428